JP2022010046A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving interest of a game.

SOLUTION: After an execution of a bet operation, a slot machine 10 starts rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on an operation on a start lever 41. Then, corresponding reels are stopped by operations on stop switches 42-44, and a stop combination according to a lottery result may stop. The lottery result sometimes causes shift to an advantageous section in which push order notification of a push order bell or a push order replay may be performed. In the advantageous section, control during a bonus may differ depending on a stop combination at the time of winning the bonus.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated while a medal as a game medium is bet on the slot machine, an internal lottery is performed, the reel starts rotating, and the reel stops during rotation. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machines illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The present invention
Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each orbital body, and
A starting operation means in which the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started when the orbiting body is operated, and
A stop operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means for starting the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stopping the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated.
A lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the privilege giving means capable of giving the privilege corresponding to the predetermined result and the privilege giving means.
A means for shifting to the special state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a situation where the right to shift the gaming state to a special state advantageous to the player has been acquired.
A setting means in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values in the plurality of stages is set.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
A normal state and a specific state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
A means capable of terminating the specific state when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, and
A means capable of grasping the remaining number of the specific state and
A means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied.
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating stop control of a reel. It is a flowchart which shows the RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 1st RT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 2nd RT state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 3rd RT state. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a BB state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the display mode. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a special zone. It is a figure for demonstrating the main result of performing a lottery about an instruction function, and the setting difference of a winning probability. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode lottery table for transition to a display mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number table. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional game number lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transition notification processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the push order notification effect performed in the auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the push order combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the end determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of an instruction monitor and a section display. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining game number management processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the start game and the end game of an advantageous section, and the display of a section display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of betting. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pushing order notification. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the addition effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notification timing and the addition effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process during a bonus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notifying the transition trigger. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the number of games remaining in an actual advantageous section, and the number of games remaining on a display. It is a figure which shows an example of the post-addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition notification timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the post-addition notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation effect processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of a rotation effect. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the rotation effect and the stop operation. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 1st pseudo-effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pseudo addition notification. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an off-counter table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-freeze lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the instruction lottery process in BB. It is a flowchart which shows the process for BB middle mode transition. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a mode transition table in BB, and (b) is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table in BB. It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition in BB. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between each rotation effect and addition notification. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 2nd pseudo-effect. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo addition process in BB. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-addition table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit. It is a timing chart for explaining the difference between the addition and the pseudo addition. It is a figure for demonstrating the difference between the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus. In the first modification, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the BB medium addition processing, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo addition table, and (c) is an example of a BB medium addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows an example of various pseudo addition tables in the modification 2. In the third modification, (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of various pseudo-addition tables, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of an addition table in BB. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo addition table in the modification 4. In the second embodiment, it is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing for a BB winning game by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 2nd pseudo-effect. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo addition process in BB. It is a flowchart which shows the freeze non-occurrence processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the BB end notification process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the presence or absence of addition in BB. It is a figure for demonstrating the presence / absence of addition in BB in the modification 1. FIG. In the second modification, (a) is a flowchart showing the BB end notification process by the main controller, and (b) is a flowchart showing the attack mode end process by the main controller. In the third modification, (a) is a flowchart showing the BB winning process by the main control device, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display effect by the auxiliary display unit. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo addition process in BB in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo addition table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition notification. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. It is a figure which shows an example of a special production table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a timing chart for explaining the difference between the addition and the addition. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display effect by the auxiliary display unit in the modified example 1, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display effect by the auxiliary display unit in the modified example 2. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the processing for addition notification in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the post-addition notification processing in the modification 4. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. A rear view of the door 12 and FIG. 5 are front views of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by driving a nail to a so-called island facility at the time of installation in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side portion when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened and closed by the rotation of the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is in a locked state that cannot be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured to release the locked state by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by, for example, giving a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 sets the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that can be visually recognized from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are designed so that the main control device 101 can be visually recognized from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "red bell" symbol (for example, the 7th of the left reel 32L), a "white bell" symbol (for example, the 20th of the left reel 32L), and a "first replay" symbol (for example, 19 of the left reel 32L). Second), "2nd replay" symbol (eg 6th on left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (eg 10th on left reel 32L), "watermelon" symbol (eg 8th on left reel 32L) , "Cherry" symbol (eg, 4th on left reel 32L), "Black BAR" symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), "White BAR" symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), "LUCKY" There are 11 types of symbols (for example, the 5th of the left reel 32L) and the "youth" symbol (for example, the 0th of the left reel 32L). And, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that out of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels, 3 symbols can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R among the symbols that can be visually recognized. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops on the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of each symbol that stops at the lower right line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of symbols and symbols that stop at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols on the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that become a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line where bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated and a line that is not activated depending on the number of bets on the medal are set, and when the symbol is stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the valid line. As a winning result, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals as a game medium or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize is not established and the above privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, only the right-down line L4 is regarded as an effective line as shown in FIG. 8 (a), and the lower line L3 and the right-down line L4 are shown in FIG. 8 (b). There are cases where the combination line is an effective line and cases where only the bent line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8 (c). More specifically, if three medals are bet and the game is started, only the downward-sloping line L4 is considered to be the valid line, and if two medals are bet and the game is started, the lower line is below. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are considered to be effective lines. Further, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is regarded as an effective line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward-sloping line L5 are not regarded as effective lines. In the following, a game started with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game started with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game started with 1 medal bet is started. Also known as a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won and a privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. If it is stopped, it will be the first small winning combination. If the first small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination have different combinations of winning symbols, but in the 3-bet game, the left reel 32L "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol and the middle reel 32M "White BAR" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "White bell" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol, and right reel 32R "White BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "White bell" symbol, This is a winning mode in which the "red 7" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the top, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the bottom. If you do, you will win the 8th small role. As shown in FIG. 6, the middle reel 32M has a "cherry" symbol (No. 11) and a "red bell" symbol at an adjacent position (No. 12) on the upstream side, and the right reel 32R has a "red bell" symbol. The "red bell" symbol is placed at a position (No. 20) separated by one symbol from the "white BAR" symbol (No. 18) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 8th small winning combination is established on the right-down line L4, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right. The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th small winning combination is a role in which whether or not a prize is won is determined by the stop symbol of the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Specifically, the "cherry" of the left reel 32L. The 27th small winning combination is established when the symbol stops at the upper or lower row. In this case, the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L is on the upper stage or stops, that is, the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is on the effective line. By stopping, the 27th small winning combination will be established. If the 27th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L may stop at the upper or lower row, and the "cherry" symbol may stop at the lower right line L4. More specifically, the left reel 32L has a "cherry" symbol or a "second replay" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" symbol, a "white bell" symbol or a "cherry" symbol, and the right reel 32R has a "cherry" symbol. When the "1st replay" symbol or the "2nd replay" symbol is stopped, the 28th small winning combination is awarded. If the 28th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

To supplement the relationship between the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination, when the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L or the "second replay" symbol stops, regardless of the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. Although the 27th small winning combination is established, the 28th small winning combination may be established instead of the 27th small winning combination depending on the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. That is, although the winning mode that is the 27th small winning combination includes the winning mode that is the 28th small winning combination, the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination are clearly distinguished and the winning judgment is made. Is done.

The 29th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line. That is, when the right-down line L4 is regarded as an effective line, the 29th small winning combination is established when the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped in the right-down direction. If the 29th small winning combination is successful, 5 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 30th small It will be a winning role. If the 30th small winning combination is successful, 5 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Black BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, "1st replay" on the left reel 32L, "Red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "Red bell" symbol or "White" on the right reel 32R. If the "bell" symbol and stops on the valid line, the 31st small winning combination will be won. If the 31st small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination is established in the 3-bet game, 3 medals are paid out, and in the 2-bet game, 14 medals are paid out.

In the 36th small winning combination prize, for example, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L The "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the effective line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the effective line. If the 36th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol, "white" on the right reel 32R. If the "bell" symbol and the "youth" symbol stop on the valid line, the 37th small winning combination will be awarded. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol (No. 7) and the "second replay" symbol are arranged at adjacent positions (No. 6) on the downstream side, and the main "white" is arranged. The "1st replay" symbol is placed at the adjacent positions (2nd, 11th, 14th, 19th) on the downstream side of the "bell" symbol (3rd, 12th, 15th, 20th). On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 12th, 20th) and the adjacent positions on the upstream side (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) are "1st". A "replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol is arranged, and a "first replay" symbol is arranged at an adjacent position (11th) on the upstream side of the "white bell" symbol (No. 10). Therefore, when the 37th small winning combination is established on the right-down line L4, the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol are mainly tempered on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M. The "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol do not stop, so-called double tempai off-stop rolls. If the 37th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

Left reel 32L "white BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol, middle reel 32M "red bell" symbol, right reel 32R "first replay" symbol, If the "watermelon" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol stop on the valid line, the 38th small winning combination will be won. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the 4th "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the upper to lower tiers, and if the 38th small winning combination is established, the left The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the middle line L2. If the 38th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the 39th small role prize. The 39th small winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. If the 39th small winning combination is successful, nine medals will be paid out.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the 40th small role prize. The 40th small winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. If the 40th small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small It will be a winning role. If the 41st small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

There are 1st re-game prize to 10th re-game prize as prizes to which the privilege of the re-game that can play the next game without inserting a medal is given. Further, when the second re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game If a prize or a fifth re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state.

The state transition prizes in which only the game state transition is performed include the first BB prize, the second BB prize, and the CB prize.

When the "red 7" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the effective line, the first BB prize is awarded, and when the "white BAR" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the effective line. Will be the second BB prize. When these BB prizes are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. In addition, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "first replay" symbol, and the "black BAR". If the symbol and stop on the valid line, a CB prize will be awarded. If the CB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from the winning, there is a stop roll in which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the "first replay" symbol stop on the effective line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. In addition, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, and "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. , The game state shifts to the 1st RT state even when the "Red 7" symbol and the "2nd replay" symbol stop on the effective line. In the following, the combination of each of the above symbols will be referred to as a transitional outcome.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

The stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected to each other. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the LOW signal detection signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated by operating the stop switches 42 to 44. The detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges the medal to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for paying out medals (not shown), and pays out the medal to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated while the medals inserted in the medal slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as a game medium at one time is provided. Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, note that while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 merely involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

An effect switch 66 operated when an effect is generated is provided between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57. That is, the first credit input switch 56 and the third credit input switch 58 are provided on the left side of the effect switch 66, and the second credit input switch 57 is provided on the right side of the effect switch 66. There is.

A checkout switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, there is a push order display that notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and an operation order is notified. A section display for showing an advantageous section, which is a section in which the game can be advanced in a situation advantageous to the player by changing the winning rate of the small winning combination, and an instruction monitor 68 having the section display are provided. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

At the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up and blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game with each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is used. It is referred to as an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hole manager or the like to adjust the medal output. That is, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that comprehensively manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and medals to be paid out from the hopper device 51. The first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the payout detection sensor 51a and the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the third credit. In the third credit input detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the input switch 58, the settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, the reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as the setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted and turned ON are connected, and the signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104. It has become.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via the input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10, including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than, for example, 10 volt. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit An external centralized terminal board 121 or the like capable of transmitting information to a display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a display control device 81, a hall management device (not shown), etc., via an input / output port 104. Is connected.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required in the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the game, the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the BB state, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including the power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). When the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by the power failure process (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to input a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181 and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 or the like for securing is built-in.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that centrally manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. The various display units 60 to 62, 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of. In the following, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the power failure processing will be outlined.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored, and the command transmission is terminated. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting the subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the fact that the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power has been restored from the power failure state. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the power failure signal is continuously output, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the input medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor whether or not. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 is performed. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62, 68, and the segment data display process for displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like is performed. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, a normal process for performing main control related to the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the start pre-processing, the display control device 81 or the like waits until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Specifically, for example, if a re-game prize is established in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and if a re-game prize is established in a one-bet game, one is automatically inserted. Performs the process of automatically inserting the virtual medal of.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings has been established, a sensor error confirmation process for confirming whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process is performed. When an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state, and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the checkout switch 59 has been operated, and if the checkout switch 59 is operated, the medal return process of paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do.

Whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Further, if neither the medal insertion nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on the medals has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as a specified number in the CB state, and a gaming state other than the CB state (specifically, a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, BB) is set. "1" and "3" are set as the specified number in the state). That is, in the CB state, an affirmative judgment is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "2", and the condition is that the number of bets is "1" or "3" except in the CB state. In step S205, an affirmative judgment is made. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if the medal is not bet, or if the bet number is "2" even if the medal is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the process of waiting for the start in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, the mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. The transition notification process will be described in detail later.

After processing in step S206, a bet command including information on the processing result in step S206 and information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a control device on the sub side. Set as the output target of. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the bet command will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a specified number of medals are bet, so the game is started in order to start the game. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, the effective line setting process for setting the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the effective line is performed in step S209. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the right-down line L4 is set as the effective line, and in the 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the right-down line L4 are set as the effective line. Further, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process of step S211, the reel control process of step S212, the medal payout process of step S213, the RT state process of step S214, and the bonus state process of step S215 are executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is successful is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of gaming states, which are roughly classified into a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state, and each of the lottery tables has a lottery table. It is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. .. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the lottery table for the normal gaming state is displayed. select. Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, the lottery table having the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table having the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 6".

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the processing related to the setting of the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after the initialization process. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 for each operation of the start lever 41. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated once, "setting 1" → "setting 2". → Update the setting values so that "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is also updated every time the set value is updated. Then, based on the fact that the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the setting process of the winning probability is terminated. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 also ends. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set value.

The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for a normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state of “setting 3”. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether or not the combination is appropriate is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. The determination value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is appropriate. In the winning / failing determination of the combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not one of the first BB, the second BB, and the CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an affirmative determination is made in step S305 at the index value IV (IV = 32 to 52) including any one of the first BB, the second BB, and the CB. If an affirmative determination is made in step S306, the corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) are set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S307. When a negative determination is made in step S306, or after the processing of step S307 is performed, the winning flag of each small winning combination corresponding to the index value IV which is affirmed in step S305 in step S308 is set in the winning flag storage area. The process of setting to 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 32, the first BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th small winning combination winning flag, the 33rd small winning combination winning flag, and the third small winning combination flag are set in step S308. Set the 35 small winning combination winning flag. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 15, a winning flag indicating that the 30th small winning combination and the 41st small winning combination have been won in step S308 is set in the winning flag storage area 106a.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (the first BB winning flag) or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag), the winning flag storage area 106a The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on condition that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In steps S306 to S308 in a state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the first BB, the second BB, and the CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the first BB, If the winning combination other than the 2nd BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the first BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 32, the first BB winning flag is not set and the 28th small winning combination winning flag is set. , The 33rd small winning combination winning flag and the 35th small winning combination winning flag are set. Further, in the state where the first BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 33, the second BB winning flag is not set and the 28th small winning combination flag, 33rd. Set the small winning combination winning flag and the 35th small winning combination winning flag.

In addition, a lottery table in a state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over is separately prepared, and when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed by the separately prepared lottery table. It may be configured to perform. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB, the second BB, and the CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S309, and in the subsequent step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the added index value IV exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV. By the way, when the winning / failing judgment of the winning combination is performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 17, the probability of winning the normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/3, strong cherry. The probability of winning a prize (probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 218 minutes. 1. The probability of winning chance A (probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/252, and the probability of winning chance B (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 252. It is one-third. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the unquestioned bell (probability of winning when IV = 20) is about 65500 minutes. It is 1. The probability of winning the forward push bell 1, the forward push bell 2, the pinch push bell 1, and the pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 21 to 24) is about 1 / 43.7, respectively, and the middle push bell. 1. The probability of winning the middle push bell 2, the right push bell 1, and the right push bell 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 25 to 28) is about 1 / 21.8, respectively. The probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1/218, and the probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is. Approximately 1/2800, the probability of winning the weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1/2800, the probability of winning the weak cherry duplication 2 (when IV = 35) The probability of winning) is about 1/32800. The probability of winning the strong watermelon duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the strong watermelon duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is. It is about 1/32800. The probability of winning the weak watermelon duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/65500, and the probability of winning the weak watermelon duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is. It is about 1/65500. The probability of winning the chance A duplication 1, the chance A duplication 2, the chance B duplication 1, and the chance B duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 40 to 43) is about 1/32800, respectively. The probability of winning the middle bell duplication 1 and the middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 44, 45) is about 1/2180, respectively. The probability of winning the special lip A duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 46) is about 1/110, and the probability of winning the special lip A duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 47). ) Is about 1/1310. The probability of winning the special lip AB duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/110, and the probability of winning the special lip AB duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49). ) Is about 1/1310. The probability of winning a single prize in the first BB and the second BB (probability of winning when IV = 50, 51) is about 1/32800, respectively. The probability of winning the CB (probability of winning when IV = 52) is about 1 / 19.9. In addition, the probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/96.

In the normal game state lottery table, 0 is set for the point value PV of IV = 2 to 12, 29 to 31, 53 to 56. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the winner is not won at these index values IV.

After setting the winning flag in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect in which the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is invalidated for a predetermined period.

In the following step S312, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the game state according to the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S311, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S312, the lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, a stop information setting process for setting a stoptable symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the lottery result of this game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information according to the winning combination is set based on the winning flags set in steps S306 to S308. For example, if a strong cherry is won (winned when IV = 13) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th small role and the 32nd small role to the 35th small role winning are each reel 32L. , 32M, 32R, set the stop symbol information so that it can be stopped. In addition, when the strong cherry duplication 1 is won (winning when IV = 32) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1st BB winning flag are set, the 28th small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, the 35th small winning combination and the 1st The stop symbol information is set so that the symbol corresponding to the 1BB prize can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the following step S315, when a plurality of stoptable symbol information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles are won among the small roles, replays, and bonus roles, the priorities shown below are set. If you have won a small winning combination and a bonus, set the priority so that the small winning combination will be given priority, and if the small winning combination cannot be established, the bonus winning will be established. .. If the replay and bonus are won, the priority is set so that the replay prize is prioritized and established.

For example, if the strong cherry duplication 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, the 35th small winning combination, and the 1st BB winning is set, the 28th is better than the 1st BB winning. The priority is set so that the small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, and the 35th small winning combination are given priority. In addition, if the special lip A duplication 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 9th re-game and the 1st BB winning is set, the 9th re-game winning is prioritized over the 1st BB winning. Set the priority so as to. Then, for example, in a situation where the first BB winning is carried over, if the normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the first BB winning and the first replay winning is set, the first BB winning is higher than the first BB winning. 1 Set the priority so that the re-game prize is given priority.

Here, when the re-game is won, the combination of the winning symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will always win the prize. In other words, if the re-game is won, the re-game prize will always be established and no omission will occur. Therefore, when the stop symbol information between the re-game and the bonus is set, the re-game prize for any of the set re-games is always established, and the bonus prize is not established.

Further, when a plurality of small wins or a plurality of replays are won in duplicate, which of the small wins or the symbol corresponding to the replay stops at the effective line depends on the timing at which the stop operation is performed. For example, if a strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th small winning combination and the 41st small winning combination is set, as described above, the 30th small winning combination and the 41st small winning combination are on the left. The target symbol of the reel 32L is common to the "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which small winning combination is established. On the other hand, the target symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are both the "red bell" symbol in the 30th small role, and the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol in the 41st small role. , Right reel 32R is a "watermelon" symbol. For example, in a 3-bet game, in the middle reel 32M, when the middle stop switch 43 is stopped at the timing when the 4th "watermelon" symbol to the 7th "red bell" symbol reaches the middle stage, the 30th stop operation is performed. Both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol of the small role, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol of the 41st small role, can be stopped in the middle row on the effective line. Will be. In this case, in the present embodiment, the stop symbol information is set so as to give priority to the symbol having a small number of slips and stop. As a result, in the above case, the stop drive control is performed so that the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle stage, the 41st small winning combination is not established, and the 30th small winning combination can be won.

On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, when the stop operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the 8th "black BAR" symbol to the 12th "red bell" symbol reaches the middle stage, the target of the 41st small winning combination Stop the 8th "black BAR" symbol, the 11th "cherry" symbol, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol of the 30th small role, in the middle row. Is possible. In this case as well, since the stop symbol information is set so as to give priority to the symbol with a small number of slips, the 8th "black BAR" symbol or the 11th "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row, and the second symbol is stopped. The 30 small winning combination will not be established, and the 41st small winning combination will be able to win.

The same applies to the right reel 32R, and depending on the timing when the right stop switch 44 is stopped, the "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol of the 30th small winning combination, and the "watermelon", which is the target symbol of the 41st small winning combination. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with a small number of slips stops at the lower row, which is the effective line. If the right stop switch 44 is stopped at the timing when the 6th "1st replay" symbol and the 7th "black BAR" symbol reach the effective position on the right reel 32R, "watermelon". Neither the symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped, and in this case, neither small winning combination is established, so-called omission.

After executing the process of step S315, the section display first process is executed in step S316, and then the lottery process ends. The section display first process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such a process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, the rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. The rotation effect processing will be described in detail later. In the following step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotation in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. Therefore, even if the player bets a predetermined number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start processing. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is notified to the players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to know which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when winning when IV = 24 to 31, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When the push bell 1 and the right push bell 2 (hereinafter, collectively referred to as "push order bells") are won (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established depending on the operation order.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second small winning combination, the seventh small winning combination, or the ninth small winning combination is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time. Then, the stop information is set so that the first small winning combination is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the second small winning combination and the seventh small winning combination are established when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Stop information is set so that the winning combination or the 9th small winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, in a gaming state (3-bet game) other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by a maximum of 4 symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , Only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an effective line. Therefore, when the spacing between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is valid when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so as to form sections separated by 5 symbols or more, it is necessary for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

A case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the second small winning combination winning, the seventh small winning combination winning, or the ninth small winning combination winning.

The second small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol. Further, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as a seventh small winning combination symbol and a function as a ninth small winning combination symbol. The left reel 32L is arranged so that the distance between the second small winning combination symbols (seventh small winning combination symbols and the ninth small winning combination) is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 4th "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage, as shown in FIG. 20A, the 7th "red bell" The design stops at the top. As a result, there is room for the second small winning combination, the seventh small winning combination, or the ninth small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4.

The second small winning combination symbol of the medium reel 32M is the "white BAR" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. The seventh small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. And the 9th small role symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the 2nd small winning combination symbol, the 7th small winning combination symbol, or the 9th small winning combination symbol may stop on the effective line, or the 2nd small winning combination symbol, the 7th small winning combination symbol, and the 9th small winning combination symbol may be stopped. None of the 9th small winning combination symbols may stop on the effective line.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 13th "1st replay" symbol to the 17th "1st replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The "white BAR" symbol, which is a symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there is room for the second small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 9th "2nd replay" symbol to the 13th "1st replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20 (b). , The 7th small role symbol "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle row. As a result, there is room for the 7th small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 6th "white bell" symbol to the 10th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, the 9th small role symbol "cherry" symbol is in the middle row. Stop at. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is slid by 4 symbols and then stopped, the 2nd small winning combination symbol, the 7th small winning combination symbol, and the 9th small winning combination symbol are displayed. It cannot be stopped in the middle stage. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such a timing, the No. 2 "LUCKY" symbol or the No. 6 "white bell" symbol is stopped in the middle stage.

When the 7th small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information 2nd setting process so that the 7th small winning combination winning can be established.

The 7th small role symbol of the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" symbol is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 6th "1st replay" symbol to the 10th "white bell" symbol reaches the lower stage, FIG. 20 (c). As shown in, the "white bell" symbol, which is the 7th small role symbol, stops at the bottom. As a result, the 7th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 3rd "second replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the 4th "watermelon" symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 20 (d). Stop at the bottom. From the left, the combination of the "red bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol is a transitional roll as shown in FIG.

When the 9th small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information 2nd setting process so that the 9th small winning combination winning can be established.

The 9th small role symbol of the right reel 32R is a "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "youth" symbol is placed at the 15th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 11th "1st replay" symbol to the 15th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, it is the 9th small role symbol. The "Youth" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the 9th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) is a transitional roll as shown in FIG.

When the second small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the second small winning combination winning can be established.

The second small winning combination symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white BAR" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small role symbol " The "white BAR" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "white BAR" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) is a transitional roll as shown in FIG.

When the 2nd small winning combination symbol, the 7th small winning combination symbol, and the 9th small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M did not stop in the middle stage, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stopped in the middle stage. In this case, in the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol are arranged so that the distance between the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "LUCKY" symbol ("white bell" symbol), and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) shifts as shown in Fig. 11. It's a roll.

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the second small winning combination is established and the seventh small winning combination is established. It is either the case where the winning is established, the case where the 9th small winning combination is established, or the case where the transition roll is stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the first small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbol, which is the first small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "red bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol is stopped in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, which are the first small winning symbols, are arranged so that the distance between the first small winning symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, which are the first small winning symbols, are arranged so that the distance between the first small winning symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the first small winning combination prize is established regardless of the operation timing.

If the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation orders, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the small winning combination is established or the shift roll is stopped on the valid line depending on the operation timing. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 38th small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing, and if the unquestioned bell is won, the 38th small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing. 1 Small winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the valid line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a prize is established on the valid line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the winning result handling process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After performing the winning result handling process, the section display second process is executed in step S415. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such a process will be described in detail later. After that, in step S416, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in this game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the medal payout process in step S213 will be outlined.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-gaming prize to the eighth re-game winning is established based on the winning winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes are established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes is established, the re-game setting process is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , End the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current gaming state is the re-gaming state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for paying medals is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the valid line. When the transition roll is stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in step S501 that the shift roll has not stopped on the valid line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second replay winning combination is awarded based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine if it holds. When the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process ends. Further, when the transition to the effective line is stopped in a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the step S503 is performed. The first RT setting flag is set, and this process ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of “setting 3”. The lottery table for the first RT state differs from the lottery table for the normal gaming state (see FIG. 17) in the point value PV of IV = 1 to 5, and has the same point value PV as the other index value IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 56 is equal to the winning probability of each winning in the normal gaming state, and winning when IV = 1. The probability of winning is about 1 in 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is about 1 in 32.8, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if the winner is won when IV = 1, the normal replay is won, and when the winner is IV = 2, the first promotion replay 1 is won and the IV. If you win when = 3, you will win the first promotion replay 2, if you win when IV = 4, you will win the first promotion replay 3, and if you win IV = 5, you will win. In that case, the first promotion replay 4 will be won. The probability of winning in any of IV = 1 to 5 is about 1/7.30. The normal replay winning probability under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the 1st RT state, the winning mode is that the small winning combination, the re-gaming, and the bonus are won with the same probability as the normal gaming state, while the privilege of the re-gaming is given. Changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-gaming prize, the third re-gaming prize that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated when the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won in addition to the case where the push order bell described above is won. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stopped switches 42 to 44.

FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won, unlike the case where the push order bell is won, the first replay prize or the first replay prize is won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. The third re-game prize is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one of the six operation sequences, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation sequences. It is attached.

In the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also assigned as winning combinations. However, none of the above six operation sequences is associated with the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game. Therefore, the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game will not win a prize regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 even if the first promotion replays 2 to 4 are won.

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, respectively, and the first promotion replay 2 is the first replay and the first replay. The 6th replay is assigned in addition to the 3 replays, the 1st promotion replay 3 is assigned the 7th replay in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and the 1st promotion replay 4 is assigned. Although the 8th re-game is assigned in addition to the 1st re-game and the 3rd re-game, the re-games to be won are the 1st re-game and the 3rd re-game regardless of which of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the operation order in which the third replay prize is established. That is, for example, if the first promotion replay is one type, the operation order corresponding to the third replay prize is also one type, and the third replay prize is intentionally established when the first promotion replay is won. This is because it can be possible to make it. It should be noted that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other duplicate roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning combination has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, and based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third re-game prize has been established. When the third re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508 to end this process. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has a different point value PV of IV = 1 to 10, and the same point value PV as the other index value IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 56 is equal to the winning probability of each winning in the first RT state, and winning when IV = 1. The probability of winning is about 1 / 13.2, and the probability of winning when IV = 2-5 is not won, and the probability of winning when IV = 6-8 is about 1 / 0.5, IV = 9, respectively. , The probability of winning at 10 is about 1/7.00, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/150. That is, when the player shifts to the second RT state, the probability of deviation is lower than that of the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. Further, in the 2nd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift to the gaming state, the 2nd re-gaming prize that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 4th re-gaming prize that shifts to the 3rd RT state, and the 5th re-gaming Winning and is established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 described above are won, the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, the second 2 Even when the promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that have generated the stop command.

FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. When the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 are won, the first re-game prize or the second re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If the second promotion replay 1 is won, one of the first re-game prize, the fourth re-game prize, and the fifth re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. .. When the second promotion replay 2 is won, the first re-game prize or the fourth re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

In addition, the number attached to the 4th re-game in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the 4th re-game winning is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination that is a random pattern, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination that is a red 7, red 7, and black BAR middle stop (see FIG. 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time when the 2nd promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a disparity is stopped and the 4th replay prize is established, or the red 7・ The combination of symbols that will be stopped in the middle of the red 7 and black BARs will stop, and the 4th re-game prize will be established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning combination has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination processing, It is determined whether or not the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize has been established. If the 4th re-game prize and the 5th re-game prize are not established, this process is terminated as it is. When the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the 3rd RT setting flag is set in step S511. Then, this process is terminated.

When the 3rd RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the third RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the third RT state selected in the third RT state of “setting 3”. The lottery table for the 3rd RT state differs from the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 24) in the point value PV of IV = 9 to 12, and has the same point value PV as the other index value IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning / failing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 56 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, and IV = 9,10. At that time, it will not be won, and the probability of winning at IV = 11 and 12 will be about 1/7.00, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/150. That is, when the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state, the winning mode is that the small winning combination, the re-gaming, and the bonus are won with the same probability as the 2nd RT state, while the privilege of the re-gaming is given. Changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state, the 2nd re-gaming prize that shifts to the 1st RT state, and the 6th re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state, the third 7 Re-game prize, 8 re-game prize, and 3rd re-game prize to shift to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), even when the BAR replay 1 and the BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set the stop information.

FIG. 23 (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. If BAR Replay 1 is won, any of the 1st re-game prize, the 6th re-game prize, the 7th re-game prize, and the 3rd re-game prize, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is always true. If BAR Replay 2 is won, any one of the 1st re-game prize, the 6th re-game prize, the 8th re-game prize, and the 3rd re-game prize, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is always true.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, the bonus determination process shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether or not any of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not the CB winning is established based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in the remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processes of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

Here, the CB and the CB state will be briefly described.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol or "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R. If, stops on the valid line, it will be a CB prize. The CB symbols are arranged on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the distance between the CB symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

When the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the game state is the CB state. Then, in step S205 of the normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of bets of the medal has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the effective line setting processing (step S209), the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are determined. Is set as a valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process, the lottery table for the CB state is selected. Although the illustration of the CB state lottery table is omitted, in the CB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 52, and "16384" is set as the point value of IV = 53 to 56. Is set (see Fig. 17 etc. for the correspondence between IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning the CB small and medium-sized combination 1 (probability of winning when IV = 53) is about 1/4.0, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium-sized combination 2 (IV = 54). The probability of winning in the case of CB is about 1/4.0, and the probability of winning in CB small and medium-sized role 3 (probability of winning when IV = 55) is about 1 in 4.00, and CB. The probability of winning the small and medium-sized role 4 (the probability of winning when IV = 56) is about 1/4.00. No outlier event occurs.

FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of the CB small and medium-sized winning combination 1 to the CB small and medium-sized winning combination 4 is won, some small winning combination will be won regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. It always holds. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals will be awarded if the 1st small role prize, the 27th small role prize, the 31st small role prize, the 36th small role prize to the 38th small role prize are established. If the payout is made and the 2nd small role prize-26th small role prize, the 28th small role prize-30th small role prize, the 32nd small role prize-35th small role prize are established, 14 cards will be awarded. The medal is paid out. That is, when the state shifts to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

In addition, in place of or in addition to the CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables a game (JAC game) of one game to be executed as a winning combination, and a single bonus winning (winning). ) May be provided for the transition SB state.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, when it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB is set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established.

Then, when any of the BB winnings is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. The flag is set. After that, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or higher than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processes of steps S610 to S612, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. ..

FIG. 28 is a BB state lottery table selected in the BB state to be transferred in the first BB and the second BB. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 28, 32 to 56, and "21845" is set as the point value of IV = 29 to 31. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the first role in BB (probability of winning when IV = 29) is about 1/11, and the probability of winning the second role in BB (IV). The probability of winning when = 30) is about 1 / 20.0, and the probability of winning the third role in BB (probability of winning when IV = 31) is about 1 / 20.0. Will be. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/65500.

The winning probabilities of the first role in the BB, the second role in the BB, and the third role in the BB are common to the first BB and the second BB. Further, the winning probabilities of the first role in BB, the second role in BB, and the third role in BB are the same winning probabilities regardless of the transition opportunity of the first BB and the second BB to the BB state, for example. The winning probabilities of the third winning combination in the BB in the first BB based on the special lip A overlapping 1 winning and the third winning combination in the BB in the first BB based on the special lip AB overlapping 1 winning are the same probability. That is, in any BB state, the common BB state lottery table is referred to and the lottery process is performed.

FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. As described above, the first small winning combination winning mode is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, if the first winning combination in the BB is won, any one of the first small winning combination, the 39th small winning combination, and the 40th small winning combination will be awarded regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. It always holds. Further, the ninth re-game winning is also a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the second winning combination in BB is won, the ninth re-game winning is always established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The third role in the BB that enables the 9th re-game prize and the 10th re-game prize differs depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and which re-game prize is established differs depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. When the stop operation is performed, if any of the prizes can be won, the stop drive control is performed so that the replay on the side with the smaller number of slips wins the prize. More specifically, the combination of the symbols for which the 9th re-game and the 10th re-game are successful is common to the "1st replay" symbol and the "2nd replay" symbol in both the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. On the other hand, the left reel 32L is different. That is, in the left reel 32L, the target symbols of the 9th re-game are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, while the target symbols of the 10th re-game are the "youth" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol. ..

For example, in a 3-bet game, when the left stop switch 42 is stopped at the timing when the 7th "red bell" symbol from the 4th "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the upper stage, the 9th replay is performed. Both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol, and the 8th "watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol of the 10th replay, can be stopped at the upper stage on the effective line. In this case, the stop drive control is performed so as to stop the seventh "red bell" symbol having a small number of slips in the upper stage. As a result, the 9th replay prize can be established instead of the 10th replay prize. In addition, in the left reel 32L, when the left stop switch 42 is stopped at the timing when the 9th "red 7" symbol to the 12th "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage, the 13th "young man" is also similarly operated. The twelfth "white bell" symbol is driven and controlled so as to stop at the upper stage instead of the symbol, and the ninth re-game is set so that the winning is easier to be established than the tenth re-game. In other words, if you want to win the 10th replay, the left when the 0th "Youth" symbol, the 8th "Watermelon" symbol, and the 13th "Youth" symbol reach the upper row of the left reel 32L. It is necessary to stop the stop switch 42, and if it is another timing, the ninth re-game winning will be established.

Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, if the 1st role in the BB is won, the 1st small role prize, the 39th small role prize, and the 40th small role prize are established, 9 medals will be paid out. .. In addition, the 9th re-game prize is established when the 2nd role is won in the BB, and the 9th re-game prize is established in most cases even when the 3rd role is won in the BB. That is, in the BB state, either the bell prize such as the first small role or the replay prize which is the ninth replay is frequently established. When the replay prize is established, the medal is not paid out, but the replay is given and the next game can be played without the need for a medal. Since the probability of loss in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and any BB winning is established, a process of setting a carry-over command is performed in step S613. The carry-over command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to know that the bonus winning is not established in the bonus winning game and the so-called carry-over state has been established, and the carry-over command is a timer interrupt process. Is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the game played in the carry-over state, winning of other bonuses is restricted. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 17), when a duplicate combination with the IV = 32 to 49 bonuses (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) is won, these bonuses are dealt with. The winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when each small combination of IV = 32 to 49 or a duplicate combination with the re-game is won, the winning flag of each small combination or the re-game is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is set. It is not set and only the small winning combination is valid. That is, the carry-over state can be said to be a state in which the lottery of bonuses is restricted.

When the gaming state shifts to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter becomes 0, and if it becomes 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. Further, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in this game is set. The end determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state is completed, the game state at the time when the CB winning is established is restored. For example, if the CB prize is established under the normal gaming state, the game returns to the normal gaming state after the end of the CB state, and if the CB prize is established under the third RT state, the third RT state is established after the end of the CB state. Return to. On the other hand, when the first BB and the second BB are won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB prize is established under the second RT state, the game state shifts to the normal gaming state. By the way, in the case of shifting to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (= 15-2) or 25 (= 14-2 + 15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When shifting to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of about 144 (= 9 × 24-3 × 24) medals by the time the BB state ends.

By the way, when the second combination in BB or the third combination in BB is won in the BB state and a replay is given, the remaining payout number counter is not subtracted. That is, the number of times the second and third BB roles are won in the BB state does not affect the expected increase in medals in the BB state.

When none of the 1st BB winning flag, the 2nd BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set (when step S602 is NO), none of the 1st BB winning, the 2nd BB winning, and the CB winning is established and carried over. When a command is set (when the process of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter in step S605 and step S612, and when the end determination process is performed in step S614, Goes to step S606 and sets a status command. Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game), and in step S606, the state information storage area. Set the status command corresponding to the setting flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process ends.

<Overview of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The CB state is not shown.

When the gaming state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the transition roll stops on the valid line, and the gaming state shifts to the BB state when the BB winning is established. The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In the lottery process using the normal game state lottery table, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the normal gaming state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third re-game prize is established when one of the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (a)). .. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the 3rd RT state are not won, so that the 1st RT state does not shift to the 3rd RT state.

In addition, when the corresponding BB winning flag is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state. The first RT state does not shift to the third RT state.

When the gaming state is the 2nd RT state, the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state when the 4th re-gaming prize or the 5th re-game winning is established. Further, the game state shifts to the first RT state depending on whether the second re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped on the valid line. The 4th re-game prize and the 5th re-game prize are established when the 2nd promotion replay 1 or the 2nd promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (FIG. 23 (b). )reference). The second re-game prize is established when any of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (b)). The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the 3rd RT state, the gaming state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the 3rd re-game winning is established. Further, the game state shifts to the first RT state depending on whether the second re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped on the valid line. The third replay prize is established when the BAR replay 1 or the BAR replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (c)). The second re-game prize is established when any of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (b)). The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

In the slot machine 10, the main control device 101 manages six types of gaming states: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state, and is roughly classified into a normal mode and a challenge mode. , Attack mode (including additional special zone), VB mode (including additional special zone), and BB mode are managed by the main control device 101.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the BB mode, in the BB mode, a lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and a lottery for shifting to the attack mode may be performed. If you win the lottery to shift to the attack mode, you will shift to the attack mode after the end of the BB mode, and if you win the lottery to shift to the challenge mode, you will shift to the challenge mode after the end of the BB mode. If none of the transition lottery is won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the end of the BB mode. When the attack mode is changed to the BB mode, the attack mode is restored after the BB mode is terminated. When the mode shifts from the VB mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the VBB mode after the BB mode ends.

The normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay. 2 (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "push order replay") This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and a lottery for shifting to the attack mode are performed. Transition to challenge mode If the lottery is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the challenge mode, and if the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the attack mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the normal mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning the push order bell and at the time of winning the push order replay, it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state. It corresponds to almost the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals is reduced by about 1.59 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 for each game played.

The challenge mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, as in the normal mode. In the challenge mode, a lottery for transition to the attack mode is performed. However, the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the attack mode in the normal mode. That is, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which the operation order is not notified as in the normal mode, but it is easy to shift to the attack mode. Transition to attack mode If you win the lottery, you will transition from challenge mode to attack mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) without winning the transition lottery, the challenge mode is shifted to the normal mode. The challenge mode does not shift to VB mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order replay is won, it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, which corresponds to almost the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state. Will be done. In the challenge mode, when the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals is reduced by about 1.59 for each game played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 for each game played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the push order bell winning and the push order replay winning. The attack mode is composed of four attack modes, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, which have different transition probabilities to the VB mode. In any of the attack modes, the VB mode is set as compared with the normal mode. The transition probability of is high. Transition to VB mode If you win the lottery, you will transition from attack mode to VB mode. Transition to VB mode If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the attack mode is shifted to the normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode is different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to VB mode is set so that the fourth attack mode has the highest probability and the first attack mode has the lowest probability, and the first attack mode and the second attack mode are set. , The third attack mode, and the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the attack mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, the stop switch 42 is notified in the operation order notified by the player. When ~ 44 is operated, it almost corresponds to the second RT state. In the attack mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when the game state shifts to the attack mode.

Similar to the attack mode, the VB mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the push order bell winning and the pushing order replay winning. The difference between VB mode and attack mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, the operation order for establishing the first replay prize is notified in the attack mode. , In the VB mode, the operation order for establishing the 4th replay winning or the 5th replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won. In that case, the operation order for establishing the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize is notified. Therefore, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In the VB mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the VB mode continues for at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when the game state shifts to the VB mode.

Explaining the transition of the display mode when the number of medals owned by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the challenge mode, shift from the challenge mode to the attack mode, and then return from the attack mode to the normal mode. .. And since the lottery to shift to VB mode is performed in the attack mode, if a loop occurs in which the attack mode shifts to the VB mode and the VB mode returns to the attack mode, the player expects more medals to be owned. can.

As described above, when comparing the normal mode and the challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode is set to be higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone that is expected to shift to the attack mode.

Further, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probability of the transition lottery to the VB mode is different in each attack mode. Then, when shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, it basically shifts to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the second attack mode is performed. If the lottery for shifting to the second attack mode is won, the game shifts to the second attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases. In the second attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is performed. If the lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is won, the game shifts to the third attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases. Then, in the third attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is performed. If you win the lottery for shifting to the 4th attack mode, you will shift to the 4th attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when shifting to the attack mode, the promotion to the first attack mode → the second attack mode → the third attack mode → the fourth attack mode and the attack mode is performed, so that the transition probability to the VB mode becomes high and the attack A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the player has a configuration in which the number of medals owned by the player is increased in each display mode of the attack mode, the VBB mode, and the BB mode. Then, in conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of RT states and a plurality of states such as a BB state and a CB state are configured to go back and forth by winning a prize in each replay or stopping a transitional outcome. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning prize is established or the transition roll is stopped. Further, in the attack mode and the VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the operation order in which the first small winning combination can be established is notified, so that the number of owned medals can be expected to increase.

Hereinafter, the configuration related to the display mode will be described.

The configuration related to the display mode is roughly divided into (1) a process related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) a process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) based on the winning result. There is a process for shifting the display mode, and (4) a process related to the notification effect on the sub side. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Processing for lottery results>
The process related to the shift lottery of the display mode (1) is performed in the lottery result correspondence process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

In step S701, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag has already been set before the current game, and it is determined whether or not the current game is in the carry-over state of the first BB or the second BB.

If a negative determination is made in step S701, the process for shifting the display mode from step S702 to step S710 is executed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S701 and the carry-over state is in progress, the process for shifting to the display mode or the like is not performed. That is, while the bonus is carried over, the implementation of the process for shifting to the display mode is restricted.

Specifically, when a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S703 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the attack mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when shifting to the attack mode. If a negative determination is made in step S703, the first specific combination process is executed in step S704.

<First specific combination processing>
The first specific combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the first specific combination processing is performed is a state in which the game is in the normal game state or the first RT state, and the attack mode is not won. In this case, the display mode corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first specific combination process, a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the challenge mode is performed, and a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the attack mode is performed. Further, in the first specific combination processing, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, the processing for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the challenge mode. When not in the challenge mode, it means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal time table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery in step S802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a challenge mode table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 as an attack mode lottery table in step S803. In the normal time table and the challenge mode table, the transition probability to the attack mode is set according to the type of the lottery result (winning combination).

Specifically, in the mode lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 105a, the probability of winning each mode transition lottery is set to differ depending on the current display mode and the type of game result that triggers the lottery. Has been done.

Here, as the game result that triggers the lottery of the mode transition lottery, as shown in FIG. 36, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, strong cherry duplication 1, weak Cherry duplication 1, strong watermelon duplication 1, weak watermelon duplication 1, chance A duplication 1, chance B duplication 1, middle bell duplication 1, special lip A duplication 1, special lip A duplication 2, single 1st BB, single 2nd BB are set (Hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "transition triggers"). These transition triggers have the same point value PV that is set regardless of the set value, and there is no setting difference in the winning probability. The winning probability of each mode transition lottery is also set so that there is no setting difference. On the other hand, strong cherry duplication 2, weak cherry duplication 2, strong watermelon duplication 2, weak watermelon duplication 2, chance A duplication 2, chance B duplication 2, middle bell duplication 2, special lip AB duplication 1, special lip AB duplication. 2 is set so that there is a setting difference in the winning probability, and the point value PV is generally set so that setting 1 has the lowest winning probability and setting 6 has the highest winning probability (hereinafter, these). Are collectively referred to as "non-trigger"). Then, each mode transition lottery is not carried out in the non-triggered role in which there is a setting difference in these winning probabilities. That is, the mode transition lottery with no setting difference in the winning probability is performed by the transition trigger having a common appearance rate, and the transition rate of each mode transition is common.

In the lottery table for transition to the attack mode acquired in step S802 or step S803, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set according to the type of the transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 37, for example, when the transition trigger is a strong cherry, the normal time table has a 45% probability of winning the transition lottery to the attack mode, while the challenge mode table has a 90% probability of winning. It is set so that the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, and the challenge mode is easier to win the lottery for transition to the attack mode than the normal mode. In addition, when the transition trigger is a strong cherry, there is a higher probability of winning the transition lottery to the attack mode at both the normal time table and the challenge mode table than when the transition trigger is a weak cherry. It is set so that the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game, the easier it is to win the transition lottery to the attack mode.

After acquiring the table for the attack mode transition lottery in step S802 or step S803, the attack mode lottery process is executed in step S804. In such a process, a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803 to perform a lottery for shifting to the attack mode.

In step S805, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has been won based on the processing result of step S804. If the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, it is determined in step S806 whether or not the attack mode won this time is the super attack mode. The super attack mode is an attack mode that starts after passing through the additional special zone. For example, assuming that the initial number of games in the normal attack mode is 50, in the super attack mode, the attack mode is started with the number of games obtained by adding the number of games added in the additional special zone to the initial number of games of 50. To. Therefore, the advantage for the player is different between the normal attack mode and the super attack mode, and the super attack mode is more advantageous for the player than the attack mode.

The transition lottery to the super attack mode is carried out when the transition lottery to the attack mode is won (when the lottery process of step S804 is won), and this transition lottery depends on the transition trigger and the type of display mode. It is performed based on the transition lottery table for the set super attack mode. As shown in FIG. 37, the transition lottery table for the super attack mode wins the transition lottery to the super attack mode when the attack mode is won during the challenge mode than when the attack mode is won during the normal mode. It is set to be easy to use, and the superiority of the challenge mode is guaranteed. For example, in the normal mode, the probability of winning the transition lottery to the attack mode triggered by the strong watermelon is 60%, and 5% of the winners of the transition lottery win the super attack mode, so that it is practically When a strong watermelon is won during the normal mode, 57% shifts to the attack mode, and 3% shifts to the super attack mode. On the other hand, in the challenge mode, the probability of winning the transition lottery to the attack mode triggered by the strong watermelon is 50%, and 50% of the winners of the transition lottery win the super attack mode, which is practical. In the case of winning a strong watermelon during the challenge mode, 25% shifts to the attack mode, 25% shifts to the super attack mode, and the transition rate to the super attack mode is higher than that of the normal mode. Furthermore, the winning probability of the transition lottery to the super attack mode differs depending on the transition trigger. For example, when comparing the strong cherry and the strong watermelon, the winning probability of the transition lottery to the super attack mode is strong cherry and strong in the normal mode. Although it is common with watermelons (5% winning probability), in the challenge mode, the winning probability of the same transition lottery is set to be higher for strong watermelons than for strong cherries.

If it is determined in step S806 that the super attack mode has been won, the process of setting the special zone winning flag is executed in step S807.

If a negative determination is made in step S806, or after the process of step S807 is executed, the process of setting the attack mode winning flag is performed in step S808. That is, when the attack mode is won, the attack mode winning flag is set, and the special zone winning flag is set in a part of them (when the super attack mode is won).

After the process of step S808 is performed, the process for setting the precursor mode is performed in steps S809 to S812. The precursor mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests that the player has won the attack mode or the challenge mode is likely to occur, and the player has won the attack mode or the challenge mode after passing through each game of the precursor mode. Winning notification will be given. The precursor mode is set to continue from 0 games to 32 games, and the number of continuous games in the precursor mode is set to differ depending on the type of attack mode, challenge mode, etc. that have been won and whether or not the bonus has been won at the same time. ing. If the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. are won at the same time as the bonus, the bonus winning notification will be sent after the precursor mode, and after the bonus state is completed, the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. will be won. You will be notified of what was happening. Further, when the number of precursor games is set to 0 games, the winning notification is performed without going through the precursor mode.

Specifically, in step S809, first, a process of acquiring a precursor game number table from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 38, in the precursor game number table, the number of precursor games selected is set to differ depending on the current display mode (normal mode or challenge mode) and whether or not the bonus is won at the same time. .. Specifically, when the current display mode is the normal mode and the attack mode is won, if the bonus is not won at the same time, 1 to 5 games are selected at 80%, and 6 Games ~ 10 games are selected at 20%. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is the normal mode, if the attack mode and the bonus are won at the same time, 1 game to 5 games are selected at 10%, and 6 games to 10 games are 20 games. %, 11 games to 20 games are selected at 50%, 21 games to 32 games are selected at 20%. That is, when the display mode is the normal mode, it is easier to select a longer precursor game number when the bonus is won at the same time than when the bonus is not won at the same time. In other words, if the bonus is not won at the same time, the attack mode winning game will be notified in a relatively short number of games. On the other hand, when the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 games are selected as the number of precursor games regardless of whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. That is, in this case, the precursor mode is not set, and the attack mode winning notification is performed in the next game of the winning game.

In addition, when the super attack mode, which is an attack mode with an additional special zone, is won, if the bonus is not won at the same time, 1 to 5 games are selected at 70%, and 6 to 10 games are 30. Selected by%. On the other hand, if the bonus is won at the same time when the attack mode is won, 1 game to 5 games are not selected, 6 games to 10 games are selected at 20%, and 11 games to 20 games are selected at 30%. 21 games to 32 games are selected at 50%. That is, even when the super attack mode is won, it is easier to select a longer number of precursor games when the bonus is won at the same time than when the bonus is not won at the same time, and when the bonus is not won at the same time. Will be notified of the Super Attack Mode Winning in a relatively short number of games from the Super Attack Mode Winning Game. Even when the super attack mode is won, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 games are selected as the number of precursor games regardless of whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. That is, in this case, the precursor mode is not set, and the winning notification of the super attack mode is performed in the next game of the winning game.

In addition, when the bonus and the winning at that time are won, the number of precursor games that are likely to be selected may be different depending on the type of overlapping role. For example, the overlapping role of the replay (9th replay) and the bonus such as the special lip A duplication 1 and the special lip A duplication 2 is the smaller role (strong cherry, the weak cherry duplication 1) such as the strong cherry duplication 1 and the weak cherry duplication 1. A configuration in which a precursor mode longer than the overlapping role of the weak cherry, etc.) and the bonus may be easily selected, or vice versa.

In step S810, a process of drawing the number of games in the precursor mode this time is performed based on the precursor game number table acquired in step S809 and the lottery counter acquired from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S811, the process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The precursor counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the precursor counter becomes 0, the precursor mode ends, and the winning notification that the transition lottery such as the attack mode has been won is performed.

In step S812, a process of setting a precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is executed. The precursor command includes information on the lottery result (display mode that shifts after the precursor mode, BB mode and attack mode in the case of step S812) and the number of precursor games that triggered the precursor mode. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S812, the first specific combination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, the challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, the table for the challenge mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the table for the challenge mode lottery, the transition probability to the challenge mode is set according to the type of the transition trigger (FIG. 37). For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of transition to the challenge mode than the weak cherries.

The case where step S813 is executed includes the case where the display mode is the challenge mode. In this case as well, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S813, and the table for the lottery is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. It is a table of. As in steps S801 to 803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not the challenge mode is in progress.

In step S814, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode has been won based on the processing result of step S813. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. When the mode is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, the process of setting the challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is executed in step S816.

After the processing of step S816 is performed, the setting processing for the precursor mode is performed in steps S817 to S820 in the same manner as in steps S809 to S812. That is, the precursor game number table is acquired in step S817, the precursor game number lottery process is performed in step S818, the precursor game number is set in step S819, the precursor command is set in step S820, and then the precursor command is set. The first specific combination processing is terminated.

In the precursor game number table acquired in step S817, as shown in FIG. 38, when the challenge mode alone is won, 1 game to 5 games are selected at 90%, and 6 games to 10 games are 10 games. Selected by%. On the other hand, if the challenge mode is won at the same time as the bonus, 1 to 5 games are selected at 20%, 6 to 10 games are selected at 30%, and 11 games to 20 games are selected at 50%. Will be done. That is, even when the challenge mode is won, it is easier to select a longer number of precursor games when the bonus is won at the same time than when the bonus is not won at the same time, and when the bonus is not won at the same time. , The challenge mode winning game will be notified in a relatively short number of games.

In addition to the number of precursor games, it is easier to select a longer precursor game in attack mode than in challenge mode, regardless of whether or not the bonus is won at the same time, and a longer precursor game in super attack mode than in attack mode. The number is easy to select, and if the display mode that is advantageous to the player is won, the long precursor game number is easy to be selected. In addition, if the bonus is not won at the same time, the number of precursor games of 10 games or less is selected, and if the precursor mode continues for 11 games or more, it is confirmed that the bonus is won at the same time. do. In addition, even if the bonus is won at the same time, the number of precursor games of 20 games or less is selected in the challenge mode and the bonus simultaneous winning, while the attack mode and the super attack mode and the bonus are selected. In the simultaneous winning, the number of precursor games of 21 games or more is also selected, and if the precursor mode continues for 21 games or more, it is confirmed that the bonus + attack mode or super attack mode is used. In this way, the fun of predicting the winning content in relation to the number of precursor games is added.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is a case where the attack mode, the challenge mode, or the like is not won at the time of winning the transition trigger, or the mode is shifted to the pseudo precursor mode when the non-trigger is won. Although such processing will be described later, the number of games set as the pseudo precursor mode is any one of 1 game to 20 games. Therefore, when the winning suggestion effect occurs frequently over 21 games or more, it is determined that the transitioned precursor mode or pseudo precursor mode is the precursor mode.

If it is determined in step S815 that the challenge mode is won again during the challenge mode, the process for adding the continuous game in the challenge mode is performed in steps S821 to S825. That is, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S822, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the addition means adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode and the attack mode, and the number of additional games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of continuous games. In step S822, a value to be added to the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Challenge mode number of additional games The table for lottery is set so that the number of additional games increases according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39, for example, in the case of strong cherry, 2 to 20 games are added in the challenge mode, and the average number of added games is 15 games. In addition, for weak cherries, 5 to 30 games are added, and the average number of additional games is 10 games.Although the number of games with weak cherries may be larger than that with strong cherries, the number of games may be selected. The average value (the number of games to be added to the expectation) is set so that the number of games with strong cherries is larger.

In step S823, the number of games in the challenge mode is added. In such processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn by step S822 is added to the counter (more specifically, the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) that manages the number of continuous games in the challenge mode. Performs the process of adding. Then, in step S824, the process of setting the additional command as the output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The addition command includes information that the addition has occurred, the number of additional games, and the target (challenge mode or attack mode) to be added. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the addition command will be described in detail later, but the display control device 81 adds the information included in these addition commands as notification based on the reception of the addition command. Notify (additional production).

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S821, the process proceeds to step S825. In step S825, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first specific combination processing is terminated. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition for the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Details will be described later, but if the bonus ends when the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus. That is, the game in which the additional notification is performed is set to differ depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

Returning to the description of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S702 or an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second RT state. In the second RT state, in step S706, it is determined whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the VB mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when the transition to the VB mode is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S706, the second specific combination process is executed in step S707. If a negative determination is made in step S705, it is determined in step S708 whether or not the bonus state is in effect. If it is not in the bonus state, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S706, the third specific combination process is executed in step S709. If it is in the bonus state, the fourth specific combination process is executed in step S710.

<Second specific combination processing>
The second specific combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

Here, the case where the second specific combination processing is performed is a state in which the second RT state is set and the VB mode is not won. The attack mode corresponds to the display mode in this case. In the second specific combination processing, a transition lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift the display mode to the VB mode or the additional special zone. In addition, the addition special zone indicates a state in which the addition of the number of continuous games in the attack zone occurs with a high probability over a plurality of games. Further, in the second specific combination processing, the rank promotion lottery of the attack mode is performed, and the processing for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S901, a process of grasping the rank of the attack mode is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, four attack mode ranks of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are provided, and the transition probability to the VB mode is different for each rank. Therefore, step S901 determines which of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode is the rank of the current attack mode.

In step S902, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the attack mode grasped in step S901 is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the transition probability to the VB mode is set according to the type of the game result that triggers the lottery. As shown in FIG. 37, for example, in the strong cherry 1 and the weak cherry, the strong cherry 1 is set to have a higher probability of transition to the VB mode than the weak cherry. Further, in the VB mode lottery table of each rank, the transition probability to the VB mode is different as a whole, and the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. As described above, the 4th attack mode has a higher probability of shifting to the VB mode than the 3rd attack mode so that the 3rd attack mode has a higher probability of shifting to the VB mode than the 2nd attack mode. It is set so that the transition probability of is high.

In step S903, the VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to the VB mode winning. In this embodiment, when the VB mode transition lottery is performed with the overlapping combination with the bonus as the transition trigger, the transition lottery to the VB mode is not won. That is, the transition to the BB mode and the transition to the VBB mode are prevented from overlapping as much as possible, and the advantage of the overlapping combination with these bonuses is not increased too much.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process of setting the VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. After that, in steps S906 to S909, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, the precursor game number table is acquired in step S906, the precursor game number is drawn in step S907, the precursor game number is set in step S908, the precursor command is set in step S909, and then the second specification is performed. End the role processing. However, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, the number of precursor games is set to 0 for each VB mode winning in the attack mode. Therefore, if the VB mode is won during the attack mode, the winning notification will be performed in the next game.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processes for promoting the rank of the attack mode.

In step S910, the attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In such a process, a table for promotion lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of ROM 105, and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. A plurality of tables for promotion lottery are provided according to the rank of the attack mode, specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, and a table for the third attack mode. There are three (promotion lottery is not performed when staying in the 4th attack mode). At each table, the winning probability of the promotion lottery is set according to the type of the game result that triggers the lottery. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of winning the promotion lottery than the weak cherries. Further, in each attack mode table, the promotion probability of the second attack mode table is lower than that of the first attack mode table, so that the third attack mode table has a lower promotion probability than the second attack mode table. The table for attack mode is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next rank as the rank of attack mode is promoted.

In step S911, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S910 is a promotion winning. If the promotion is won, the attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In such a process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the rank of the current attack mode to the rank flag one higher than the rank flag. After that, in step S913, a process of setting the promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. The promotion command contains information on the attack mode of the promotion destination. The display control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to produce an effect for the attack mode of the rank of the promotion destination. As an effect for the attack mode in the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, an effect of a different background color is set according to the rank of the attack mode, and the display control device 81 receives the promotion command in the attack mode. In addition to notifying that the rank has been promoted, control is performed so that the effect for the attack mode is performed with the background color according to the rank of the promotion destination.

If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S913 is executed, the process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed in steps S914 to S921.

That is, in step S914, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In the additional lottery process, the attack mode additional lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. As shown in FIG. 40, the attack mode additional lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of lottery result.

Here, in the present embodiment, the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode is set so that the push order bell and the push order replay also trigger the lottery. As shown in FIG. 36, the push order bell and the push order replay (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order combination") have a common point value PV set regardless of the set value, and are set to the winning probability. There is no difference. Further, the winning probability of the additional lottery for the number of games performed by the push order combination and the number of additional games at the time of winning are set so as not to be different. In other words, there is no difference in the additional performance triggered by the push order. In addition, in the following description, it is also referred to as a specific role as a role that triggers a lottery regarding the instruction function, including the above-mentioned transition trigger role in these push order roles.

As shown in FIG. 40, among the specific combinations, the push order combination has a lower probability of winning the lottery with the number of games in the attack mode as compared with the transition trigger combination. Therefore, it is more promising to increase the number of games in the attack mode when the transition trigger appears than when the push order appears as the lottery result of each game. Then, it is considered that the player advances the game while expecting that the transition trigger will be won on the premise of that. On the other hand, the push order role has a higher probability of winning in each game than the transition trigger role, and can be said to be a game result that is relatively easy to appear. With such a combination configuration, it is possible to add a push order role to reduce the presence as an opportunity, and to increase the unexpectedness when the addition occurs. Moreover, the opportunity for addition based on these push order combinations is such that it can actually occur during the attack mode (more specifically, if 50 games, which is the initial number of games, are executed 2-3 times, it will occur once. Appearance rate to the extent that it will be). Therefore, it is possible to suitably generate an addition triggered by the unexpected push order as described above.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games in the attack mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. As shown in FIG. 39, the table for drawing the number of additional games in the attack mode is set so that the number of additional games differs depending on the type of the specific combination. For example, in the case of strong cherry, 20 to 200 games are added in the attack mode, and the average number of added games is 30 games. In addition, for weak cherries, 5 to 300 games are added, and the average number of additional games is 20 games.Although the number of games with weak cherries may be larger than that with strong cherries, the number of games may be selected. As the average value, the number of games is set so that the number of strong cherries is larger.

In step S918, the number of games in the attack mode is added. In such processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn by step S917 is added to a counter (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) that manages the number of continuous games in the attack mode. Performs the process of adding. In the following step S919, an additional notification process is performed to notify that the additional lottery has been won and the number of games. Then, in step S920, a process of setting an additional command including the processing result of the additional notification process as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the second specific combination process is terminated. The process for additional notification will be described in detail later.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S921. In step S921, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination processing is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition for the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Details will be described later, but if the bonus ends when the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus. That is, as in the case of the additional notification of the number of games in the challenge mode, the game in which the additional notification is performed is set to be different depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

If it is determined in step S915 that the additional lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S922. In step S922, a transition lottery to the special zone is executed. That is, if a specific combination is won during the attack mode and the lottery for shifting to the VB mode or the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode is not won, the lottery for shifting to the special zone is performed. In the special zone lottery process, a table for special zone transition lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the special zone is performed by a lottery counter or the like. conduct. As shown in FIG. 39, the table for the special zone transition lottery is set so that the winning probability of the transition lottery differs depending on the type of the transition trigger combination among the specific combinations. As already explained, among the transition triggers, the duplicates with the bonus are not won in the transition lottery to the VB mode, while as shown in FIG. 40, the duplicates with the bonus are the attack mode games. It is set so that you will always win the lottery with an additional number (winning with a 100% probability). Therefore, the special zone transition lottery will not be held triggered by the overlapping role with these bonuses, and the special zone transition lottery is at the time of winning strong cherries, weak cherries, etc. that are not overlapping roles with the bonus. It is set so that it can be won if the lottery for shifting to the VB mode and the lottery for adding the number of games are not won. For example, in the special zone transition lottery based on strong cherries, there is a 5% chance of winning, and in the special zone transition lottery based on weak cherries, there is a 0.5% chance of winning. On the other hand, in the special zone transition lottery based on strong watermelon, there is a 15% chance of winning, and in the special zone transition lottery based on weak watermelon, there is a 5% chance of winning.

In step S923, it is determined whether or not the lottery for transition to the special zone has been won based on the processing result of step S922. If it is not won, the second specific combination process is terminated as it is. If the flag is won, in step S924, a process of setting the special zone winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is performed. Then, in step S925, the process of acquiring the precursor game number table is performed, in step S926, the precursor game number lottery process is performed, in step S927, the precursor game number is set, and in step S928, the precursor command is performed. After performing the process of setting, the second specific combination process is terminated. The processing of steps S925 to S928 is the same as the processing of, for example, steps S906 to S909, and is a processing for setting the precursor mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S923 and none of the lottery for shifting to VB mode, the lottery for adding the number of games in attack mode, and the lottery for shifting to the specialized zone is won, the pseudo-addition notification is used in step S929. After performing the processing, the second specific combination processing is terminated. The pseudo-addition notification process is a process for maintaining a sense of expectation by generating an effect similar to that at the time of winning even if the lottery is not won. The pseudo-addition notification process will be described in detail later.

<Third specific role processing>
Next, the third specific combination processing executed in step S709 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

The case where the third specific combination processing is performed is a case where the third RT state is performed, or a state where the second RT state is performed and the VB mode is won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the attack mode or the VB mode. In the third specific combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode and a transfer lottery for whether or not to transfer to the special zone are performed.

That is, in step S1001, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S914. The winning probability of the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process of step S914 and the lottery process of step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1001 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1004, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, the number of games in the attack mode is added, in step S1006, the addition notification process is performed, and in step S1007, the addition command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. , This third specific combination processing is terminated. The processing of steps S1003 to S1007 is the same as the processing of steps S916 to S920. The number of additional games may be different between the lottery process of step S916 and the lottery process of step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1009. In step S1009, the transition lottery to the special zone is executed. That is, when a specific combination is won during the VB mode, even if the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode is not won, the lottery for shifting to the special zone is performed. The special zone lottery process is the same as the process of step S922, and is performed based on the special zone transition lottery table (FIG. 37). The processing of steps S1010 to S1016 is the same as the processing of steps S923 to S929. If it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and then the third specific combination process is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is as described above.

In the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31), the fourth specific combination process in step S710 is a process in the bonus state, and will be described in detail later.

When it is determined in step S701 that the lottery state is in the carry-over state, or after any of the processes of step S704, step S707, step S709 and step S710 is executed, the result of the current lottery process is pushed in step S711. It is determined whether or not the order replay or the push order bell has been won. If the push order combination is won, the push order combination process is executed in step S712. The push order combination processing will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S711, or after the process of step S712 is executed, the process proceeds to step S713. In step S713, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As mentioned above, the special zone flag will be transferred to the special zone after the special zone winning flag is set based on winning the transition lottery to the super attack mode or the transition lottery to the special zone. This flag is set when it occurs (when the 7th re-game prize is established). If the special zone flag is set in step S713, the special zone process is executed in step S714. If a negative determination is made in step S713, or after the process of step S714 is executed, the process for dealing with the lottery result is terminated.

<Processing for specialized zones>
The processing for the special zone will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special zone processing, first, the result of the lottery processing this time is grasped in step S1101. In the following step S1102, the attack mode additional game number lottery process is performed. In the following step S1103, the number of games in the attack mode is added. Then, in step S1104, the addition notification process is executed, the addition command is set in step S1105, and then the special zone processing is terminated. The processing of steps S1102 to S1105 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S920. However, the number of additional games selected in the additional game number lottery process in step S1102 is larger than that in the additional game number lottery process in step S917 (FIG. 39). Further, in the special zone, the number of games in the attack mode is always added regardless of the game result (FIG. 40).

As described above, in the lottery result handling process, the process for shifting to the challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, and the process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or attack mode, provided that the game is not in the carry-over state. And so on. In other words, even if a specific winning combination is won, the challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode transition lottery, and the processing for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or attack mode are not performed during the carry-over state. Its implementation is limited. If the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode is won, the notification of winning the transition lottery is given after the precursory game. Therefore, the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Process for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery>
(2) In the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the process for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the gaming state are performed. And the processing to do is done. Therefore, first, the process related to the notification that the transition lottery has been won will be described.

<Process for mode transition notification>
The notification that the transition lottery has been won is performed in the mode transition notification processing (step S206) in the normal processing (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is a process executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is a predetermined number). Hereinafter, the mode transition notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is 0. The number of precursor games is counted in the winning result correspondence process described later, and the number of precursor games is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

When the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1202 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode of this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the bonus. If the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1203, and then the mode transition notification process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the bonus winning notification command notifies that the bonus has been won by displaying "bonus confirmed !!" on the auxiliary display unit 65, for example. In addition, the type of the winning bonus (either the first BB or the second BB) may be combined and notified.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the bonus and the attack mode, the challenge mode, or the like are simultaneously won, the winning notification of the attack mode or the like is performed at the end of the bonus notified in step S1203. The process related to the winning notification will be described in detail later, but when the winning notification such as the attack mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification, the winning notification such as the attack mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1203. It is good to configure it to set commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1205. Then, in step S1206, the challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1207, the challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies that the challenge mode is started by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later.

After that, in step S1208, counting of the number of continuous challenge modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1208, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1204 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1210. Then, in step S1211, the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state when the attack mode transition lottery is won. After that, in step S1212, the attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command notifies that the attack mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1212, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of the winning notification in the super attack mode is different from the mode of the winning notification in the attack mode. Therefore, in step S1212, the attack mode winning notification command may be set so as to include information on whether or not the super attack mode is set. The mode of the winning notification in the attack mode and the mode of the winning notification in the super attack mode may be different as long as they can be identified by the player, and more preferably, the winning notification in the super attack mode having a high advantage. It is preferable that the mode is more flashy than the mode of notification of winning in the attack mode.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the modes of winning notification in these attack modes and super attack modes are shared. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it appear as if the winning content has been promoted from the attack mode to the super attack mode between the attack mode winning notification game and the start notification game, and the attack mode winning. It is possible to eliminate the delay caused by the difference between the notification game and the start notification game.

When it is determined in step S1209 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1213 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1214. Then, in step S1215, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state when the VB mode transition lottery is won. After that, in step S1216, the VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command notifies that the VB mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1216, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1213 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1217. In step S1217, it is determined whether or not the special zone winning flag is set. If it is not set, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is. If it is set, the process of clearing the special zone winning flag is performed in step S1218. Then, in step S1219, a process of setting the special zone notification flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is performed. The special zone notification flag is a flag for executing push order notification corresponding to the 7th re-game winning prize. After executing the process of step S1219, the special zone winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1220, and then the mode transition notification process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the special zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the special zone has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S1217, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

That is, among the challenge mode, the attack mode, the VB mode, and the specialized zone that shift through the precursor mode, the challenge mode is set based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. It will be started. On the other hand, for the attack mode, VB mode and special zone, only the notification that the attack mode transition lottery or the VB mode transition lottery has been won is only notified based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. Even if the number of precursor games becomes 0, the attack mode, VB mode, and special zone are not started. This is because the challenge mode as the display mode does not involve the transition of the gaming state, while the attack mode and the VB mode accompany the transition of the gaming state, and specifically, the attack mode shifts to the second RT state. It is started and the VB mode is due to the difference that it is started by shifting to the 3rd RT state. In the special zone, there is a case where the game state is not changed (3rd RT state → 3rd RT state), but in this embodiment, the 7th re-game winning game in the 3rd RT state is set as the start game. It has the above processing configuration.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is the case where the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, the 3rd replay winning is established, and the 3rd RT state is the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2. The transition is made when the 4th and 5th re-game winnings are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay prize is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay prizes are established, This is the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay winning or the like. Therefore, when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the VB mode is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in the game in which the winning combination is to shift the gaming state thereafter. It is configured to enable the transition of the game state. It should be noted that from the notification that the attack mode or VB mode transition lottery has been won to the start of the attack mode or VB mode (until the game state shifts), the notification as a preparation state (for example, "" "Preparing" will be announced.

<Explanation about transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the push order combination process (step S712) in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the push order combination processing, an outline of the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

<Overview of push order notification effect>
Notification of the operation order (push order notification, push order notification effect, order notification, mode notification) at the time of winning the push order combination is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the instruction monitor 68. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the push order combination in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left is won. The push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and it is displayed larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a numerical value is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 42B, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification, the push order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. Is set to run. By configuring the push order notification at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective in this way, the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is possible to make the operation desired, and the game can be advanced at a good tempo.

<Pushing order processing>
Next, the push order combination process executed in step S712 in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is any of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1301 is the case where the first re-game or the third re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the attack notification flag is a flag set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the transition lottery to the attack mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 41). be.

If the attack notification flag is set, the process for notification of the push order of the third re-game is executed in step S1303. Specifically, among the first re-game and the third re-game, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (a)). After that, in step S1304, a process of setting the push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order combination process is terminated. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the push order notification command will be described in detail later.

In addition, in the case of notifying the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning in step S1303, basically, the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, and the winning notification of the attack mode is performed via the precursor mode. It is assumed that it is after the damage and before the transition to the attack mode. That is, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won in the lottery table in the second RT state or the third RT state, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. However, even in the attack mode, the game state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state due to an erroneous operation or the like, and even in such a case, the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won. By doing so, it is possible to return to the second RT state at an early stage.

If a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the lottery result this time is any of the fall replays 1 to 3. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1305 is a case where the first re-game or the second re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1306, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, the process for notification of the push order of the first re-game is executed in step S1307. Specifically, among the first re-game and the second re-game, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)). After that, in step S1308, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated.

In this way, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the situation where the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified, and the game state is changed. It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1302, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, the first re-game prize is established and the third re-game prize is established. , There is.

In addition, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won in the situation where the attack notification flag is set, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified, and the game state is shifted to the first RT state. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1306, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay prize may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state. Will shift from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state.

Further, for example, in the 1st RT state, the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay winning, and the 3rd replay winning is established. Even if it is done (even if it shifts to the 2nd RT state), the 2nd replay winning can be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if it happens to shift to the second RT state without winning the attack mode, it will promptly shift to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1305, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the lottery result this time is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1309 is the case where the first re-game, the fourth re-game, or the fifth re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1310, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1311, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag or the special zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the VB notification flag is a flag set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the transition lottery to the VB mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 41). be. Further, the notification flag for the special zone is a flag set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the transition lottery to the special zone in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 41). be.

When the VB notification flag or the special zone notification flag is set, the process for notification of the push order of the fourth re-game or the fifth re-game is executed in step S1312. Specifically, among the first re-game, the fourth re-game, and the fifth re-game, the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game prize or the fifth re-game prize is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)). After that, in step S1313, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1310, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1311, the process for notifying the push order of the first replay is executed in step S1307, and the process for setting the push order notification command is performed in step S1308. The final push order processing is completed. Therefore, when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won without winning the VB mode or the special zone, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning is performed if the attack mode is in effect, and the attack is performed. If it is not in the mode, the push order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1309, it is determined in step S1314 whether or not the lottery result this time is BAR replay 1. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1314 is a case where any one of the first re-game, the third re-game, and the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game wins, depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1315, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1316 whether or not the special zone notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the special zone notification flag is set, the process for notification of the push order of the seventh re-game is executed in step S1317. Specifically, among the 1st re-game, the 3rd re-game, and the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game, the operation order corresponding to the 7th re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (c)). After that, in step S1318, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1315, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1316, the process for notifying the push order of the first replay is executed in step S1307, and the process for setting the push order notification command is performed in step S1308. The final push order processing is completed. Therefore, when BAR Replay 1 is won without winning the VB mode or the special zone, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first re-game winning is performed if it is in the attack mode, and it must be in the attack mode. If there is no push order notification effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S1314, it is determined in step S1319 whether or not the lottery result this time is a push order bell winning. If the push order bell is won, in step S1320, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the normal mode or the challenge mode. When the mode is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, a process for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is executed in step S1321 (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1322, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1319 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1320, the main push order combination processing is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process.

In the case of a configuration in which the push order notification is executed at least a predetermined number of times (once) in the challenge mode, it is determined in step S1302 and step S1320 whether or not the push order notification is executed a predetermined number of times during the challenge mode. It is good to have a configuration that performs. Then, if a negative determination is made in such a determination, it is preferable to count the number of times and proceed to the process for notifying the push order on the step S1303 or step S1321 side.

<Process to shift the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for winning results>
Next, a process will be described when a winning combination corresponding to the transition of the gaming state is awarded as a result of the notification for shifting the gaming state as described above (3). This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). Hereinafter, the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44.

In step S1401, the game number management process is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode described above, the challenge mode, the attack mode, the VB mode, the counting of the number of continuous games in the special zone, and the like are performed. In the following step S1402, the post-addition notification process is executed. The post-addition notification process is a process for performing post-addition notification, which is one of the additional notification modes. The post-addition notification process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S1403, it is determined whether or not the third re-game winning is established based on the stop result this time. As described above, when the third re-game winning is established, the RT state process (FIG. 21) performs a process for shifting the game state to the second RT state. In this case, in step S1404, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. The case where the attack notification flag is not set is the case where the third replay winning prize is established without satisfying the transition condition to the attack mode. In this case, the process for starting the attack mode is not performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is. When the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the current display mode is in the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as the flag for specifying the display mode, in addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a special zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided. In the present embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to the RT state higher than the attack mode (VB mode, additional special zone), the attack mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, VB mode flag, It has a structure that coexists with the special zone flag). Therefore, for example, the case where it is determined in step S1405 that the attack mode flag is set includes the case where the attack mode is in progress, the case where the VB mode is in effect, and the case where the special zone is in progress. ..

If the attack mode flag is set in step S1405, since the display mode is already the attack mode, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, the process for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1406 to S1409.

That is, in step S1406, the attack mode flag is set. In the following step S1407, the attack mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command notifies that the attack mode is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After that, in step S1408, counting of the number of continuous attack modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuous games in the attack mode is set in the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106.

After performing the process of step S1408, it is determined in step S1409 whether or not the special zone flag is set. When affirmative judgment is made in step S1409, it means that the attack mode won this time is the super attack mode. In this case, after clearing the special zone winning flag in step S1410, the additional special zone is started. The process proceeds to (step S1419 to step S1421). The process for starting the additional special zone will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S1409, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S1403 that the third replay winning prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, as a result of this stop, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have been established. As described above, when the 4th and 5th re-game winnings have been established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the gaming state to the 3rd RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1412, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, it means that the 4th and 5th replay prizes have been established without winning the VB mode transition lottery. In this case, the VB mode start dignity process is not performed. , Ends the winning result handling process as it is. When the VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1413 whether or not the VB mode flag is set. When the VB mode flag is set, since the display mode is already the VB mode, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the VB mode flag is not set, the process for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1414 to S1416.

That is, in step S1414, a process of setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d. This is a mode in which the VB mode shifts through the attack mode, and after the VB mode ends, the VB mode always shifts to the attack mode.

After that, in step S1415, the VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command notifies that the VB mode is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1416, counting of the number of continuous VB modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 25) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in the VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1416 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the 4th and 5th replay winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether or not the seventh re-game winning is established as a result of this stop. In the present embodiment, when the 7th replay prize is established, that is, the "black BAR" symbol is in the middle of the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol is in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol is in the middle of the right reel 32R. When the "black BAR" symbol stops and the "black BAR" symbol stops on the combination line in the middle row, it is configured to shift to the additional special zone. The case where the 7th re-game prize is established is the case where the BAR replay 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th re-game prize. There is (Fig. 23 (c)).

When the seventh re-game winning is established, it is determined in step S1418 whether or not the special zone notification flag is set. When the special zone notification flag is set, the special zone start processing is performed in steps S1419 to S1421. As described above, at the start of the super attack mode, the processes of steps S1419 to S1421 are also performed when the affirmative determination is made in step S1409 and the process of step S1410 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1419, a process of setting the special zone flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The special zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is the above-mentioned additional special zone, and when the special zone flag is set, the counting of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is stopped. .. In this case, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag may coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d.

After that, in step S1420, the special zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command notifies that the special zone is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1421, the counting of the number of continuous special zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1421, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1418, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

As described above, based on the winning of the winning combination (third to fifth replay) corresponding to the transition of the gaming state, the processing for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT status processing (FIG. 21). conduct. This is to prevent the attack mode etc. from being started based on the winning combination corresponding to the transition of the game state by chance even though the lottery for transitioning the display mode has not been won. Is.

In addition, when shifting to the display mode, among those that accompany the transition to the gaming state, when shifting to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, or when shifting from attack mode to VB mode, Alternatively, when shifting from the attack mode or VB mode to the specialized zone, the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding winning combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of the transition to the lower mode, the transition to the display mode is not performed when the gaming state shifts due to, for example, the second re-game winning as a fall replay or the stop of the transition roll. When shifting to a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when shifting to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Game number management process>
The game number management process executed in step S1401 of the winning result correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted, and the number of continuous games in these display modes is 0. Based on the above, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the bet number is a specific number. As described above, in the present embodiment, each game can be played with a bet number of 1 to 3, and in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the specific number is 3 bets. If it is not a 3-bet, the game number management process is terminated as it is. That is, in the 1-bet or 2-bet game, the number of games in the precursor mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode are not counted. It should be noted that the counting may be performed regardless of the number of bets.

If the game ending this time is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the bonus state is set. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1502, the process of clearing each display mode flag of the challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and special zone flag is performed in step S1503, and then the game number management process is terminated. do. That is, when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games such as attack mode is not counted. If each flag is not set in step S1503, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1503, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the like are cleared, but the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after the preparation state such as the attack mode is performed, the push order notification for shifting the game state is performed by these flags, and it is possible to return to the game state before the bonus. On the other hand, if a bonus is won during the challenge mode or the special zone, the challenge mode or the special zone is terminated by the bonus winning. Further, in step S1503, the challenge mode winning flag, the attack mode winning flag, and the like are not cleared. Therefore, when the attack mode or the like and the bonus are won at the same time, the winning notification is performed based on these winning flags after the bonus ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1502, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not the number of precursor games is 0. If it is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1505. When the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1504 (when the precursor mode is not set), or after the process of step S1505 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1506 to S1528. ..

That is, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. In the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1507 and the challenge mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, so that the number of challenge mode continuation games is subtracted. Then, in step S1508, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1509, and the challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1510. In the display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the challenge mode ends in this game. After performing the process of step S1510, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1506 that the mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. If it is in the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1512, and it is determined whether or not the zone is in the attack mode. That is, when shifting to the special zone at the start of the attack mode as in the super attack mode, a positive determination is made in step S1512. If the player is in the special zone, the game number management process for the special zone is performed in steps S1525 to S1528. These processes will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1512 that the zone is not a specialized zone, the number of attack mode continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the attack mode continuation counter in step S1513. Then, in step S1514, it is determined whether or not the attack mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1515, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1516. After that, in step S1517, the attack mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the attack mode ends in this game. Such notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1517, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1511 that the attack mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1518. In step S1518, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. In the case of the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S1519, and it is determined whether or not the zone is an additional special zone. If it is not an additional special zone, the number of VB mode continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the VB mode continuation counter in step S1520. Then, in step S1521, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1522, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1523. After that, in step S1524, the VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the VB mode ends in this game. Such notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1524, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1519 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1525. As described above, if it is determined in step S1512 that the zone is a special zone in the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1525. In step S1525, the number of special zone continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1526, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is 0. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1527, and the special zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1528. In the display control device 81 that has received the special zone end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the special zone ends in this game. As such notification, for example, the number of games that have been successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1528, the game number management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1518 or step S1526, the game number management process is terminated as it is.

<End judgment processing>
Next, as the process at the end of the bonus, the end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the end determination process is the process performed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the end determination process, the success or failure of the bonus end condition is determined, and when the bonus is terminated, processing for winning notification such as an attack mode in which the bonus is duplicated is performed, and an attack mode in which the bonus and the duplicate are won are performed. Processing for adding the number of games such as.

That is, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination is established. As already explained, during the bonuses of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the 1st role in the BB is established with a high probability, and the 2nd role in the BB and the 3rd role in the BB are partially established (FIG. 28). When the 1st role in the BB is won, the 1st small role is mainly won, and a predetermined number (9 medals) are paid out, and the 2nd role in the BB and the 3rd role in the BB are the 9th replay. This is a replay of the 10th replay, and even if a prize is established, no medal payout will occur. In addition, in the CB, even if one of the CB small and medium-sized winning combination 1 to the CB small and medium-sized winning combination 4 is won, the first small and medium-sized winning combination is mainly established and the predetermined number (15 cards). Medal payout occurs. Step S1601 is a process of determining whether or not a small winning combination for which a medal payout occurs is established among the winning combinations during these bonuses and CBs.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the small winning combination is established, the process of subtracting the number of payouts of the current game from the number of remaining payouts is performed in step S1602. When a negative determination is made in step S1601, or after the process of step S1602 is executed, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not the number of remaining payouts has become zero. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after setting the bonus end command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1604, in steps S1605 to S1619, processing for winning notification such as attack mode, attack mode, etc. Performs processing for adding the number of continuous games.

That is, in step S1605, it is determined whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. When the attack mode winning flag is set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S1606, the number of precursor games is set in step S1607, and the precursor command is set in step S1608. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the lottery process of the number of precursor games in step S1606, a lottery is performed in which the number of precursor games becomes 0 with a 100% probability. That is, in step S1607, the number of precursor games of 0 games is always set, and the winning notification such as the attack mode is performed in the next game of the bonus end game. After executing the process of step S1608, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1605, it is determined in step S1609 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. When the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1606 to S1608 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1609, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. When the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1606 to S1608 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. That is, when the bonus ends in the situation where the challenge mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the winning notification of the challenge mode and the VB mode is performed through the precursor game.

In addition, when the bonus ends when the attack mode winning flag or the challenge mode winning flag is set, it means that the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. and the bonus are won at the same time, or the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. This is the case when the bonus is won during the precursor mode of. On the other hand, when the bonus ends when the VB mode winning flag is set, it means that the VB mode and the bonus are won at the same time in the attack mode, or during the precursor mode of the winning notification in the VB mode (in this case, in this case). Since the precursor mode of 0 game is selected, it is the case where the bonus is won in the next game) in which the VB mode is won.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1610, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether or not the attack mode addition flag is set. When the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1612, the attack mode game number addition processing is performed in step S1613, and the addition notification processing is performed in step S1614. , The additional command is set in step S1615. The processing of steps S1612 to S1615 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S920. After executing the process of step S1615, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1611, it is determined in step S1616 whether or not the challenge mode addition flag is set. When the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1617, the challenge mode game number addition process is performed in step S1618, and the addition command is set in step S1619. .. The processing of steps S1617 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S822 to S824. When a negative determination is made in step S1616, or after the process of step S1619 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

As described above, on the main control device 101 side, (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) winning result. As a result of each process of shifting the display mode based on the above, the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 is generated, and the gaming state is also shifted so as to follow the shift of the display mode. The push order bell prize can be generated by the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65, and a large number of medals can be expected to be obtained.

Here, when the push order notification effect (push order notification effect by the display control device 81) is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 at the time of push order replay or push order bell winning, the main control is performed in addition to the push order notification effect. The push order notification is also performed on the instruction monitor 68 connected to the device 101. The configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. 47 (a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 47 (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Since each of the individual light sources irradiates light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

For details of the respective display segments N1 to N8, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and these first display segments N1 to 7 are for display. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally to the lower right portion of the region provided with the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. Therefore, on the instruction monitor 68, at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and "." Can be displayed.

If it is possible to display the symbols of a plurality of patterns individually on the instruction monitor 68, the shapes and arrangement modes of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary, and further, 7 instead of 8 segments. A configuration using 9 segments, 9 segments, or the like may be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changed. Further, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the light source on and off, and if the display control can be performed individually for each display segment N1 to N8. A segment display may be configured by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbol may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for notifying the operation order of the push order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the winning mode is advantageous for the player by performing the stop operation in the order of "left"-> "middle"-> "right" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. If so, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "1" is displayed. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "right"-> "left"-> "middle" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is advantageous for the player, the first display segment N1. The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and displayed, and "5" is displayed. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 is selected when the display mode is the normal mode and the lottery for transition to the attack mode, the super attack mode, or the challenge mode is won, or the attack mode, the super attack mode, or the challenge mode is simultaneously won. Lights up when you win the bonus (1st BB) you get. Further, it is turned off when the attack mode, the super attack mode, the challenge mode, and the first BB are completed and the mode is changed to the normal mode (except when the mode is changed to the attack mode again after going through the precursor mode).

In other words, the navigation state (attack mode, super attack mode, high frequency mode) that makes it easier for the player to win a prize by making it easier to notify the operation order of the push order bell and push order replay, to the navigation state. Chance state (challenge mode, 1st BB, high probability mode) that makes it easier to win the transition lottery, or winning that has won the transition lottery to the navigation state or chance state but has not transitioned to these navigation states or chance states The section including the state (winning mode) is set as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is turned on during the advantageous section and turned off during the normal section which is not the advantageous section. It serves as a section indicator (specific notification means) for clearly indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section.

The eighth display segment N8 is a game in which a game is started in which the game result (specific role such as a strong cherry) that triggers an advantageous section such as a navigation state, a chance state, or a winning state is won and the game result is established. Then, in the next game of the start game, the lighting is started as a notification that the advantageous section is reached at the timing before the game operation by the player is allowed. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the game in which the game result is won is selected regardless of whether or not the game result winning that triggered the advantageous section is established, that is, whether or not the game is missed. As the start game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on at a timing before the betting operation is permitted as the game operation by the player in the next game. That is, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on before the start of the next game of the game that has won the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

As described above, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player, in other words, the front portion of the gaming machine below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like are provided. Is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position that is easy for the player to see. Further, it can be said that the oversight by the player is suppressed from the fact that the player who advances the game aiming at the acquisition of the medal is arranged near the payout number display unit 62 which is easy to watch.

Further, in the instruction monitor 68, in particular, the eighth display segment N8 has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display units (for example, the payout number display unit 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is defined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display unit). Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display unit are controlled to emit light (when the lighting state is set), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine is higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display section (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine 2). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined (so that the illuminance is doubled). Also from such a configuration, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on is suppressed.

Hereinafter, the section display first process and the section display second process will be described as processes related to lighting / extinguishing of the eighth display segment N8.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. 48. The section display first process is a process performed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41 and based on the lottery result. It is carried out after the display mode transition lottery or the like (lottery result correspondence processing) is performed.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, and more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is lit, as an advantageous section, the attack mode, the super attack mode, the transition mode to the challenge mode, the lottery has been won, or in these modes. It shows a case. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. When the eighth display segment N8 is turned off and either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the lottery for transition to the challenge mode or the attack mode is performed in this lottery process. And when you win the lottery to shift to the super attack mode. As described above, in the first specific combination processing (FIG. 32), when the lottery for transition to the challenge mode is won, the challenge mode winning flag is set and the lottery for transition to the attack mode or the super attack mode is won. In that case, the attack mode winning flag is set. If neither flag is set in step S1702, the first process of displaying this section is terminated as it is.

If either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1703, and the section display is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8. In addition, in the main control device 101, when the display is started with the eighth display segment N8 as the section display in the lit state, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound "Gago!"" Is given from the speaker 64. A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so that the predetermined sound effect is emitted based on the command for sound output. At the start of display of the eighth display segment N8, the auxiliary display unit 65 or another display unit may be configured to generate an effect. In this case, the corresponding command is output to the display control device 81 and the corresponding command is output. It is preferable that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed.

After executing the process of step S1703, in step S1704, the process of starting the measurement of the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is executed, and then the section display first process ends. The number of continuous games in the advantageous section is measured by measuring the number of advantageous section games AG provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and in step S1704, the process of setting the number of advantageous section games AG to 0, which is the initial value. I do. The advantageous section game number AG is executed by adding 1 in each game in the advantageous section.

When it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, in step S1705, the process of continuing the display in the advantageous section is performed, and then the first process of displaying this section is performed. To finish. Specifically, in step S1705, a process for continuing the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state is performed. That is, the process for ending the display of the section display is not performed in the first section display process.

<Second section display process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. As described above, the second section display process is a process performed in step S415 of the reel control process, and at the end of one game, the medal is paid out (payout determination process) and the game state is changed based on the winning result. Etc. (Processing for winning results) will be performed.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit and displayed as the section display. If it is off (non-lighting, non-display), the second section display process is terminated as it is. If the lighting display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1802. In step S1802, a process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, the process of adding 1 to the number of games AG in the advantageous section is performed. The advantageous section game number AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the advantageous section, and the number of games played in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is lit is measured. After executing the process of step S1802, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S1803. The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in the attack mode.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 50, first, in step S1901, the number of precursor games G1 is grasped. For example, when the current situation is the precursor mode in the advantageous section, the precursor game number G1 represents the number of games in the remaining precursor mode, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 45). .. In step S1902, the challenge mode continuation number G2 is grasped. The challenge mode continuation number G2 represents, for example, the number of games in the remaining challenge mode when the current situation is the challenge mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 45). .. In step S1903, the attack mode continuation number G3 is grasped. The attack mode continuation number G3 represents, for example, the number of games in the remaining attack mode when the current situation is the attack mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 45). .. In step S1904, the VB mode continuation number G4 is grasped. The VB mode continuation number G4 represents, for example, the number of games in the remaining VB mode when the current situation is the VB mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 45). .. In step S1905, the number of continuous special zones G5 is grasped. The number of continuous special zones G5 represents, for example, the number of games in the remaining special zones when the current situation is a special zone in an advantageous section, and one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 45). It is subtracted. In step S1906, the number of remaining BB games G6 is grasped. The BB remaining game number G6 represents, for example, the number of games in the remaining BB mode when the current state is the BB mode (bonus state) in the advantageous section, and each time the game number management process (FIG. 45) is activated. In addition, subtraction is performed one by one by a subtraction process (not shown) on condition that the player is in the BB mode.

Here, for these continuation numbers G1 to G6, a value of 0 or more may be input even if the current mode or zone is not the corresponding mode or zone. Specifically, for example, in a situation where a lottery for transition to VB mode has been won but the transition to VB mode has not yet been performed, the current mode is attack mode and the number of continuation VB modes G4 is the continuation of VB mode. The initial value of the number of games, "25", remains input. In addition, although the lottery for transition to the super attack mode was won during the challenge mode, in the situation where the transition to the super attack mode has not yet been performed, the current mode is the challenge mode, and the special zone continuation number G5 is special. A situation in which "5", which is the initial value of the number of continuous games in the attack mode, is still input, and "50", which is the initial value of the number of continuous games in the attack mode, is also input to the attack mode continuous number G3. Will be.

In step S1907, a process of calculating the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section is performed by integrating G1 to G6 grasped in each process of steps S1901 to S1906. By performing such processing, it becomes possible to grasp how many games the advantageous section will continue. In the following step S1908, a process of calculating the total number of advantageous section games SG is performed by adding the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of games in the advantageous section AG) and the number of remaining games ZG that have been carried out so far. Then, in step S1909, the number of vacant games (the number of vacant games that can be added, the number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the total number of advantageous section games SG from 1500G, which is the continuous upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. Perform processing.

After performing the process of step S1909, in step S1910, it is determined whether or not the number of empty games FG is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the number of empty games is available and can be added. If the number of empty games FG is larger than 0, the remaining game number management process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of empty games FG is 0 or less, the process of setting the excess flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1911, and then the process of managing the number of remaining games is terminated. The CPU 102 grasps that the excess flag is a situation in which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section cannot be added, and more specifically, even if the addition is performed, the additional game is not executed due to the forced termination at the time of 1500 games. It is a flag to do.

By setting the excess flag, in the present embodiment, even if a specific winning combination is won during the advantageous section, the implementation of the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode is restricted. More specifically, for example, when the excess flag is set in the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode such as step S914 and step S1001, the execution of the lottery process is restricted and the additional winning is not performed. (Or, even if you win, 0 games will be added). As a result, it is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the advantageous section continues for the maximum number of games or more due to the addition to the amount that cannot be continued.

It should be noted that once the excess flag is set, the remaining game number management process may not be executed in this advantageous section.

Returning to the explanation of the second section display process (FIG. 49), after executing the process of step S1803, did the advantageous section game number AG reach the upper limit value "1500" in this game in step S1804? Judge whether or not. When "1500" is reached, the advantageous section game number AG is cleared to 0 in step S1805, and then the eighth display segment N8 is turned off as the end processing of the display of the section display in step S1806. Perform the process of making it. Then, after performing the data initialization process in step S1807, the second section display process is terminated.

The data initialization process is a process of returning the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the advantageous section of this time and the flags and counters set during the advantageous section of this time to the initial values. For example, the challenge mode winning flag, the attack mode winning flag, etc. may be set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or the VB mode winning flag may be set during the attack mode, and the flag may remain set until this initialization process. If so, clear these winning flags. Further, in the initialization process, if the attack notification flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, the special zone flag, and the like are set, these flags are also cleared. Further, if the precursor counter, the counter for the number of continuous games such as the attack mode, and the like are larger than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process, all variables or parameters affecting the performance related to push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using push order notification, and RAM is cleared for such variables or parameters. It is a process to perform.

If it is determined in step S1804 that the advantageous section game number AG has not reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1808, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has ended. That is, in step S1808, it is determined whether or not neither the challenge mode winning flag nor the attack mode winning flag is set, and in step S1809, neither the challenge mode flag nor the attack mode flag is set. Determine if it is in a state. When affirmative judgment is made in either step S1808 or step S1809, it means that the advantageous section is completed before the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1805 and the advantageous section game number AG is determined. In addition to clearing to 0, the section display termination process is performed in step S1806, the data initialization process is performed in step S1807, and then the section display second process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in either step S1808 or step S1809, it is considered that the section is still advantageous, and the section display second process is terminated as it is. In this case, the lighting display of the section display (eighth display segment N8) will continue.

<About the display of the push order display and section display and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 51, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned off (not lit) in a normal section that is not an advantageous section. In this normal section, the push order notification effect is not performed. That is, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have the instruction function, whereas the advantageous section has the performance related to the instruction function such as the push order notification. The situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if a lottery for transition to an advantageous section such as a challenge mode or an attack mode is won by winning a weak watermelon role, the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established is set as the start game, and the start game of the start game is set. In the next game, the eighth display segment N8 as the section display lights up at a timing before the betting operation by the player is allowed, and the notification of the advantageous section is started.

In this case, in the game in which the weak watermelon role is won as described above, the game is in the state before the transition to the advantageous section and is included in the normal section. Then, with respect to the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator indicating the advantageous section, the timing at which the notification that the segment N8 is the advantageous section allows the betting operation of the next game of the start game in which the weak watermelon combination is won. That is, if the game in which the advantageous section is started is regarded as being played at the timing when the game becomes possible, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in the weak watermelon role winning game (starting game) as described above. It can be said that the notification is a prior notification performed before the notification that the section is advantageous (notification during state, notification during mode).

After that, in the situation where the notification that the section is advantageous is made, the push order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is generated. In this case, the push order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as described above, and the player pushes based on the push order information. You can grasp the order. In the push order notification, the push order information starts to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If the game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends at the time of the third reel stop ON operation, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the push order combination is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to the push order combination is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit and the final game in the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off and the notification of the advantageous section ends. The number of games in the advantageous section is counted in the game in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. Specifically, the game following the start game is set as the first game, and the final in which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off. Up to the game is the number of games in the advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout is completed (by the section display second process which is a process after the payout determination process). If the medal is not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly know that the game was the final game in the advantageous section.

As described above, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on when the advantageous section is reached, and the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the advantageous section ends. Then, the eighth display segment N8 not only starts lighting based on the transition to the challenge mode, the attack mode, etc., but also based on the fact that the lottery for the transition to the challenge mode, the attack mode, etc. is won. Lighting starts. That is, even if the notification is not given in the game that has won the transition lottery to these modes, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lit, it is possible to determine whether or not the transition lottery has been won. It is possible to grasp clearly. By doing so, there is an advantage between the player who has won the lottery for transition to these modes but ends the game without knowing it, and the successor player who will be seated after that. It is possible to prevent the difference in degree.

In addition, the slot machine 10 is configured so that there is no difference in the advantage depending on the set value with respect to the playability in which the advantage is changed by the push order notification such as the challenge mode and the attack mode. Therefore, by making the playability by the push order notification a uniform advantage in each game table (set value) and each game (situation), the advantages / disadvantages between the players are eliminated and the privilege is aimed at the pattern. It is possible to make a well-balanced gaming machine by fully enjoying the original playability of the slot machine 10 and the relationship with the playability by the accompanying push order notification.

<Processing related to notification effect on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to the notification effect on the sub side, various notification processes performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As various notification processes, an effect setting process executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S2002, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command.

When a negative determination is made in step S2001, or after the process of step S2002 is executed, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation, and is a mode transition notification process (FIG. 6) in addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process. There are a challenge mode start command, an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, a bonus winning notification command, and the like in 41). In the case of these bet-time commands, the bet-time effect setting process is executed in step S2004.

When a negative determination is made in step S2003, or after the process of step S2004 is executed, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, the first to first commands are used. There are precursor commands and addition commands set in the third specific combination processing (FIGS. 32 to 34), push order notification commands set in the push order combination processing (FIG. 43), and the like. In the case of these start-time commands, the start-time effect setting process is executed in step S2006.

When a negative determination is made in step S2005, or after the process of step S2006 is executed, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a command output from the main control device 101, and is a command output from step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). It is a stop command command set by. In the case of a stop command command as each stop operation command, the effect setting process at each stop operation is executed in step S2008.

When a negative determination is made in step S2007, or after the process of step S2008 is executed, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of total stop. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped, and the winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to commands, attack mode start command, VB mode start command, special zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, specialization set in the winning result correspondence process (Fig. 44). There is a zone end command, etc. In the case of these commands at the time of total stop, the effect setting process at the time of total stop is executed in step S2010.

If a negative determination is made in step S2009, or after the process of step S2010 is executed, other processes are executed in step S2011, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S2011, the effect based on the command from the main control device 101 other than the bet time, the start time, and the stop time (for example, the effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) is set, and the connection is made without going through the main control device 101. Set the effect based on the signal from the sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), set for error notification, and so on.

Hereinafter, the bet time effect setting process, the start time effect setting process, each stop operation time effect setting process, and the all stop time effect setting process will be described. In addition, in the description of each effect setting process, it will be described with reference to the schematic views of the display effects of FIGS. 58 and 63 to 68.

<Bet production setting process>
The betting effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode start command is included as the bet command received this time. When the challenge mode start command is included, the process of setting the challenge mode start effect is performed in step S2102. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the characters "challenge mode start" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the display mode to be shifted is easy to win the attack mode transition lottery. Display suggesting that the mode is a chance mode (for example, displaying a predetermined character). In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "grab the attack mode!" With a thick male voice) is emitted.

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S2101, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the attack mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. When the attack mode winning notification command is included, the process of setting the attack mode winning notification effect is performed in step S2104. In the attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “attack mode confirmed”. In addition, in the attack mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack number one!" In a high voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, the process of setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S2106. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "VICTORY BONUS confirmed". In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" In the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2105, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not the bonus winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. If the bonus winning notification command is included, the process of setting the bonus winning notification effect is performed in step S2108. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "Yatte bonus confirmed". In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "I did it!" In the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the bonus winning notification command is not included in step S2107, it is determined in step S2109 whether or not the special zone winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. When the special zone winning notification command is included, the process of setting the special zone winning notification effect is performed in step S2110. In the special zone winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "Put it on!". In addition, in the special zone winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Norinori!" With a thick voice of an ecstatic man).

After executing any of the processes of step S2102, step S2104, step S2106, step S2108 and step S2110, or when a negative determination is made in step S2109, another bet time effect is set in step S2111. From, this effect setting process is terminated. In the process of step S2111, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 of the corresponding number of bets are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Or, for example, a process for returning from the demo mode that shifts to one condition that the game has not been performed for a predetermined time, or turning on the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing, etc.

<Starting effect setting process>
Next, the effect setting process at the start will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54.

In step S2201, the display mode setting process is performed. In such processing, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main control device 101 side is a normal mode, a challenge mode, an attack mode, a VB mode, or a specialized zone, and the corresponding display mode is used. , The display effect of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to be performed. Specifically, the challenge mode flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag are set as the flags for grasping the display mode also in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side. An area is provided, the corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode, and the corresponding flag is cleared at the end. For example, the challenge mode flag is set in the setting process of the challenge mode start effect in step S2102. In step S2201, by grasping these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, the upper lamp 63, and the like are controlled so that the corresponding effects are performed.

In the following step S2202, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game started this time is a push order winning combination. If the push order combination is won, the push order notification process is performed in step S2203. Here, the push order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the push order notification command is included as the start command received this time. If the push order notification command is not included, the main push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2302.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is the first promotion replays 1 to 4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2303, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the third replay winning is established, and then the push order notification process is performed. To finish.

If it is determined in step S2302 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 have not been won, in step S2304, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is the fall replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2305, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the first replay winning is established, and then the push order notification process is terminated. do.

If it is determined in step S2304 that the fall replays 1 to 3 are not performed, it is determined in step S2306 whether or not the current lottery result is the second promotion replays 1 and 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect or the special zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S2106 or the special zone winning notification effect in step S2110, it has been notified that the VB winning or special zone winning notification has been notified to the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. Set the flag. The notified flag is cleared based on the transition to the VB mode or the special zone. Then, in step S2307, it is preferable to configure the configuration to determine the presence / absence of the notified flag. If the VB mode or the special zone has been notified of winning, in step S2308, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the push order in which the 4th and 5th replay winnings are established, and then the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled. , Ends the push order notification process. If the winning notification of the VB mode or the special zone has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S2305, the push order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2306 that it is not the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2309 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay 1. In the case of BAR replay 1, it is determined in step S2310 whether or not the special zone winning notification effect has been executed. If the winning notification of the special zone has been completed, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the 7th re-game winning is established in step S2311, and then the push order notification process is performed. finish. If the winning notification of the special zone has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S2305, the push order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2309 that it is not BAR replay 1, it is determined in step S2312 whether or not the lottery result this time is a bell. If the bell is won, in step S2313, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the push order in which the bell prize is established as the first small winning combination, and then the push order notification process is terminated. .. If a negative determination is made in step S2312, the push order notification process is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 54), if it is determined in step S2202 that the push order combination is not won, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the transition trigger combination is won. If the transition trigger has been won, the transition trigger notification process is performed in step S2205. The process for notifying the transition trigger will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2204, or after the process of step S2203 or step S2205 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2206. In step S2206, it is determined whether or not an additional command has been received as the command at the start of this time. When the addition command is received, in step S2207, a process of setting the addition effect in advance is performed so that the addition effect of the number of games corresponding to the addition command is executed at the time of stop. As the additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Kyukyukyukyuin!") Is emitted from the speaker 64.

The details of the setting process of the addition effect of step S2207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56.

In step S2401, a process of grasping the number of additional games to be notified is performed based on the additional command received this time. In the following step S2402, a process of grasping the notification timing is executed. The notification timing is a timing for executing the additional effect, and the timing is determined by a process (additional notification process) on the main control device 101 side, which will be described later. The determined timing information is set in the above-mentioned additional command and output. Therefore, on the display control device 81 side, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the addition effect should be executed by reading the addition command. As the notification timing, a game in which the additional effect should be executed and a timing corresponding to the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set.

After grasping the notification timing in step S2402, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not the grasping result of step S2402 is an additional effect in this game. If the additional notification is not performed in this game, the setting process of the additional effect is terminated as it is. When the additional effect is to be performed in the current game, in step S2404, it is determined whether or not the stop ON of any of the reels has been turned on as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game. When the stop is ON, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set in step S2405, and the additional effect is set to be generated when the stop ON operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag is performed in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the additional effect generation timing. Further, in step S2405, a process of reading the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games generated at the time of the stop ON operation from the effect data storage area 182b and temporarily storing the data in the predetermined effect data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 grasps that the additional effect is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads out the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area so that the additional effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2404, it is determined in step S2406 whether or not the stop OFF operation of the first reel or the second reel has been performed. When the stop OFF operation of these reels is performed, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set in step S2407, and the additional effect is set to be generated when the stop OFF operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag is performed in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the additional effect generation timing. Further, also in step S2407, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area.

If a negative determination is made in step S2406, the addition effect this time is set to occur when all reels are stopped (when the stop OFF operation of the third reel is performed) in step S2408. Specifically, a process of setting a flag at the time of a third reel stop OFF operation is performed in the various flag storage areas 183a. Further, also in step S2408, temporary storage processing of the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After the processing of step S2405, step S2407, or step S2408 is executed, the setting processing of the addition effect is completed.

Returning to the explanation of the effect setting process at the start, if the addition command has not been received in step S2206, or after the process of step S2207 is executed, the bonus intermediate effect setting process is executed in step S2208, and the process proceeds to step S2209. Then, in step S2210, other start-time effects are set, and then the start-time effect setting process ends. The bonus medium effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be described in detail later. In the process of step S2210, for example, an effect suggesting a lottery result is set corresponding to the start of the game, or a process of turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation is accepted is performed.

<Production setting process at each stop operation>
Next, each stop operation effect setting process performed in step S2008 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed among the stop operations of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2502, and it is determined whether or not an effect generated when the reel is stopped ON is set as the effect of this game. If it is not set, this setting process ends as it is. If it is set, in step S2503, it is determined whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the time of the set stop ON operation. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop ON operation of the target reel, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the stop ON operation effect is performed in step S2504, and then the present setting process is terminated.

For example, when the additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the stop ON operation this time, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (ON operation). An additional effect will occur at. Further, in this case, the sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

Further, for example, when the current game is a push order winning combination and the push order notification effect is set, the push order notification effect is the next operation target by stopping the corresponding reel based on each stop ON operation. It changes to the production showing the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the display is made so that the first reel shown in FIG. 42A is the operation target. .. Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the reel to be operated next (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 42B is shown. It changes to a production. Further, if the two reels are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the display indicating that the second reel shown in FIG. 42B is the stop target is displayed, and the second reel is displayed by the stop ON operation. Based on the fact that the reels are stopped, the display changes to the display (FIG. 42 (c)) in which the third reel is the stop target.

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2505, and it is determined whether or not each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed among the stop operations of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, the process proceeds to step S2506, and it is determined whether or not an effect generated when the reel stop OFF operation is set is set as the effect of this game. If it is not set, this setting process ends as it is. If it is set, in step S2507, it is determined whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the time of the set stop OFF operation. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop OFF operation of the target reel, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the stop OFF operation effect is performed in step S2508, and then the present setting process is terminated.

For example, when the additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation this time, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are used. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display unit 65. Further, in this case, the sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64. If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the present effect setting process is terminated as it is.

<Production setting process when all are stopped>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stops will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59.

First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. When the challenge mode end command is included, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the challenge mode end effect is performed in step S2602. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the character display of "challenge mode end" is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, the sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "Make more devotion!" With a thick male voice) is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2601, it is determined in step S2603 whether or not the attack mode start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the attack mode start command is included, the process of setting the attack mode start effect is performed in step S2604. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the character display of "attack mode !! Ver.1" is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the attack mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack mode start!" With a high voice of a woman).

By the way, the display of "Ver.1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, it is a display indicating that the attack mode started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when the promotion command is received), the characters "attack mode !! Ver.2" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as the promotion effect. In addition, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the third attack mode, the characters "attack mode !! Ver.3" are displayed, and when the rank is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the characters "attack mode !! Ver.4" are displayed. The display is done.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2603, it is determined in step S2605 whether or not the attack mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the attack mode end command is included, the process of setting the attack mode end effect is performed in step S2606. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the character "attack mode END" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the current attack mode (VB mode, special zone is included). ) Is displayed, and the total number of payouts in this attack mode (including VB mode, special zone, and bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the attack mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you" in the high voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2605, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the VB mode start command is included, the process of setting the VB mode start effect is performed in step S2608. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “777 VICTORY !!”. In addition, in the VB mode start effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory bonus start" by the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2607, it is determined in step S2611 whether or not the VB mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the VB mode end command is included, the process of setting the VB mode end effect is performed in step S2612. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the character "VICTORY BONUS END" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the number of continuous games in the attack mode at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. The number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed, and the total number of payouts in the attack mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of this VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "it will continue" in the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2611, it is determined in step S2613 whether or not the special zone start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the special zone start command is included, the process of setting the special zone start effect is performed in step S2614. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "Additional challenge !!" and a special mode in which the attack mode is likely to be added. The character suggesting that is is displayed. In addition, in the special zone start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "go" by the voice of a boy) is emitted.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2613, it is determined in step S2615 whether or not the special zone end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the special zone end command is included, the process of setting the special zone end effect is performed in step S2616. In the special zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Kyukyukyukyuin!") Is emitted from the speaker 64. It is advisable to make the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 different according to the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2615, it is determined in step S2617 whether or not the bonus end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the bonus end command is included, the process of setting the bonus end effect is performed in step S2618. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts acquired during this bonus, and if the bonus has moved to the attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, the attack mode (attack mode ( Display the total number of payouts (including VB mode, special zone, bonus). In addition, in the bonus end production, a character or the like suggesting these contents is performed according to the success or failure of the attack mode, the success or failure of the challenge mode, and the number of additional games.

After executing any of the processes of step S2602, step S2604, step S2606, step S2608, step S2612, step S2614, step S2616 and step S2618, or after making a negative determination in step S2617, the process goes to step S2609 and step S2619. move on. In step S2609 and step S2619, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As described above, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S2207 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, when the generation timing of the additional effect this time is set at the time of full stop in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 56), as shown in FIG. 58 (c), all the reels 32L and 32M. , 32R is stopped, and an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display unit 65. Further, in this case, the sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

After that, in step S2610 and step S2620, other stop effect is set, and then the present effect setting process is terminated. In steps S2610 and S2620, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to be lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, or the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64. , The sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet at the time of replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, based on various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the display control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notifying the transition of these display modes, various in-game production processing is performed.

<Processing for production during various games>
In the present embodiment, bonus in-game effects and continuous effects are provided as effects in various games. The bonus medium effect is an effect performed in each game in the bonus state that shifts based on the first BB and the second BB prizes. The continuous production is a production that expects a favorable result for the player (winning a bonus, an attack mode, a challenge mode, a VB mode, etc.), and is a game of multiple times (4 times in this embodiment). It is a production that can be continued over a period of time, and is a production in which notification of whether or not the advantageous result was achieved in the final game is performed.

<Bonus production setting process>
First, the effect setting process during the bonus will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bonus middle effect setting process is a process performed in step S2208 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 54).

In the bonus middle effect setting process, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from this game. The bonus game corresponds to a game from the next game in which the first BB or the second BB wins to the end of the bonus. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S2701 is the case where the first BB or the second BB prize is established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2702, a process for grasping the current bonus type is performed. More specifically, we will grasp whether this bonus game is based on the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize. Then, in step S2703, the bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type grasped in step S2702 is set. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or after the process of step S2703 is executed, the bonus during effect setting process is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the content of the bonus effect is different to the extent that the player can be identified between the case of the bonus game based on the first BB prize and the case of the bonus game based on the second BB prize. More specifically, in the bonus game based on the 1st BB prize, a bonus effect is set in which a live-action video effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and in the bonus game based on the 2nd BB prize, an animation is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. A bonus effect is set in which the effect is performed by. Further, the sound effect (song) output from the speaker 64 is also different between the first BB and the second BB.

Each bonus effect is an effect that is independently performed regardless of the progress of the game, and is set to be repeatedly performed as long as the bonus game continues. For example, a 5-minute video effect or animation effect is set as a unit effect, and when the unit effect ends 5 minutes after the start of the bonus effect, the unit effect is set to start again from the beginning. The effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be stopped at the screen at the end of the unit effect, and only the sound effect (song) may be repeated. Further, the effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be performed in synchronization with the progress of each game, and only the sound effect (song) may be independently performed regardless of the progress of each game.

As described above, the bonus effect based on the 1st BB prize and the bonus effect based on the 2nd BB prize can be distinguished, while the game result that triggered the 1st BB prize and the 2nd BB prize is identified from the bonus effect. It is set to be impossible or difficult to identify. That is, regarding the bonus effect based on the 1st BB prize, for example, the bonus effect is discriminated between the case where the 1st BB prize is won with the special lip A duplication 1 winning and the case where the 1st BB prize is won with the special lip AB duplication 1 winning. It is impossible or difficult to identify, and more specifically, the same bonus effect is executed. The same applies to the bonus effect based on the second BB prize. For example, the bonus effect triggered by the special Lip A duplication 2 winning and the bonus effect triggered by the special Lip AB duplication 2 winning are indistinguishable or discriminating. It is difficult and the same bonus effect is performed.

<Processing for continuous production>
The outline of the continuous production will be described with reference to FIG. 68.

For example, as shown in FIG. 68A, a display suggesting the number of times the continuous effect is continued is displayed at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set (in the figure, four stages corresponding to the continuous effect of four games). Shows a daruma-dropping effect). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the first stage of the Daruma doll has been successfully dropped. It shows that the continuous production will continue). When the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify that the continuous effect ends in the middle (for example, an effect in which the first stage Daruma drop fails, etc.). ). The effect regarding the presence or absence of continuation of the continuous effect is the same in each game in the continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 68 (b), at the start of the second game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining three stages of the Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the second stage daruma doll has been successfully dropped, and the continuous effect is continued. Is shown).

As shown in FIG. 68 (c), at the start of the third game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining two-stage Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the third stage Daruma doll has been successfully removed, and the continuous effect is continued. Is shown).

As shown in FIG. 68 (d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous production, a display suggesting that it is the final game of the continuous production is performed (in the figure, the one-stage Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the final game, it is produced whether or not the result is advantageous for the player (the figure shows the effect that the final stage of the Daruma doll has been successfully removed).

As described above, in the continuous production, the production of the next game is set by taking over the production of the previous game, and the production of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of the continuous production (how many games are there until the end of the continuous production).

Here, in each game of continuous production, whether or not the continuous production is continued until the next game is set so that the continuation rate becomes higher as the game of continuous production progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of continuous production, it is most likely that the discontinuation of continuous production will be notified, and as the game progresses, the possibility of being notified of discontinuation will be low. Therefore, in the continuous production, the level of interest of the player differs greatly depending on the number of games in the continuous production of the current game, and the higher the interest is drawn as the game progresses from the start game to the end game. ..

Hereinafter, as the processing related to the continuous effect, the transition trigger notification process (step S2205) and the continuous effect setting process (step S2209) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 54) will be described.

<Process for notification of transition trigger>
In the transition trigger notification process, first, in step S2801, a chance effect lottery process for determining whether or not to set the chance effect as the effect of the current game is executed. In the chance production, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), for example, the character "Chance !!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the character with the exclamation mark is displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. To display each corresponding to. In addition, in the chance production, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "cui" by an electronic sound) is emitted from the speaker 64. In the chance production lottery process, for example, a lottery is performed so that the chance production occurs at about half of the time when the transition trigger is won. It should be noted that the winning probability of the chance production lottery process may be different depending on the type of transition trigger, display mode, game state, set value, and the like. In the following step S2802, it is determined whether or not the lottery process of step S2801 has been won. If the player has won, the chance effect is set to be performed as the effect of this game in step S2803.

Here, in the slot machine 10, a game mode recommended for establishing a prize for each small winning combination including a transition trigger combination will be described.

Among the winning roles in each game, strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, and weak watermelons are set as small roles that cannot be won by the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. .. More specifically, as already explained, the strong cherry is a role in which either the 28th small role or the 32nd small role to the 35th small role can win a prize, and the 28th small role symbol for the left reel 32L, The 32nd small role symbol to the 35th small role symbol are a "cherry" symbol and a "second replay" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 7th "red bell" symbol to the 20th "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the above-mentioned first operation is performed. Neither the 28 small winning combination symbol, the 32nd small winning combination symbol to the 35th small winning combination symbol, the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong cherry role will be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a role in which any of the 27th small role and the 32nd small role to the 35th small role can win a prize, but the 27th small role symbol and the 32nd small role symbol for the left reel 32L are the 32nd small role symbols. The 35 small role symbols are the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol. Even in this case, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 7th "red bell" symbol to the 20th "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L in the 3-bet game. Neither the 27th small winning combination symbol, the 32nd small winning combination symbol to the 35th small winning combination symbol, the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak cherry role is missed.

The strong watermelon is a winning combination of either the 30th small winning combination or the 41st small winning combination, whereas the 30th small winning combination symbol and the 41st small winning combination symbol for the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. In this case, in the 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 9th "red 7" symbol to the 3rd "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the 30th The small winning combination symbol and the 41st small winning combination symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong watermelon role will be missed.

The weak watermelon is a winning combination of either the 29th small winning combination or the 41st small winning combination, whereas the 29th small winning combination symbol and the 41st small winning combination symbol for the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. In this case as well, in the 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 9th "red 7" symbol to the 3rd "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L. The 29th small winning combination symbol and the 41st small winning combination symbol "watermelon" symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak watermelon role is missed.

Then, when the left reel 32L is stopped and operated while leaving the possibility of winning any of the roles that may be missed, the 4th "cherry" symbol to the 6th "second replay" symbol is the left reel 32L. It is necessary to stop the operation when the upper row is reached. In the following description, the operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a dropout, and each operation mode in which the above-mentioned dropout occurs is a non-specific operation. Also referred to as a mode (second operation mode).

In the chance production set in step S2803, although it is suggested that the winning combination this time is one of the transition triggers, it is set so that it cannot be determined or it is difficult to determine which transition trigger. Has been done. That is, when a chance production is performed, the winning role of this game is likely to be either a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc., but it is either a strong cherry or a weak cherry. It is not possible to discriminate whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Therefore, the player will operate the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode so as not to cause a dropout even if any of the transition triggers is won.

Further, the chance effect does not always occur in the game in which the transition trigger is won, but occurs on condition that the game is won in the chance effect lottery process (step S2801). Then, it is recommended to operate the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode every game from the normal time so as not to cause the transition trigger to be missed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2802, or after the processing of step S2803 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2804. In step S2804, it is determined whether or not the precursor command is included as the start command of this time. If the precursor command is not included, it is determined in step S2805 whether or not the additional command is included as the start command of this time. If the addition command is not included, it is determined in step S2806 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, that is, if the lottery result is a transition trigger for strong cherries, weak watermelons, etc., the transition to challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or the number of continuous games is added. If the lottery has not been won and the bonus has not been won, the lottery process in the pseudo precursor mode is executed in step S2807. Although it is difficult to distinguish the pseudo-precursor mode from the precursor mode in appearance, in the precursor mode, the player is notified of a favorable result (such as winning the challenge mode) based on the end of the number of precursor games. The pseudo-precursor mode is a mode in which the game ends without notifying the player a favorable result based on the end of the pseudo-precursor game number.

In step S2807, the table for the pseudo precursor mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 183b, and the lottery for whether or not to execute the pseudo precursor mode is performed. conduct. In the table for the pseudo precursor mode lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo precursor mode lottery is set to be different depending on the type of transition trigger that has been won. For example, the strong cherry is set to be different from the weak cherry. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the pseudo precursor mode is high.

In step S2808, it is determined whether or not the lottery in the pseudo precursor mode has been won based on the processing result of step S2807. If the game is won, the lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode is performed in step S2809. This process corresponds to step S810 or the like on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo precursor games of 1 out of 1 to 20 is randomly determined by lottery. However, as described above, unlike the precursor mode based on various winnings, the number of pseudo precursor games is determined to be 20 games or less. In addition, 0 games are not selected in the lottery for the number of pseudo precursor games. In the following step S2810, a process is performed in which the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2809 is set in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is notified, and is decremented by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration in which continuous production of four games is performed, continuous production is started in a game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and result notification is performed in a game in which the continuous production counter is 0. In the present embodiment, when the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is set, the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode ends after the continuous effect is performed. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games to the continuous effect counter in step S2810, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous effect (remaining 4 games), continuous effect is started. It will be.

In step S2811, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating that the pseudo precursor mode is set is executed in the various flag storage areas 183a. In the following step S2812, the continuous effect flag is set. After that, the process for notifying the transition trigger is terminated. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2804 to S2806, or if a negative determination is made in step S2808, the transition trigger notification process is terminated as it is.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S2209 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62.

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not the precursor command is included as the start command received this time. When the precursor command is included, in step S2902, the process of inputting the precursor game number of the precursor mode included in the precursor command to the continuous effect counter is performed. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous production (remaining 4 games), continuous production is started. When the number of precursor games of 1 to 3 games is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2902, the continuous effect is started from the middle. For example, when 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2902, the continuous effect starts from this game and is performed from the effect of the third continuous effect game of FIG. 68 (c). Further, when 0 is input to the continuous effect counter, that is, when the winning notification such as the attack mode is performed without going through the precursor mode, the continuous effect is not executed. After performing the process of step S2902, the continuous effect flag is set in step S2903.

If a negative determination is made in step S2901, or after the process of step S2903 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2905. Then, in step S2906, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the number of continuous effect counters corresponds to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S2907 whether or not the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2908, and the effect table for this precursor is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2909, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for this precursor and the effect counter for the continuous effect, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the effect data of this time is continuously produced. Performs the process of setting as. As the production data of the continuous production specified from the production table for this precursor, if the continuous production counter is 1 to 3, the continuous production counter is the production data indicating that the continuous production is continued until the next game. If it is 0, it is the production data indicating that the continuous production of this time ends with success.

If it is determined in step S2907 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2910. In step S2910, a pseudo precursor effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2911, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the pseudo precursor effect table and the continuous effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the continuous effect of this time is obtained. Performs the process of setting as. As the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the pseudo precursor effect table, if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game or the effect data indicating that the continuous effect does not continue is used. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the continuous effect of this time ends with a failure.

It should be noted that the effect data specified from the pseudo precursor effect table when the continuous effect counters are 1 to 3 include data for which continuous effect is not set. For example, when the continuous effect counters are 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous effect continues until the next game of FIG. 68 (a). When the effect data of the first effect game is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data of the second continuous effect game indicating that the continuous effect is not continued until the next game is set in FIG. 68 (b). By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the middle of the game in which the number of pseudo precursor games in the pseudo precursor mode is 0.

After performing the process of step S2909 or step S2911, it is determined in step S2912 whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0. When the continuous effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2913. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S2904, step S2906 or step S2912, or after the processing of step S2913 is performed, the continuous effect setting processing is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the lottery process on the main control device 101 side is performed based on the insertion of the medal as the game medium and the start operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are When the rotation is started, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, it corresponds. In the configuration in which the privilege is given, a plurality of RT states having different probabilities of replay as a result of the lottery process are provided, and the RT state shifts when the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay wins. Whether or not the corresponding replay is won is determined by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the winning / failing lottery, and the notification of the operation order is performed according to the result of the lottery process. It is done by winning the lottery. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to establish the push order bell winning and win a medal. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as the gaming state in which the replay probability is improved, and by shifting to the display mode in which the notification of the operation order is performed, the push is performed in the RT state with the replay probability improved. It is possible to win a prize in the order bell, and it is possible to win a large number of medals.

As described above, when the mode shifts to, for example, the attack mode as a mode in which a large number of medals can be expected to be obtained, the initial number of games (50) is set, and the game in the attack mode becomes possible over the initial number of games. If the additional lottery is won in the attack mode or the like, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added, and the number of games that can be played in the attack mode increases. As a result, the number of medals that can be obtained in the attack mode can be increased.

<Mode of additional notification>
In the slot machine 10, a plurality of modes of additional notification are set when the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added. More specifically, as an aspect of the addition notification, the game in which the addition notification is performed has a plurality of different modes, and the addition notification is performed in a series of games triggered by the game in which the addition occurs or the game in which the addition occurs. In the case of performing (also referred to as "immediate addition notification" in the following explanation), and in the case of performing additional notification in which the notification game is determined after the fact that the game is after the game in which the addition occurred (in the following explanation, "" Also referred to as "post-addition notification") is set.

In the immediate addition notification, the series of games triggered by the game in which the addition occurs indicates, for example, the case where the above-mentioned precursor mode occurs or the continuous production occurs in the wake of the game in which the addition occurs. A game that can be continued over a plurality of games from the game in which the addition occurs is referred to as a series of games. The series of games includes a case where continuous effects do not occur, and for example, a mode in which a corresponding effect does not occur in a game in which an addition occurs and an addition notification occurs after the next game or a plurality of games is also applicable. The game in which the addition is generated and the game until the addition notification is generated are regarded as a series of games, and the mode of the addition notification is also included in the immediate addition notification.

On the other hand, in the post-addition notification, the notification game that is later than the game in which the addition occurs and is determined after the fact is not defined in the game in which the addition occurs, for example, just before the end of the attack mode. It differs from the series of games in the above-mentioned immediate ride notification in that the notification timing is determined after the fact as the attack mode progresses, such as in a game. In other words, it can be said that the above-mentioned notification game is a game that is set without the opportunity of the game in which the addition occurs.

Further, as an effect mode of the addition notification, as described with reference to FIG. 58, in addition to the mode in which the addition effect is generated by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, the addition effect is accompanied by the rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The mode in which the effect is generated is also set.

Hereinafter, each mode of additional notification will be described including a process for performing additional notification.

<Process for additional notification>
The addition notification processing is performed in the main control device 101 in step S919 of the second specific combination processing (FIG. 33), step S1006 of the third specific combination processing (FIG. 34), step S1104 of the special zone processing, and the like. This is the process to be performed. That is, it is a process executed as a process of the main control device 101 after winning the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode and adding the number of games. In the additional notification process, the game for performing the additional notification is set, and when the additional notification is performed in the game, the execution timing of the additional notification is set.

The outline of the display contents of the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 70 for the immediate ride notification and the post-load notification.

The immediate ride notification is to notify the number of games of a part of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG first as the number of games remaining in the advantageous section, and the post-load notification is to notify the remaining number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG. The production of notifying the number of games of is performed later. Assuming that the number of games on the side to be notified first is the remaining number counter HG for display and the number of games on the side to be notified later is the counter BG, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG is added to the remaining number counter HG for display. It becomes equal to the total value with the counter BG. The display remaining counter HG is decremented by 1 each time the game is digested, and the post-addition counter BG is not decremented unless the post-addition notification is generated even after the game is digested.

As shown in FIG. 70, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining games on the display (remaining game number display ZGP) displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is a predetermined number (this modification) while the attack mode is being digested. In the example, when 1) is reached, that is, when the remaining number counter HG for display managed by the main control device 101 reaches a predetermined number (1), the post-addition notification is generated. In the post-addition notification, for example, as in the case of the post-addition notification effect, it is notified that the number of games corresponding to the post-addition counter BG (150) (150 in the figure) has been added. As a result, the post-addition counter BG managed by the main control device 101 is subtracted by the notification amount (0 in the figure), and the display remaining counter HG managed by the main control device 101 is notified by the post-addition notification. Minutes are added and updated, and the remaining game number display ZGP on the auxiliary display unit 65 also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 after one game is digested in the figure).

As described above, when the post-addition notification is selected at the time of the extra-addition winning, a difference may occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG. On the other hand, when the immediate ride notification is selected, there is no difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual advantageous section remaining game number ZG. In the present embodiment, the post-addition counter BG is referred to at the time of the extra-addition winning, and whether the post-addition notification is selected or the immediate addition notification is selected differs depending on the value of the current post-addition counter BG.

That is, in the addition notification process, as shown in FIG. 69, first, in step S3001, a process of grasping the addition counter BG of various counter areas 106e is performed. In the following step S3002, the notification game lottery process is executed. The notification game lottery process is a lottery process for determining whether the additional notification this time is a post-addition notification or an immediate addition notification. In the notification game lottery process, a post-addition lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and a lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform post-addition notification according to the value of the post-addition counter BG grasped in step S3001.

As shown in FIG. 71, the post-addition lottery table is set so that the probability that the post-addition notification is selected differs depending on the value of the post-addition counter BG and the type of the specific combination that triggered the addition winning. There is. For example, in the case of addition triggered by a strong cherry, if the addition counter BG is less than 30, the addition notification is selected at 20% (immediate addition notification is selected at 80%), while the rear When the add-on counter BG is 30 or more and less than 100, the add-on notification is selected at 10%, and when the add-on counter BG is 100 or more and less than 100, the add-on notification is selected at 5%. The more it is set, the lower the selection rate of the post-addition notification.

In addition, there are various types of specific roles that triggered the additional winning, rather than the so-called rare roles (low probability trigger result, low probability result) such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon, which have a relatively low winning probability. So-called normal roles (high-probability trigger results, high-probability results) with a relatively high winning probability, such as push-order replays and various push-order bells, have a higher post-addition selection rate when the value of the post-addition counter BG is small. It is set. More specifically, in the notification game lottery process triggered by various push order replays and various push order bells, the post-addition notification is selected with a 100% probability in the situation where the post-addition counter BG is less than 30.

As described above, in the post-addition counter BG, the addition notification is performed after the remaining number counter HG for display reaches a predetermined number, and the addition notification amount is subtracted. Therefore, basically, as the game in the advantageous section, that is, the game in the attack mode progresses, the value of the post-addition counter BG often increases, and conversely, at the beginning of the advantageous section, that is, in the game in the attack mode. In the early stages, the value of the post-addition counter BG is likely to be 0 or a small value.

In other words, if the additional winning is won at the beginning of the game in the attack mode, there is a high probability that the post-addition notification will be selected, and in particular, if the additional winning is triggered by a normal role that is not a rare role such as a push order replay or a push order bell. In the early stage of the attack mode, the post-addition notification is always selected. As a result, after the start of the attack mode, the post-addition counter BG tends to accumulate relatively early.

After the notification game lottery process is executed in step S3002, it is determined in step S3003 whether or not the game has been won later. If the post-addition winning is not selected and the immediate addition notification is selected, in step S3004, a process of adding the current addition winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Then, in step S3005, the notification timing setting process for setting at which timing the additional notification is executed in this game is executed. The notification timing setting process is a process for setting at what timing in this game the additional notification is to be performed.

The additional notification is set so that the execution timing differs depending on the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the execution timing table of FIG. 72, as the execution timing of the additional notification in this game, the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel are in the order of the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, the stop operation of the first reel, the stop operation of the second reel, and the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, the timing at which the stop OFF operation is performed when the pressing operation is completed, and the timing at which the stop OFF operation is performed. Is set.

Here, the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be supplementarily described. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from the initial position arranged on the frontmost side to the operating position arranged on the innermost side. In the situation where it is arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in the LOW state, and by operating from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are generated. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the stop ON operation is performed, which is assumed to be the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, based on the fact that the detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Further, the stop switches 42 to 44 are urged toward the initial position by a spring or the like. Therefore, if the operation force (pushing pressure) pushed toward the operation position is not applied by releasing the hand from the stop switches 42 to 44, the stop switches 42 to 44 will be in the initial position due to the urging force of the spring or the like. Return to. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the stop OFF operation is performed assuming that the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed based on the fact that the detection signal is switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal.

The additional notification is set so that the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 can occur at either the stop ON operation or the stop OFF operation. That is, in a game in which the addition notification is generated, the addition effect can be generated not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed but also at the timing when the pressing operation is completed.

In the execution timing table of the addition notification, as the number of games with a relatively small number of addition games, for example, when an addition of 5 to 10 games occurs, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. , The timing when the stop OFF operation of the first reel is performed is 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 15%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 20%, and the stop ON operation of the third reel is 20%. The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 30%, and each is selected. In this case, it is easier to select the operation at the time of stop / OFF operation than the operation at the time of stop ON operation of each reel, and it is easier to select the operation on the rear side.

On the other hand, as the number of games with a relatively large number of additional games, for example, when 100 or more games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel is performed. Was performed at 10%, the 2nd reel stop ON operation was 5%, the 2nd reel stop OFF operation was 30%, the 3rd reel stop ON operation was 5%, and the 3rd reel stop OFF operation ( (When all reels are stopped) is 45%, which is selected for each. Also in this case, the stop-off operation of each reel is easier to select than the stop-on operation, and the rear operation is relatively easier to select.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the additional notification is more likely to occur at the time of the stop OFF operation than at the time of the stop ON operation of each reel. Further, when comparing the first to third reels, the stop operation of the third reel (ON operation, OFF operation) is most likely to be selected, the stop operation of the second reel is most likely to be selected next, and the stop of the first reel is stopped. It is set so that it is most difficult to select when operating.

From the relationship with the number of additional games, the larger the number of additional games, the easier it is to select the timing at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation. That is, when it is known in advance that the additional notification will occur, if the additional notification does not occur by the time when the third reel is stopped ON, the player will be greatly affected by the large number of additional games. It is considered that the third reel stop OFF operation is executed while expecting.

In step S3005, the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game is set based on the execution timing table of the additional notification. After that, the additional notification process is terminated. In this case, the information that the addition is notified in the current game as the immediate addition notification and the information regarding the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game are executed following the main addition notification process. It is set to the add command in the set process of the add command (step S920, step S1007, step S1105, etc.). The display control device 81 that has received the additional command including these information sets the additional notification effect based on the information (FIG. 56).

If it is determined in step S3003 that the additional lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S3006. In step S3006, a process of adding the number of additional games this time to the post-addition counter BG provided in various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S3007, the process of setting the post-addition flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is performed, and then the post-addition notification process is terminated.

The CPU 102 of the main control device 101 indicates that the post-addition flag is a situation in which the post-addition notification should be performed when the value of the post-addition counter BG is larger than 0 and the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value. It is a flag to grasp. Further, in this case, in the set processing of the addition command executed after the main addition notification processing, the information that the addition notification does not occur in this game is set in the addition command. The display control device 81 that has received the additional command including this information is controlled so that the additional notification does not occur in this game (FIG. 56, step S2403: NO).

<Processing for post-addition notification>
Next, the post-addition notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73. The post-addition notification process is a process performed in step S1402 of the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 44) in the main control device 101.

First, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is any of the attack mode, the VB mode, and the special zone. As already described, which display mode is used can be determined by grasping the corresponding flag. If it is not in these modes, that is, if it is in the normal mode or the challenge mode, the post-addition notification process is terminated as it is. In the case of any mode of the attack mode, the VB mode, and the special zone, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the bonus state is in effect. If it is either the BB state based on the first BB or the second BB or the CB state based on the CB, the post-addition notification process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103, and subtraction processing of the display remaining counter HG is performed. In this case, in step S3103, a command including the subtracted value of the display remaining counter HG is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received such a command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 so as to update the display of the remaining game number display ZGP. The display control device 81 may be provided with a counter or the like corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG, and the display control device 81 may be configured to perform processing for updating the remaining game number display ZGP.

In step S3104, as a result of the processing in step S3103, it is determined whether or not the display remaining number counter HG has reached a predetermined value (1) that triggers the post-addition notification. If it does not reach the predetermined value, the post-addition notification process is terminated as it is. When the predetermined value is reached, it is determined in step S3105 whether or not the post-addition flag is set. If the post-addition flag is not set, the post-addition notification process ends as it is.

If it is determined in step S3105 that the post-addition flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3106. In step S3106, the value of the post-addition counter BG is grasped. Then, in step S3107, a process of setting an additional command is performed so that the additional notification is performed according to the value of the additional counter BG. In this case, the addition command includes information that the addition notification is performed in the game, and information that the number of games is added according to the value of the post-addition counter BG. In addition, it may be configured to add a part of the post-addition counter BG. For example, after deciding whether or not to add a part by lottery, if it is to be a part, a part of the number of games is added. It is advisable to add the information that is to be performed to the command.

In the following step S3108, a process of subtracting the value corresponding to the number of additional games set in the additional command in the above step S3107 from the post-addition counter BG is performed. Then, in step S3109, it is determined whether or not the post-addition counter BG becomes 0 as the processing result of step S3108. If it is not 0, the post-addition notification process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the post-addition flag is cleared in step S3110, and then the post-addition notification process is terminated.

As described above, the addition command is transmitted to the display control device 81 in the post-addition notification process in the winning result handling process, so that the display control device 81 has the step in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 59). In the addition notification processing at the time of all stops in S2609 and step S2619, the processing for performing the addition notification effect is executed. As a result, in the game in which the remaining number counter HG for display reaches a predetermined value, the additional notification is executed as the additional notification after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. Therefore, in a game in which the remaining number counter HG for display reaches a predetermined value (1), the addition notification (post-addition notification) is expected to be performed regardless of the winning result of the game, and the third reel The stop OFF operation will be performed.

Incidentally, the timing of the third reel stop OFF operation selected in the case of performing the immediate ride notification and the time of all the stop in the case of performing the post-load notification may be different. That is, the time of the third reel stop OFF operation is the timing at which the stop OFF operation of the third reel is performed, and the corresponding reel may stop at the timing, or the timing is slightly delayed with the slip control. The corresponding reel may stop at. Therefore, the time when the third reel stop OFF operation can be performed is slightly earlier than the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. On the other hand, the execution timing of the post-addition notification set in the post-addition notification processing in the winning result correspondence processing is the timing after the winning result correspondence processing is executed, and all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are complete. This is the timing after the medal has been paid out (after the payout determination process in step S413 has been executed) if a small winning combination has occurred. Therefore, the timing at which the post-loading notification is executed can be later than that at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation in the immediate-loading notification.

<Rotation effect processing>
Next, as a kind of effect mode when the additional notification is performed, a process for performing the additional notification accompanied by the rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the rotation effect processing. The rotation effect process is a process performed in step S401 of the reel control process (FIG. 18) in the main control device 101. In the rotation effect processing, processing for executing the corresponding rotation effect is performed based on the flags for the rotation effect set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As the flag for the rotation effect, in the present embodiment, a pseudo freeze flag, a first freeze flag, a second freeze flag, and a third freeze flag are provided. Therefore, first, an outline of the rotation effect (various freeze effects) corresponding to each of these freeze flags will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76.

Here, the freeze effect is the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (stop operation means) by starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R (circling body) based on the operation of the start lever 41 (start operation means). The normal game operation is to stop the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R based on the above, and it is an effect of limiting the start or progress of the normal game operation. More specifically, the freeze effect is based on the operation of the start lever 41, the rotation start control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R based on the operation of the start lever 41, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. This is an effect in which at least one of the rotation stop controls of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not executed (restricted).

In the present embodiment, the freeze effect corresponding to each of the freeze flags is set as a rotation effect performed at the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In the present embodiment, the freeze effect is set to occur triggered by a part of the games that have won the ninth replay (special lip A). When the freeze effect occurs, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, the 9th re-game prize is established as a game result, the re-game as a privilege based on the 9th re-game prize is given, and the automatic bet processing is performed. When the start operation of the start lever 41 is performed after the end, that is, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped (ta1, tb1), first, the normal rotation direction (forward direction, downward direction, It rotates by a predetermined angle in the direction opposite to the circumferential direction (ta1 to ta2, tb1 to tb2). In the present embodiment, a predetermined angle is shifted by one frame, more specifically, for example, an angle (360 degrees ÷ 21 symbols ≈17 degrees) so that the symbols arranged in the lower row are arranged in the middle row. ) Is set as an angle smaller than (about 15 degrees). Then, after rotating in the reverse direction by a predetermined angle, the state of being temporarily stopped at that position is maintained for a predetermined period (about 1 sec) (ta2 to ta3, tb2 to tb3). As described above, since the predetermined angle is made smaller than the angle at which one symbol is shifted by one frame, each symbol is arranged at a position deviated from the effective line in the above-mentioned paused situation. By doing so, even if the player misses the reverse rotation, it becomes easy to recognize the displaced state.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of angles may be provided as predetermined angles so that the angles that can be easily selected differ depending on the effect. Further, a plurality of types of periods in which the state is maintained at a predetermined angle may be provided so that the periods that can be easily selected differ depending on the effect. Further, these angles and periods may be combined and applied to the production, or may be configured to pause at a plurality of types of angles in stages.

Of the freeze effects, when the pseudo-freeze flag corresponding to the pseudo-freeze effect is set, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 (a), after rotating in the reverse direction by the predetermined angle and pausing, a predetermined period of time. After that, it rotates forward and shifts to normal rotation control (ta3 ~). After that, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (ta4), and the symbol corresponding to the game result of this game is stopped on the effective line (ta5). ).

On the other hand, when any of the first freeze flag, the second freeze flag, and the third freeze flag corresponding to the various 7-set freeze effects is set among the freeze effects, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 (b). In addition, after rotating in the reverse direction by the predetermined angle and pausing, when a predetermined period elapses, the rotation is further reversed (tb3 to tb4), and then the pausing is performed with the "Red 7" symbols aligned on the predetermined line. (Tb4 to tb5). After that, it rotates forward and shifts to normal rotation control (tb5 ~), and based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (tb6), the symbol corresponding to the game result of this game stops on the effective line. (Tb7).

In the various 7-match freeze production, the expected number of additional games is set to differ depending on the line in which the "Red 7" symbols are aligned and paused. That is, in the present embodiment, the "red 7" symbol is aligned with the middle line L2 and temporarily stopped, and the middle red 7 aligned freeze effect and the "red 7" symbol are aligned with the right rising line L5 and temporarily stopped. A matching freeze effect and an upper red 7 matching freeze effect in which the "Red 7" symbol is aligned with the upper line L1 and paused are set, and the expectation of the number of additional games is the highest in the upper red 7 matching freeze effect. It is set so that the freeze effect with 7 reds rising to the right is the next highest, and the freeze effect with 7 reds in the middle row is the lowest. The middle red 7-match freeze effect is executed by setting the first freeze flag, the upward-sloping red 7-match freeze effect is executed by setting the second freeze flag, and the upper red 7-match freeze effect is executed. It is executed when the third freeze flag is set.

In the rotation effect processing, first, in step S3201, a process of subtracting 1 from the freeze counter FC provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The freeze counter FC is a counter for the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 to grasp after how many games the freeze effect is generated from the game in which the freeze effect is determined. More specifically, the CPU 102 controls the freeze counter FC to generate a freeze effect when the freeze counter FC becomes 0. For example, when 1 is input to the freeze counter FC, it is determined to perform the freeze effect. After that, it is controlled so that the freeze effect occurs when the above subtraction process (step S3201) is performed once. In this case, for example, if 1 is input to the freeze counter FC in the process prior to the rotation effect process such as the lottery process in the current game, the freeze counter FC becomes 0 in the current game, and the game is set to this time. Freeze effect occurs. Further, for example, when 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in the process prior to the rotation effect process such as the lottery process in the current game, the game after one game, that is, the next game, is triggered by this game. The freeze counter FC becomes 0, and a freeze effect occurs in the next game. As described above, the freeze counter FC is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the game for executing the freeze effect in a series of games triggered by the game determined to perform the freeze effect.

After the freeze counter FC subtraction process is performed in step S3201, the freeze counter FC becomes 0 in step S3202, and it is determined whether or not the current game is a game in which the freeze effect should be generated. When the freeze counter FC becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3203, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo-freeze flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. If the pseudo-freeze flag is set, the process of clearing the pseudo-freeze flag is executed in step S3204, and the pseudo-freeze effect is set to be performed as the rotation effect of this game in step S3205. do. In this case, the main control device 101 individually controls the stepping motors connected to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to execute the pseudo freeze effect.

When it is determined in step S3203 that the pseudo freeze flag is not set, it is determined in step S3206 whether or not the first freeze flag is set. When the first freeze flag is set, the process of clearing the first freeze flag is executed in step S3207, and in step S3208, as the rotation effect of this game, the middle-stage red 7-aligned freeze effect is performed. Set to be done. In this case, the main control device 101 individually controls the stepping motors connected to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to execute the freeze effect of the middle red 7 alignment.

If it is determined in step S3206 that the first freeze flag is not set, it is determined in step S3209 whether or not the second freeze flag is set. If the second freeze flag is set, the process of clearing the second freeze flag is executed in step S3210, and in step S3211, as a rotation effect of this game, a right-up red 7-aligned freeze effect is produced. Is set to be performed. In this case, the main control device 101 individually controls the stepping motors connected to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to execute a right-up red 7-aligned freeze effect.

When it is determined in step S3209 that the second freeze flag is not set, it is determined in step S3212 whether or not the third freeze flag is set. When the third freeze flag is set, the process of clearing the third freeze flag is executed in step S3213, and in step S3214, as the rotation effect of this game, the upper red 7-aligned freeze effect is performed. Set to be done. In this case, the main control device 101 individually controls the stepping motors connected to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to execute the freeze effect of the upper red 7 alignment.

After executing the processes of step S3205, step S3208, step S3211 and step S3214, or after making a negative determination in step S3202 or step S3212, other rotation effect setting processes are executed in step S3215. In other rotation effect setting processes, various rotation effects provided in addition to the above freeze effects (for example, effects of different rotation start timings of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). Set so that the freeze effect, etc. that is performed without starting) is performed. After executing the process of step S3215, the rotation effect process is terminated.

As described above, various freeze effects are set as one aspect of the effect mode when the additional notification is performed. In the present embodiment, these various freeze effects can occur during the bonus based on the winning of the first BB and the second BB.

<4th specific role processing>
As the lottery process relating to the instruction function in the bonus, the fourth specific combination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77. The fourth specific combination process is a process performed in step S710 of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31) in the main control device 101, and is performed on the condition that it is in a bonus state, not in a carry-over state. ..

In step S3301, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time is the second role in BB. In the case of the second combination in the BB, the first pseudo-effect processing is executed in step S3302, and then the fourth specific combination processing is terminated. If it is not the second role in BB, it is determined in step S3303 whether or not it is the third role in BB. In the case of the third combination in BB, the process for instructed lottery during BB is executed in step S3304, and then the fourth specific combination process is terminated. If it is not the third role in the BB, that is, if the game result of this time is the first role in the BB, the fourth specific combination process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the bonus state, the first role in the BB, the second role in the BB, and the third role in the BB can be won respectively (FIG. 28). The first role in BB is the bell role, and the second role in BB and the third role in BB are replays. More specifically about the 2nd role in BB and the 3rd role in BB, the 2nd role in BB is the game result of winning the 9th re-game (special lip A), and the 3rd role in BB is the 9th re-game ( This is the result of the game in which the special lip A) and the tenth re-game (special lip B) are won. In the 4th specific combination process, if the game result is won in the 9th re-game, either the 1st pseudo-directing process or the BB middle instruction lottery process is executed, and the 10th re-game is won. If not, that is, if it is the second role in BB, the first pseudo-directing process is executed, and if the tenth replay is won, that is, if it is the third role in BB, the BB instruction lottery process is executed. It is a process to do. Hereinafter, the first pseudo-effect processing and the BB instruction lottery processing will be described.

<Processing for the first simulated production>
The first pseudo-effect processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78.

In step S3401, a process of grasping the value of the offset counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The out-of-order counter is a counter that can be added when the lottery related to the instruction function is not won in a state other than the bonus state, that is, in a normal gaming state, various RT states, and the like. Further, the disengagement counter is reset to the initial value (0) by an initialization process (not shown) at the end of the bonus state (BB state). That is, it can be said that the off counter is an index showing how much the lottery related to the instruction function is not won in the game between bonuses.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the lottery related to the instruction function, the lottery for transition to the VB mode or the special zone, which is executed in the first specific combination process, the second specific combination process, and the third specific combination process, and the attack. A mode addition lottery or the like is set, and a pseudo addition notification process is provided as a process when the lottery related to these instruction functions is not won (step S929 in FIG. 33, step S1016 in FIG. 34). ). In the pseudo-addition notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79, a process of grasping the trigger for not winning various lottery this time is performed in step S3501. Then, in step S3502, the addition point of the deviation counter is grasped. As shown in FIG. 80A, various table storage areas 105a are provided with a deviating counter table, and the deviating counter table is assigned points to be added to the deviating counter according to the lottery trigger. In the out-of-counter table, it is basically set so that more points are added as the game result with a lower winning probability in each game. For example, if a lottery related to various instruction functions is not won due to a strong cherry, 10 points will be added to the counter, and if a lottery related to various instruction functions is not won due to a weak cherry, 1 Points are allocated so that the points are out of order and added to the counter. In addition, the game result that is not a duplicate combination with the bonus is set so that more points are given than the duplicate combination. For example, 10 points are set for the strong cherry, while the strong cherry overlap 1 is set. One point is set. After grasping the addition point of the disengagement counter in step S3502, the disengagement counter addition process is performed in step S3503, and then the pseudo-addition notification process ends. In other words, the more points that are not won in the lottery related to various instruction functions, the more points are accumulated in the off counter, and more specifically, the chance of winning the lottery related to the instruction function is high. The more scenes that are not won in the lottery, the more points are accumulated.

Returning to the description of the first pseudo-effect processing, after executing the process of grasping the value of the off-counter for which points have been accumulated in the above-mentioned pseudo-addition notification process in step S3401, the pseudo-freeze is performed in step S3402. Execute the lottery process. In the pseudo-freeze lottery process, a pseudo-freeze lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the pseudo-freeze effect based on the deviation counter grasped in step S3401. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the pseudo-freeze lottery table is set so that the larger the value of the off-counter, the higher the winning probability of the pseudo-freeze effect.

After executing the pseudo-freeze lottery process in step S3402, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the pseudo-freeze has been won. If the pseudo freeze is won, the process of setting the pseudo freeze flag is performed in step S3404. After that, in step S3405, a process of inputting 2 to the freeze counter FC is performed, and then the first pseudo-effect processing is terminated. As a result, a pseudo-freeze effect occurs at the start of reel rotation in the next game of this game. If the pseudo freeze is not won, the first pseudo-effect processing is terminated as it is.

In this way, the game result of the game before the transition to the bonus state can contribute to the presence or absence of the freeze effect during the bonus state. By doing this, it is possible not only to enhance the effect of the effect during the bonus state, but also to be aware that the timing and situation of transitioning to the bonus state will affect some lottery during the bonus state. Become.

<Processing for instruction lottery during BB>
Next, the BB instruction lottery process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the BB instruction lottery process is performed in the game in which both the 9th re-game and the 10th re-game are won in the bonus state (the game in which the third role in the BB is won). Is.

In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the bonus this time is a bonus based on a game result in which a setting difference is provided in the winning probability. As shown in FIG. 36, strong cherry duplication 1, weak cherry duplication 1, strong watermelon duplication 1, weak watermelon duplication 1, chance A duplication 1, chance B duplication 1, middle bell duplication 1, special lip A duplication 1 and single first. The first BB when any one of the 1BBs is won, and the second BB when any one of the special lip A duplication 2 and the single second BB is won are bonuses based on the game result with no setting difference. On the other hand, the first BB when the special lip AB duplication 1 is won, the strong cherry duplication 2, the weak cherry duplication 2, the strong watermelon duplication 2, the weak watermelon duplication 2, the chance A duplication 2, the chance B duplication 2, the middle bell duplication 2 , The second BB when either the special lip A duplication 2 or the special lip AB duplication 2 is won is a bonus based on the game result in which the setting difference is provided. That is, even in the same first BB and second BB, whether or not the bonus is based on the game result with a setting difference differs depending on the winning opportunity.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, various lottery related to the instruction function is performed based on the game result with no setting difference. Therefore, various lottery related to the instruction function can be executed during the bonus based on the game result without the setting difference, while various lottery related to the instruction function can be executed during the bonus based on the game result with the setting difference. Is configured to be restricted in execution. In the following explanation, the bonus based on the game result without setting difference is also referred to as the restricted non-target bonus depending on the presence or absence of the lottery related to the instruction function, and the bonus based on the game result with the setting difference is restricted. Also called a bonus.

And, as mentioned above, even if it is the same 1st BB or 2nd BB, it may be a restricted target bonus or a restricted non-target bonus, and a combination of symbols to be won when shifting to the bonus state (winning). From the aspect), it is not possible to distinguish between the restricted bonus and the non-restricted bonus. However, the ratio of the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus is different between the 1st BB and the 2nd BB. For example, in setting 3, the total winning probability of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB including the duplicate winning is the same. Although there is (about 1 / 496), the restricted bonus of the 1st BB wins at about 1/131 (about 38% of the 1st BB), and the non-restricted bonus wins at about 1/800 (1st). The restricted bonus of the 2nd BB is won at about 1/1010 (about 49% of the 2BB), while the restricted non-target bonus is won at about 1/978 (about 62% of 1BB). About 51% of the second BB). That is, the ratio of the first BB to the restricted non-target bonus is higher than that of the second BB, and the first BB is preferable for the player from the viewpoint that the lottery related to the instruction function is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3601 and the current bonus is a non-restricted bonus, it is determined in step S3602 whether the display mode before the transition to the bonus state is the normal mode or the challenge mode. In step S3602, even if the display mode before the transition to the bonus state is the normal mode or the challenge mode, when the attack mode winning flag is set, that is, the bonus and the transition lottery to the attack mode or the like are simultaneously won. If so, a negative judgment is made.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3602, the BB middle mode transition process is executed in step S3603, and then the BB middle instruction lottery process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3602, the BB middle addition process is executed in step S3604, and then the BB middle instruction lottery process ends. If it is determined in step S3601 that the bonus this time is a restricted target bonus, the second pseudo-directing process is executed in step S3605, and then the BB instruction lottery process ends.

Hereinafter, the BB medium mode transition process, the BB medium addition process, and the second pseudo-effect process will be described.

<Process for transition to BB middle mode>
The process for shifting to the mode during BB will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 82.

First, in step S3701, a mode transition lottery process is performed. In the mode transition lottery process, the mode transition table in BB stored in the various table storage areas 105a is acquired, and the mode transition lottery is performed. As shown in FIG. 83A, the BB middle mode transition table shows the winning probability of the mode transition lottery and the transition destination at the time of winning depending on the difference between the current display mode, the first BB and the second BB, and the value of the outlier counter. The display mode of is set to be different.

More specifically, for example, in a mode transition lottery executed in a bonus state based on the first BB winning that has transitioned to the normal mode, if the value of the loss counter is 5 or less, there is a 5% probability of transition to the challenge mode. There is a 1% chance of transitioning to attack mode, and a 0.1% chance of transitioning to super attack mode. Similarly, even in the bonus state based on the 1st BB winning that has shifted to the normal mode, if the value of the off counter is 21 or more, there is a 10% chance of shifting to the challenge mode and a 5% chance of shifting to the attack mode. Then, there is a 1% chance of shifting to the super attack mode. In the bonus state based on the first BB winning that has transitioned to the challenge mode, even if the value of the loss counter is the same, the transition winning rate of each mode is higher than that in the normal mode, for example, the loss counter is 21. In the above case, there is a 20% chance of shifting to the attack mode and a 10% chance of shifting to the super attack mode.

The bonus state based on the 2nd BB winning has a higher transition winning rate in each mode even if the value of the losing counter is the same as the bonus state based on the 1st BB winning. For example, when the losing counter is 5 or less in the normal mode. There is a 10% chance of going into challenge mode, a 5% chance of going into attack mode, and a 1% chance of going into super attack mode.

Therefore, the probability of winning the mode transition lottery is higher when the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won in the situation where many points are accumulated in the off counter, and further, when the 2nd BB is won than the 1st BB. , The probability of winning the mode transition lottery is high. However, as described above, the ratio of the restricted target bonus is higher in the second BB than in the first BB, and the possibility that the mode transition lottery is performed (the process for shifting to the mode during BB is performed) is higher in the first BB.

In this embodiment, in one bonus state, the result of the mode transition lottery is reflected at the time of starting the next BB instruction lottery process (at the time of winning the third combination in BB). For example, when the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode is won in the mode transition lottery in the bonus state shifted to the normal mode, the mode transition lottery from the challenge mode is carried out in the next BB medium mode transition process. In addition, if the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won in the mode transition lottery in the bonus state transitioned to the normal mode, in the next process for the instruction lottery during BB, a negative determination is made in step S3602 and the addition is made during BB. The process is carried out.

After executing the mode transition lottery process in step S3701, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the transition lottery to any mode has been won. If the lottery for transition to any mode is not won, the process proceeds to step S3703, the pseudo freeze flag is set, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in step S3704, and then the mode is transitioned to the middle mode of BB. End the process. In this case, a pseudo freeze effect occurs at the start of rotation of the next game of the game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, the process proceeds to step S3705, and it is determined whether or not the lottery for transition to the challenge mode has been won. If the lottery for transition to the challenge mode has been won, the process of setting the first freeze flag is executed in step S3706.

In the following step S3707, a process of setting the challenge mode winning flag is executed, and in step S3708, a process of setting the number of games in the precursor mode to 0 is executed. In this case, the challenge mode winning notification effect is generated at the end of the bonus state, and the challenge mode is started from the next game in the bonus state. Then, after inputting 2 to the freeze counter FC in step S3704, the BB middle mode transition process ends. In this case, at the start of rotation of the next game of the game, a freeze effect of 7 middle reds is generated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3705, the process proceeds to step S3709, and it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has been won. If the lottery for transition to the attack mode has been won, the process of setting the second freeze flag is executed in step S3710.

In the following step S3711, a process of setting an attack notification flag is executed. In this case, it becomes possible to establish the first promotion replay winning after the end of the bonus state, and the transition to the attack mode occurs at an early stage. If the challenge mode flag or the challenge mode winning flag is set in step S3711, these flags are cleared. After that, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in step S3704, and then the BB middle mode transition process ends. In this case, at the start of rotation of the next game of the game, a right-up red 7-aligned freeze effect occurs.

When a negative determination is made in step S3709, it means that the lottery for transition to the super attack mode has been won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3712, the third freeze flag is set, the attack notification flag is set in step S3713, the special zone notification flag is set in step S3714, and the freeze is set in step S3704. After inputting 2 to the counter FC, the BB middle mode transition process ends. In this case, at the start of rotation of the next game of the game, the upper red 7-match freeze effect occurs, and it becomes possible to establish the first and second promotion replay prizes and the BAR replay prizes after the end of the bonus state. , The transition to super attack mode occurs early.

<Processing for adding in BB>
The BB addition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84.

In step S3801, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is executed. In the game number addition lottery process, the BB middle addition lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 105a is acquired, and the game number addition lottery is performed. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the additional lottery table in BB is set so that the additional winning probability and the number of additional games at the time of winning differ depending on the difference between the first BB and the second BB and the value of the loss counter. ..

More specifically, for example, in the bonus state based on the 1st BB winning, if the value of the out-of-counter is 5 or less, there is a 20% chance of winning an additional 30 games and a 15% chance of winning an additional 50 games. Then, there is a 5% chance that you will win an additional 100G. Similarly, even in the bonus state based on the 1st BB winning, if the value of the off counter is 21 or more, there is a 40% chance of winning the extra 30 games, and a 30% chance of winning the extra 50 games. There is a 20% chance that you will win an additional 100 games. In other words, when the player shifts to the bonus state when a lot of points are accumulated in the off counter, the additional winning probability is higher and the number of additional games at the time of winning is also larger.

Further, when the first BB and the second BB are compared, the second BB is set so that the additional winning probability is higher and the number of additional games at the time of winning is also larger. For example, in the bonus state based on the 2nd BB winning, if the value of the off counter is 21 or more, there is a 10% probability of winning an additional 30 games, a 40% probability of winning an additional 50 games, and 50%. There is a probability of winning an additional 100 games.

After executing the game number addition lottery process in step S3801, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the addition is won. If the addition is not won, the pseudo freeze flag is set in step S3803, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in step S3804, and then the BB middle addition process ends. In this case, a pseudo freeze effect occurs at the start of rotation of the next game of the game.

If it is determined in step S3802 that the additional prize has been won, the process proceeds to step S3805. In step S3805, it is determined whether or not the number of additional games is 30 games. In the case of 30 games, the process of setting the first freeze flag is executed in step S3806. If a negative determination is made in step S3805, it is determined in step S3807 whether or not the number of additional games is 50 games. In the case of 50 games, the process of setting the second freeze flag is executed in step S3808. The case of making a negative determination in step S3807 means that the number of additional games is 100, and in this case, the process of setting the third freeze flag is executed in step S3809.

After executing any of the processes of step S3806, step S3808, and step S3809, the process proceeds to step S3810. In step S3810, the process of adding the number of games in the attack mode is executed. More specifically, the process of adding the number of additional games this time to the continuation number G3 of the attack mode is executed. In the following step S3811, a process of adding the number of games added this time to the remaining number counter HG for display is executed. Then, the addition command is set in step S3812, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in step S3804, and then the BB middle addition process is terminated.

In this case, when the first freeze flag is set in step S3806, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), a middle-stage red 7-aligned freeze effect is generated as an effect at the start of rotation of the next game of this game. After that, an additional notification effect of 30 games is generated as an effect when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. Further, when the second freeze flag is set in step S3808, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), a right-up red 7-aligned freeze effect is generated as an effect at the start of rotation of the next game of this game. After that, an additional notification effect of 50 games is generated as an effect when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. Then, when the third freeze flag is set in step S3809, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), an upper red 7-aligned freeze effect is generated as an effect at the start of rotation of the next game of this game. After that, an additional notification effect of 100 games is generated as an effect when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. In addition, when each red 7-match freeze effect occurs, a display effect corresponding to the red 7-match freeze effect (for example, an effect of displaying a military character raising a sword) is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Occur.

<Process for second pseudo production>
The second pseudo-effect processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the second pseudo-directing process is a process performed in the game in which the third role in the BB is won in the restricted target bonus.

In the second pseudo-effect processing, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the bonus has shifted to the normal mode or the challenge mode. Since the display mode transition lottery is not performed during the restricted bonus, the result of the determination process differs even in the same bonus state because the attack mode winning flag is set after the fact as in the process of step S3602. No event occurs.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3901, the first pseudo-effect processing is executed in step S3902, and then the second pseudo-effect processing is terminated. The first pseudo-effect processing is the same as the processing of FIG. 78, and a processing for generating a pseudo-freeze effect is performed according to the value of the deviation counter accumulated before the bonus transition.

If a negative determination is made in step S3901, it is determined in step S3903 whether or not the postponement flag is set. If the post-addition flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3902, and the pseudo freeze effect process is executed in the first pseudo effect process. If the post-addition flag is set, the pseudo-addition process during BB is executed in step S3904, and then the second pseudo-effect process is terminated.

<Process for pseudo addition during BB>
The pseudo-addition process in BB will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87.

As mentioned above, the pseudo-addition process during BB is the case where the display mode shifts to the restricted target bonus in the attack mode, VBB mode, and the situation where the post-addition flag is set in the special zone, and the restricted target. It will be carried out when the third role in BB is won during the bonus. In the BB medium pseudo-addition process, a process is set for performing a pseudo-addition notification effect without carrying out the additional lottery for the additional lottery whose implementation is restricted by the restricted target bonus.

That is, in step S4001, a process of grasping the value of the post-addition counter BG is executed. As described above, the post-addition counter BG corresponds to the number of extra games for which the number of games in the attack mode has been added but the notification to that effect has not been performed. In the following step S4002, it is determined whether or not the post-addition counter BG grasped in step S4001 is less than 30. If it is less than 30, the first pseudo-effect processing is executed in step S4003, and then the pseudo-addition processing in BB is terminated. As described above, in the first pseudo-effect processing, the processing for pseudo-freeze production based on the disconnection counter is carried out.

If it is determined in step S4002 that the post-addition counter BG is 30 or more, the notification game number lottery process is executed in step S4004. In the notification game number lottery process, a pseudo addition notification effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a pseudo addition notification effect) is performed based on the first pseudo addition table acquired from various table storage areas 105a and the post-addition counter BG. The number of notification games is drawn. In the first pseudo-addition table, as shown in FIG. 88A, 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games are set as the number of notification games in the pseudo-addition notification effect. If the value of the add-on counter BG is 30 or more and less than 100, 30 games are selected with a 100% probability, and if the value of the add-on counter BG is 100 or more and less than 200, 30 games and 50 games are 50%. If the value of the post-addition counter BG is 200 or more, 30 games are selected with a probability of 10%, 50 games are selected with a probability of 40%, and 100 games are selected with a probability of 50%. That is, the larger the value of the post-addition counter BG, the larger the number of games notified in the pseudo-addition notification effect, and the number of the notification games is the addition in the addition lottery generated at the time of winning the third role in the BB in the restriction non-target bonus. It is associated with the number of games.

After executing the notification game number lottery process in step S4004, the process proceeds to step S4005. In step S4005, it is determined whether or not the notification of 30 games is selected in the notification game number lottery process. When 30 games are selected, the process of setting the first freeze flag is executed in step S4006. Then, in step S4007, a process of subtracting 30 from the post-addition counter BG is executed, and in step S4008, a process of adding 30 to the display remaining counter HG is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4005, the process proceeds to step S4009. In step S4009, it is determined whether or not the notification of 50 games is selected in the notification game number lottery process. When 50 games are selected, the process of setting the second freeze flag is executed in step S4010. Then, in step S4011, the process of subtracting 50 from the post-addition counter BG is executed, and in step S4012, the process of adding 50 to the display remaining counter HG is executed.

The case of making a negative determination in step S4009 means that the notification of 100 games is selected in the notification game number lottery process. In this case, in step S4013, the process of setting the third freeze flag is executed. Then, in step S4014, a process of subtracting 100 from the post-addition counter BG is executed, and in step S4015, a process of adding 100 to the display remaining counter HG is executed.

After executing any of the processes of step S4008, step S4012, and step S4015, the process proceeds to step S4016. In step S4016, a process of inputting 2 to the freeze counter FC is executed. As a result, when the first freeze flag is set, a freeze effect with 7 middle reds is generated at the start of rotation of the next game, and when the second freeze flag is set, the right at the start of rotation of the next game. When the rising red 7-match freeze effect is generated and the third freeze flag is set, the upper red 7-match freeze effect is generated at the start of rotation of the next game.

Then, in step S4017, the process of setting the additional command is executed. The addition command includes information for generating an addition notification effect of the number of games added to the display remaining number counter HG in step S4008, step S4012 or step S4015. As a result, the additional notification effect corresponding to the various 7-match freeze effect generated in this game is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

After executing the process of step S4017, it is determined in step S4018 whether or not the post-addition counter BG becomes 0. When the post-addition counter BG is 0, the process of clearing the post-addition flag is executed in step S4019. If a negative determination is made in step S4018, or after the process of step S4019 is executed, the pseudo-addition process in BB is terminated.

By doing so, the additional notification effect accompanied by the freeze effect of various red 7s is generated in the restricted target bonus. This additional notification effect is not actually an additional lottery, but a pseudo effect.

The relationship between the number of games that can be selected and the post-addition counter BG will be supplementarily described.

As the number of notification games in the pseudo-addition notification effect, 50 games are selected only when the post-addition counter BG is 100 or more (100 to 199). Then, even if 50 games of the post-addition counter BG are notified as the pseudo-addition notification effect this time, the remaining 50 games or more remain in the post-addition counter BG. Further, 100 games as the number of notification games are selected only when the post-addition counter BG is 200 or more. Then, even if 100 games of the post-addition counter BG are notified as the pseudo-addition notification effect this time, the remaining 100 games or more remain in the post-addition counter BG. On the other hand, as the number of notification games, 30 games are selected when the post-addition counter BG is 30 or more, and the post-addition counter BG can be 0 by this pseudo-addition notification effect, and 100 games can be used. It is possible that the above remains.

In other words, as a pseudo additional notification effect, if a freeze effect with 7 reds in the middle row occurs and an additional notification effect of 30 games occurs, 30 games will be added as the additional notification effect this time, but how much additional notification will be added later. It cannot be determined whether or not remains. On the other hand, as a pseudo-additional notification effect, when a freeze effect of 7 reds rising to the right occurs and an additional notification effect of 50 games occurs, not only 50 games are added as the additional notification effect this time, but also after the rest. It indicates that 50 or more games remain as a carry. In addition, as a pseudo additional notification effect, if a freeze effect of 7 reds in the upper row is generated and an additional notification effect of 100 games is generated, not only 100 games are added as the additional notification effect this time, but also the remaining post-addition is added. It indicates that 100 or more games remain as a minute. Then, even if it is determined that the additional notification effect in the above-mentioned restricted target bonus is pseudo, it will provide more information than the additional notification effect, and will be a motivation to confirm the additional notification effect. be able to.

<Pseudo-addition notification is performed>
The relationship between the actual remaining number of games ZG and the display remaining number counter HG when the post-addition notification and the pseudo-addition notification are performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a), when the attack mode is started as an advantageous section at the timing of tc1, the initial number of games in the attack mode is the number of remaining games ZG (more specifically, the number of continuous attack modes G3. The same initial number of games is input to the display remaining number counter HG. After that, each time the game is exhausted, the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG are subtracted.

If some additional opportunity occurs at the timing of ct2 or the timing of ct3 and the additional game is won (for example, when the additional game occurs based on the strong cherry), the number of additional games is added to the remaining number of games ZG. When the immediate ride notification is selected, the number of additional games is also added to the display remaining number counter HG at the timing of ct2 or the timing of ct3.

When the post-addition notification is selected instead of the immediate addition notification for the addition that was won at the timing of ct4, the number of additional games is added to the remaining number of games ZG, while the number of additional games is added to the display remaining number counter HG. Is not added. As a result, an event occurs in which the actual value of the remaining game number ZG and the value of the display remaining number counter HG are different. After that, when the game is digested until the value of the remaining number counter HG for display reaches a predetermined value (1) as the timing of tc5, the post-notification of the unnotified portion is generated. As a result, the value of the remaining number counter HG for display becomes the same value as (or close to) the value of the remaining number of games ZG.

It is assumed that the post-addition notification is selected for the addition that was won at the timing of ct6, and then the restricted non-target bonus is won at the timing of ct7. As described above, even in the attack mode, the subtraction process of the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG is not performed for each game digestion during the bonus. On the other hand, even in the bonus during the attack mode, the processing for increasing the number of advantageous section games AG is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 88B, in the effect during the bonus, the subtraction stop display indicating that the update of the remaining game number display ZGP of the auxiliary display unit 65 is stopped is made (in the figure). , The character display of "STOP" is displayed so as to overlap the front side on the remaining game number display ZGP). On the other hand, the subtraction stop display is not performed for the display of the total number of games corresponding to the advantageous section game number AG, and the player can grasp that the update is not stopped. In addition, in the production during the bonus, the remaining payout number display corresponding to the remaining payout number of the bonus is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the player can grasp how many games can be consumed during the bonus. It has become.

As described above, in the bonus not subject to restrictions, an additional lottery is carried out when the third role in the BB is won, and when the additional lottery is won, various red 7-match freeze effects are generated as an additional notification. For example, when the additional game is won at the timing of ct8 or the timing of ct9, an additional notification effect is generated with a red 7-match freeze effect corresponding to the number of additional games. In this case, since the remaining game number ZG in the main control device 101 is added, the remaining game number display ZGP in the auxiliary display unit 65 is also added and updated by the corresponding number of games. When the bonus state ends at the timing of ct10, the subtraction process of the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG is also restarted.

When the remaining number counter HG for display reaches the predetermined value (1) at the timing of ct11, the addition of the amount generated at the timing of ct6 is notified as the post-addition notification. After that, the attack mode (advantageous section) ends when both the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG become 0 at the timing of tc12.

As shown in FIG. 89 (b), when the attack mode is started as an advantageous section at the timing of td1, the initial number of games in the attack mode is the remaining number of games ZG and the remaining number for display, as in FIG. 89 (a). It is input to the number counter HG. After that, addition occurs at the timing of td2, the timing of td3, the timing of td4, and the timing of td6. It is assumed that the notification is selected.

The additional amount of the timing of td4 is notified by the post-addition notification based on the fact that the remaining number counter HG for display becomes a predetermined value at the timing of td5. This is the same as the description of the timing of tc4 and ct5.

It is assumed that the bonus transferred at the timing of td7 is the restricted target bonus, unlike the restricted non-target bonus transferred at the timing of tc7. As mentioned above, in the restricted bonus, even if you win the third role in BB, the implementation of the additional lottery is restricted. However, in the present embodiment, in the restricted bonus, a pseudo additional notification effect using the unnotified additional amount may occur. That is, assuming that the third combination in the BB is won at the timing of td8, the pseudo-addition notification is generated by using the additional amount generated at the timing of td6. In this case, a part of the number of additional games generated at the timing of td6 is used as a pseudo additional notification, and an additional notification effect accompanied by a freeze effect of 7 reds is performed.

Then, after the bonus state ends at the timing of td9, at the timing of td10 where the display remaining number counter HG becomes a predetermined value, the post-addition notification of the remaining amount of the addition generated at the timing of td6 is performed. After that, at the timing of td11, both the remaining number of games ZG and the remaining number counter HG for display become 0, and the attack mode (advantageous section) ends.

The restricted bonus and the non-restricted bonus will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 90.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the first BB and the second BB are mainly set as bonus combinations for shifting to the bonus state. In the first BB, a prize is established when the "red 7" symbols are aligned on the valid line and stopped, and in the second BB, a prize is established when the "white BAR" symbols are aligned and stopped on the valid line. Therefore, the player can clearly grasp which bonus is selected from the winning mode. In addition, in the bonus middle effect setting process (FIG. 60) by the display control device 81, it is set so that different effects are performed corresponding to each bonus. Therefore, it is possible to grasp which of the first BB and the second BB is the bonus not only in the winning mode but also in the bonus state.

In the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, a single winning combination and a duplicate winning combination are set, and the overlapping winning combination is an overlapping role with a transition trigger such as a strong cherry or a strong watermelon (strong cherry duplication 1, 2, strong). Watermelon duplication 1, 2 etc.), duplication with the 9th re-game (special lip A duplication 1, 2), duplication with the 9th re-game and 10th re-game (special lip AB duplication 1, 2) are set. Has been done.

The single winning combination and the overlapping combination of the 9th re-game are set so that there is no difference in the setting of the winning probability for both the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, and the 1st BB and the 1st BB triggered by these combinations are set. The second BB is a restricted non-target bonus in which the lottery related to the instruction function is not restricted. Further, regarding the overlapping combination with the 9th re-game and the 10th re-game, there is a setting difference in the winning probability for both the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, and the 1st BB and the 2nd BB triggered by the combination are , It is a restricted bonus that limits the lottery related to the instruction function.

On the other hand, the overlapping combination with the transition trigger combination is set so that the setting difference of the winning probability does not occur for the first BB, and the first BB triggered by the combination is a restricted non-target bonus, and the first For 2BB, there is a setting difference in the winning probability, and the second BB triggered by the winning combination is a restricted bonus.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even in the same first BB and second BB, an event such as a restricted target bonus or a restricted non-target bonus may occur depending on the winning opportunity. Therefore, for example, when the third role in the BB is won during the first BB and an additional notification effect accompanied by a red 7-match freeze effect occurs, it is an additional notification effect accompanied by an actual addition, or a post-addition. It is difficult to determine whether it is a pseudo additional notification effect using the unnotified portion of the notification.

More specifically, in the case of winning the third role in the BB in the first BB, if an additional notification effect accompanied by a red 7-match freeze effect occurs, this bonus is a duplicate role with the transition trigger role or the ninth replay. If it is a bonus triggered by a duplicate combination with and a single winning combination, the additional notification effect is an additional notification effect accompanied by an actual addition, while this bonus overlaps with the 9th re-game and the 10th re-game. If it is a bonus triggered by a role, the additional notification effect is a pseudo additional notification effect. In addition, in the case of winning the third role in the BB in the second BB, if an additional notification effect accompanied by a red 7-match freeze effect occurs, this bonus will be triggered by an overlapping role with the ninth re-game and a single winning role. If it is a bonus, the additional notification effect is an additional notification effect with an actual addition, while this bonus is a duplicate role with the transition trigger or a duplicate role with the 9th replay and the 10th replay. If it is a bonus as an opportunity, the additional notification effect is a pseudo additional notification effect.

Moreover, in particular, with respect to the overlapping combination with the 9th re-game and the overlapping combination with the 9th re-game and the 10th re-game, the stop rolls in the winning game are set so as to be easy to be common. Specifically, the 9th re-game and the 10th re-game have the same target symbol for the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, but the target symbol for the left reel 32L is the "red bell" in the 9th re-game. It is a "white bell" symbol, and a "youth" symbol is set in the tenth replay. A total of six "red bell" and "white bell" symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L, while only one "youth" symbol is arranged on the left reel 32L. Further, in the left reel 32L, the "youth" symbol is arranged at the 13th position, and the "white bell" symbol is arranged at the 12th position immediately below the "youth" symbol and the 15th position immediately above the "white bell" symbol. Therefore, in the situation where both the 9th re-game and the 10th re-game have been won, the target symbol of the 10th re-game should be stopped on the effective line of the left reel 32L so as to win the 10th re-game. If so, it is necessary to stop the operation when the 13th "Youth" symbol reaches the effective line, and at other times, that is, the 12th "white" from the 14th "1st replay" symbol. If the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "bell" symbol reaches the effective line, the target symbol of the 9th re-game is stopped instead of the target symbol of the 10th re-game.

Therefore, in the special lip AB duplication 1 and 2 winning games, which are overlapping roles with the 9th re-game and the 10th re-game, the 9th re-game prize is basically established, and the 10th re-game prize is intentionally aimed at. The tenth re-game prize is established only when the stop operation is performed and the stop operation is successful. Then, the special lip A duplication 1, which is an overlapping role with the 9th re-game, the stop roll in the winning game (the stop roll that becomes the 9th re-game prize), and the 9th re-game and the 10th re-game The stop rolls in the special lip AB duplication 1 and 2 winning games, which are overlapping roles, are basically the same, and it is difficult to determine which winning combination is the trigger for the bonus. In other words, it is difficult to determine whether the bonus is a restricted target bonus or a restricted non-target bonus from the stop result in the winning game, and whether the additional notification effect accompanied by the red 7-match freeze effect in the bonus is a pseudo one. It is difficult to distinguish between them.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A setting difference is provided in the winning probability, and a pseudo additional notification effect is generated by using the unnotified portion of the post-addition notification during the restricted target bonus in which the implementation of the additional lottery is restricted. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the restricted bonus while not increasing the advantage of the restricted bonus that shifts to the advantageous section too much.

The pseudo additional notification effect in the restricted target bonus is configured to be executed based on the winning of the third winning combination in the BB that can be won in the restricted target bonus, and the winning probability of the third winning combination in the BB is the same regardless of the set value. It was a probability. By doing so, the appearance rate of the trigger of the pseudo additional notification in the restricted target bonus can be set to the same probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, in the restricted target bonus whose transition rate differs depending on the set value, not only the pseudo additional notification is used to improve the interest, but also the pseudo additional notification is used to successfully camouflage and set that the bonus is the restricted target bonus. It can also be expected to have an effect that makes it difficult to predict the value.

When performing a pseudo additional notification effect in the restricted target bonus, a freeze effect is configured in which the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is restricted. A lottery for each game is executed by the main control device 101, and rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed, while various effects such as an auxiliary display unit 65 are performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side. On the premise that it is executed, it is considered that the player is likely to be suspicious that even if the above-mentioned pseudo additional notification effect is performed as various effects on the sub side, it is a pseudo one. In that respect, as described above, the pseudo additional notification effect accompanied by the freeze effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R on the main control device 101 side is not a mere additional notification effect but an actual additional notification effect. It is easy to give the impression that it has passed the lottery. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the additional notification effect in the restricted target bonus.

Moreover, the freeze effect executed together with the pseudo additional notification effect is associated with the freeze effect that occurs when the addition is performed in the restricted non-target bonus, and the same type is used when the additional notification effect of the same number of games is performed. It was configured to produce a freeze effect. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the impression that the pseudo additional notification effect is the result of the actual additional lottery.

Even when the third role in the BB is won, if a pseudo additional notification effect is not generated, a pseudo freeze effect that does not develop into a freeze effect with various reds 7 is executed. As a result, it is possible to further strengthen the impression of the additional notification effect generated through the lottery by intentionally showing that the lottery may be missed. And, since this pseudo freeze is actually added to the restricted non-target bonus and occurs at the time of non-winning, the reliability of the pseudo additional notification effect in the restricted target bonus due to the relationship with the restricted non-target bonus. Can be provided.

The configuration is such that a pseudo additional notification effect is generated after the stop roll corresponding to the lottery result that triggers the appearance is generated. More specifically, the next game in which the stop roll that is the third prize in the BB appears. It is configured to generate a pseudo additional notification effect at the start of. Events under the jurisdiction of the main control device 101, such as a stop roll, are more effective in trusting the player than events under the jurisdiction of the display control device 81, such as the display effect by the auxiliary display unit 65. Considering that, the above configuration is a configuration in which a pseudo additional notification effect is generated after imparting reliability. By doing so, if the additional notification effect that may occur in the future is trusted by the stop roll so as not to make the suspicion that it is a pseudo thing, the additional notification effect can be performed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the additional notification effect will be detected as a pseudo one.

Moreover, after the reliability is given by the stop roll, the reliability is additionally given by the freeze effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and then the additional notification effect is generated by the auxiliary display unit 65. , The effect of preventing the additional notification effect from being detected as a pseudo one is further enhanced.

Further, as described above, the pseudo additional notification effect is executed based on the winning of the third combination in the BB as a game result, which gives the impression that the additional notification effect is obtained through the lottery on the main control device 101 side. The effect of giving is enhanced.

Even if the third role in the BB is won in the restricted bonus, the pseudo additional notification effect is prevented from occurring depending on the value of the post-addition counter BG. This makes it possible not only to win the third role in the BB, but also to give a strong impression that it is necessary to win some kind of lottery (additional lottery). Moreover, if it is possible that the additional notification does not occur when the third role in the BB is won in this way, a lottery table will be created so that the third role in the BB will not be won according to the value of the post-addition counter BG. , It is not necessary to use a special configuration, it is a simpler configuration, and it is possible to raise the attention of the restricted bonus while not giving a sense of discomfort such as a bonus that it is difficult to win the third role in BB. It will be possible.

In addition to the 3rd role in the BB, the 2nd role in the BB is provided as a role that can be won during the restricted bonus, and the 3rd role in the BB is the role that wins the 9th replay and the 10th replay. On the other hand, the second role in BB is the role that wins the 9th re-game, and in that a stop roll that becomes the 9th re-game prize can appear at the time of winning, the second role in BB and the middle of BB It is common with the third role. Then, in the second role in the BB, since the pseudo additional notification effect is not generated, the pseudo additional notification effect is performed even when a stop roll that is the ninth re-game winning prize appears. If it does not occur, it cannot be determined whether it is due to the winning of the 3rd role in the BB or the winning of the 2nd role in the BB. As a result, it is possible to reduce the discomfort that can be given even in a scene where the additional notification effect is not generated based on the winning of the third combination in the BB, such as a scene where the post-addition counter BG is not accumulated.

The second role in the BB and the third role in the BB are both roles to which a replay is given, and even if there is a difference in whether or not a pseudo additional notification effect is generated as described above, the player can use it. There is no difference in the advantage of. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of making it difficult to determine whether the trigger for the additional notification effect is the second combination in the BB or the third combination in the BB.

In the attack mode and the like, the post-addition counter BG is easily accumulated by the push order bell and the push order replay. More specifically, the push order bell and push order replay make it easier to select the post-addition notification at the time of extra winning than the so-called rare role such as strong cherry. By making the post-addition counter BG accumulate by the push order bell or the like having a relatively high winning probability in this way, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the post-addition counter BG has accumulated, and it is a restricted target bonus. Even if a pseudo additional notification is generated in the above, it is possible to make it difficult to realize that it uses the post-addition counter BG.

Comparing the restricted target bonus with a difference in winning probability depending on the set value and the restricted non-target bonus with no difference in winning probability depending on the set value, the mode of the additional notification effect generated during the bonus is common, and the additional is added. From the mode of the notification effect, it is not possible to identify which bonus is being used. By doing so, it is difficult to distinguish between the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus, and by making the restricted target bonus seem to be the restricted non-target bonus, the playability of the restricted target bonus can be improved.

Moreover, if it is difficult to distinguish between the two bonuses that have different winning probabilities depending on the set value as described above, it will be difficult to distinguish the difference between the winning probabilities depending on the set value, and the impression that the bonus is assigned by one's own luck. Will be easier to give. In other words, for example, even if you acquire a lot of game media by shifting to a lot of restricted bonuses with different settings, if you can not distinguish it from the restricted non-targeted bonus, it is not due to the set value, but your own. It is also possible to give the impression that it was acquired by luck.

The additional notification effect executed by the restricted non-target bonus is the immediate additional notification executed in a series of games triggered by the additional winning, while the additional notification effect executed by the restricted target bonus is the additional winning game. Where the post-addition notification is executed in a game that is later than that and is determined after the fact, the immediate-addition notification and the post-addition notification other than during the bonus are different to the extent that the player can identify them. However, it is not possible to distinguish between the immediate notification and the post-addition notification during the bonus. That is, by experiencing both notifications during the bonus on the premise that they can be identified except during the bonus, it is possible to grasp that both notifications are the same notification.

In particular, the post-addition notification other than during the bonus can occur in a game in which the remaining game number display ZGP that is continuously displayed during the attack mode is 1, and the post-addition notification can occur. While it can be detected in advance (from before multiple games), it cannot be detected until the third role in the BB is won in the post-addition notification in the restricted bonus, and it is not possible to detect it until the third role in the BB is won. It is included in the category of notification performed in a series of games. Even from such a difference, it is easy to understand that the additional notification effect in the restricted bonus is not a post-addition notification, giving a strong impression that the post-addition notification is not a pseudo one, and also as a restricted target bonus. It can be difficult to distinguish from the non-restricted bonus.

The winning probability of the third role in the BB, which triggers the additional notification effect in the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus, is common to both bonuses. Therefore, even from the appearance rate of the third role in the BB, it is not possible to determine which bonus it is, and the effect of improving the playability of the restricted bonus is enhanced.

Moreover, when an additional notification effect is generated when the third role in the BB is won, a stop roll that is the 9th re-game winning prize appears regardless of any bonus. This not only makes it difficult to distinguish the bonus from the stop result, but also gives the impression that the above-mentioned additional notification effect is generated as a result of the drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R on the main control device 101 side. An effect that can be strongly given and makes it judge that the additional notification effect performed in the restricted target bonus has passed the additional lottery, that is, the effect that the additional notification effect this time is generated in the restricted non-target bonus. Can be increased.

Regardless of whether it is a restricted target bonus or a restricted non-target bonus, the additional notification effect does not occur when the second role in the BB is won. Moreover, the stop result at the time of winning the second role in BB is also common to the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus, and the winning probability is also the same. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish which bonus is from the stop roll and its appearance rate even from the scene where the additional notification effect does not occur, and it is possible to enhance the effect of improving the playability of the restricted bonus.

In the BB instruction lottery process, the process for winning the third role in the BB differs between the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus, and the second pseudo-directing process is executed for the restricted target bonus, which is not restricted. In the bonus, the BB middle mode transition process and the BB middle addition process are executed. In this way, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration in order to standardize the processing up to the middle of any bonus and to generate an additional notification effect that differs depending on the bonus type.

Moreover, for example, in both the BB addition process and the second pseudo-effect process, the process of setting various freeze flags and the like are common to both processes. That is, in the configuration in which the processes up to the middle are standardized and the processes from the middle are different as described above, the common processes also exist in the different processes, so that the processing configuration can be further simplified. ing.

In the 1st BB, it is possible to transfer to the restricted and non-restricted bonuses, and in the 2nd BB, it is possible to transfer to the restricted and non-restricted bonuses. In other words, it is not possible to distinguish between the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus from the winning outcomes ("Red 7" symbol matching and "White BAR" symbol matching) at the time of bonus transition. Moreover, since the effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. is common between these restricted bonuses and restricted non-target bonuses, it is apparently difficult to distinguish between restricted target bonuses and restricted non-target bonuses after winning a prize. Will be. For this reason as well, the effect of enhancing the playability of the restricted bonus is enhanced.

Even in the winning game, the stop result of the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus is basically the same. When the special lip AB overlap 1 is won, the 9th re-game prize, which is the special lip A, is basically established. By doing so, it becomes more difficult to distinguish which bonus is.

However, as far as the winning game is concerned, it is possible to distinguish between the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus. Depending on the success or failure of the game winning, the restricted bonus and the non-restricted bonus can be distinguished. By doing so, it is possible to meet the diverse needs of a player who wants to enjoy the production without being able to distinguish between the two bonuses and a player who wants to enjoy the production after distinguishing between the two bonuses. ..

When the special lip AB duplication 1 is won, the 9th re-game can win the prize more easily than the 10th re-game, and the stop switches 42 to 44 at the stop operation timing corresponding to the 10th re-game winning. Only when the stop operation can be performed, the 10th re-game prize is established. A player who wants to enjoy the production after distinguishing between the two bonuses is likely to be a player who is skilled in the game, and from that point of view, the above configuration makes it possible to distinguish between the two bonuses. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a player who wants to enjoy the production without being connected accidentally wins the 10th re-game prize.

When executing an additional lottery in a non-restricted bonus, the winning probability of the additional lottery is different depending on the situation before the bonus transition. More specifically, the winning probability of the additional lottery during the bonus is changed according to the accumulation status of the out-of-counter before the bonus transition. In this way, after being aware that the game situation before the bonus transfer may affect the winning probability of the additional lottery during the bonus, depending on the accumulation status of the post-addition counter BG before the bonus transfer in the restricted bonus. By configuring the configuration to generate a pseudo additional notification effect, it is possible to accept the phenomenon that the additional notification effect in the restricted bonus is likely to occur or difficult to occur depending on the value of the post-addition counter BG without discomfort. It will be possible.

Comparing the restricted target bonus with a setting difference in the winning probability and the restricted non-target bonus without a setting difference, the ease of winning may be reversed depending on the set value. That is, for example, comparing the winning probabilities of the restricted target bonus based on the special lip A duplication 1 and the restricted non-target bonus based on the special lip AB duplication 1, as shown in FIG. 36, in the setting 1, the special lip A duplication 1 is compared. The winning probability is about 1/1010, the special lip AB duplication 1 is about 1/6550, and the special lip A duplication 1, that is, the restricted bonus is easier to win. On the other hand, in setting 6, the winning probability of the special lip A duplication 1 is about 1/110, the special lip AB duplication 1 is about 1/546, and the special lip AB duplication 1, that is, the restriction non-target bonus is better. Easy to win. In this way, since the ratio of the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus differs depending on the set value, it is difficult to distinguish whether or not the additional notification effect performed by both bonuses is pseudo. can.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the processing configuration of the pseudo-addition processing in BB in the above embodiment is changed. FIG. 91 (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the pseudo-addition process in BB in this modification.

In step S4101, the post-addition counter BG is grasped. In the following step S4102, a pseudo-addition lottery process is executed. In the pseudo-addition lottery process, a second pseudo-addition table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate an addition notification effect accompanied by various red 7-match freeze effects. As shown in FIG. 91B, the second pseudo-addition table is set so that the winning rate of the pseudo-addition notification effect and the number of pseudo-addition games at the time of winning differ according to the value of the post-addition counter BG. .. In particular, when the value of the post-addition counter BG is 30 or less, it is set so that the pseudo-addition of any number of games does not occur.

In step S4103, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-addition notification lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S4102. If the pseudo-addition notification lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S4104, the first pseudo-effect processing is executed, and then the pseudo-addition processing during BB is terminated. The first pseudo-effect processing is as described in step S4003 and the like. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4103, the process proceeds to step S4005, and a pseudo additional notification effect process accompanied by various red 7-match freeze effects is executed.

That is, even if the configuration is such that the red 7-match freeze effect is generated through the pseudo-addition lottery as in the above configuration, if the value of the post-addition counter BG does not reach the minimum number of additional games in the bonus state, the pseudo-addition is added. If the lottery is not won, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the post-addition counter BG becoming negative.

In the second pseudo-addition table, unlike the first embodiment, even if the value of the post-addition counter BG is 30 or more, the pseudo-addition notification may not be won. That is, if the post-addition counter BG is less than 30, the notification winning rate is 0%, if it is 30 or more and less than 100, the notification winning rate is 30%, and if it is 100 or more and less than 200, the notification winning rate is 50%. If it is 200 or more, the notification winning rate is 70%, and the notification winning rate is set to increase as the value of the post-addition counter BG increases.

In other words, even if there is a potential number of additional games for a large number of additional games, there are many situations where pseudo additional notifications do not occur during the bonus, and the rarity of such additional notifications is enhanced. Not only that, due to its rarity, the degree of joy when the additional notification is made is increased, and even if the third role in the BB is won in the scene where the post-addition counter BG will be accumulated. By intentionally showing a scene in which the additional notification does not occur, it is possible to make it difficult to raise a suspicion that the additional notification is pseudo.

In the non-restricted bonus, a plurality of bonuses with different additional winnings may be provided, and the production of each of the plurality of bonuses may be associated with the production of the restricted bonuses having different notification winning rates. For example, as shown in FIG. 91 (c), the additional winning probability at the time of winning the third combination in BB is set to be different according to the rank of the attack mode at the time of transition to the bonus state. Specifically, for the ranks of attack mode from 1 to 4, when the third role in BB is won, rank 1 does not win the extra, rank 2 has a 30% chance of winning, and rank 3 has 50. The additional lottery table in the BB is set so that the additional winning is performed with a probability of% and the additional winning is performed with a probability of 70% at rank 4. Then, in rank 1, the effect in the bonus state is the first effect (background blue), in rank 2, the effect in the bonus state is the second effect (background yellow), and in rank 3, the effect in the bonus state is the third effect (background). Green), in rank 4, the effect in the bonus state is set as the fourth effect (background red), and each rank is set so that the player can clearly grasp the effect in the effect mode in the bonus state.

Based on such a premise, the production mode in the bonus state is different depending on the notification winning rate of the pseudo-addition notification in the restricted target bonus. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), if the value of the add-on counter BG is less than 30, the effect in the bonus state is set as the first effect (background blue), and the value of the add-on counter BG is 30. If it is less than 100, the effect in the bonus state is the second effect (background yellow), and if the value of the post-addition counter BG is 100 or more and less than 200, the effect in the bonus state is the third effect (green background). If the value of the post-addition counter BG is 200 or more, the effect in the bonus state is defined as the fourth effect (background red). By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp whether the notification winning rate in the bonus state is high or low from the effect in the bonus state, and the effect with the non-restricted bonus and the addition with various red 7-match freeze effects are added. Since the relationship with the rate of occurrence of the notification effect is the same for the restricted target bonus, it is possible to make it difficult to realize that the additional notification effect generated during the restricted target bonus is a pseudo one. ..

In this case, the effect in the bonus state in the restricted target bonus may be configured to reflect not only the value of the counter BG but also the rank of the attack mode. For example, instead of setting the effects in the bonus state of the restricted non-target bonus according to the rank of the attack mode in a one-to-one correspondence, it is easy to select the first effect in rank 1, and the second effect to the fourth effect. Although it is difficult to select a production, even if it is a non-restricted bonus during the attack mode of rank 1, the 2nd to 4th productions can be selected, and the production during the bonus state of the restricted bonus is performed. It is preferable to select from the post-addition counter BG at the time of transition and the rank of the attack mode. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of incongruity that the rank of the attack mode and the effect during the bonus of the restricted target bonus do not correspond.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the probability of occurrence of the pseudo-additional notification effect is different depending on the number of remaining payouts in the bonus state. FIG. 92 shows various pseudo-addition tables in this modification.

In the pseudo-addition lottery process (step S4102) in this modification, the value of the current remaining payout number counter is grasped. Then, whether or not to acquire the pseudo-addition table corresponding to the value of the remaining payout number counter and execute the pseudo-addition notification effect, and the number of notification games to be executed are determined by lottery.

FIG. 92A shows a third pseudo-addition table acquired in a situation where the remaining payout number counter is 150 to 216, and FIG. 92B shows a situation where the remaining payout number counter is 100 to 149. The fourth pseudo-addition table acquired in is shown, and FIG. 92 (c) shows the fifth pseudo-addition table acquired in the situation where the remaining payout number counter is 1 to 99. As described above, the medal payout is performed in the bonus state, so that the remaining number counter is subtracted. Therefore, the larger the value of the remaining payout counter, the smaller the number of medals paid out in the bonus state (the number of wins of the first role in the BB is smaller), in other words, the undigested game in the bonus state. It shows a situation with a large number. That is, the situation in which the third pseudo-addition table is acquired is a situation in which the number of undigested games in the bonus state is larger than the situation in which the fourth pseudo-addition table and the fifth pseudo-addition table are acquired. Further, the situation in which the fourth pseudo-addition table is acquired is a situation in which the number of undigested games is larger than the situation in which the fifth pseudo-addition table is acquired, and less than the situation in which the third pseudo-addition table is acquired. .. The situation in which the fifth pseudo-addition table is acquired is a situation in which the number of undigested games is smaller than the situation in which the third pseudo-addition table and the fourth pseudo-addition table are acquired.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the third pseudo-addition table to the fifth pseudo-addition table, the pseudo-addition notification effect is set so as not to occur in the situation where the post-addition counter BG is less than 30 in any of the tables. On the other hand, if the post-addition counter BG is 30 or more, the occurrence rate of the pseudo-addition notification effect is the lowest in the third pseudo-addition table and the fifth pseudo-addition table when compared in the situation where the values of the post-addition counter BG are the same. The extra table is set to be the highest. Further, the number of notification games at the time of winning the pseudo-addition lottery is also set so that the third pseudo-addition table is the smallest and the fifth pseudo-addition table is the largest.

By making the above configuration, it becomes difficult to generate a pseudo-additional notification of a large number of games in the early stage of the bonus state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the event that the post-addition counter BG is exhausted as the game progresses in the bonus state.

In particular, in the restricted bonus, the post-addition counter BG is not replenished during the bonus state, so unless the above configuration is used, the occurrence rate of the pseudo-addition notification tends to differ between the early stage and the final stage of the bonus state. Therefore, it can be a factor to realize that the additional notification effect is a pseudo one. In that respect, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to make the occurrence rate of the pseudo-additional notification close to the average one over the entire bonus state, and it is difficult to realize that it is a pseudo-additional notification. Can be further enhanced.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the probability of occurrence of the pseudo-additional notification effect is different depending on the progress of the attack mode. FIG. 93 shows various pseudo-addition tables in this modification.

In the pseudo-addition lottery process (step S4102) in this modification, the current advantageous section game number AG is grasped. Then, whether or not to acquire the pseudo-addition table corresponding to the value of the advantageous section game number AG and execute the pseudo-addition notification effect, and the number of notification games to be executed are determined by lottery.

FIG. 93 (a) shows a sixth pseudo-addition table acquired in a situation where the advantageous section game number AG is less than 100, and FIG. 93 (b) shows a situation where the advantageous section game number AG is 100 or more. The seventh pseudo-addition table acquired in is shown. As already explained, the advantageous section game number AG indicates the number of digested games after winning the attack mode or the like. In other words, the situation in which the sixth pseudo-addition table is acquired indicates that the bonus state this time is a bonus state in which the number of digested games from the start of the advantageous section is less than 100 games (a situation shortly after the start). , The situation where the 7th pseudo-addition table is acquired is that the bonus state this time is the bonus state where the number of digested games from the start of the advantageous section has changed to 100 games or more (a situation where a certain period has passed from the start). Is shown. It should be noted that the pseudo-addition table to be acquired may be different depending on the number of games (number of digestion games) from the start of the attack mode instead of the advantageous section game number AG.

As shown in FIG. 93B, the seventh pseudo-addition table does not generate the post-addition notification effect if the post-addition counter BG is less than 30, and the post-addition counter is similar to the second pseudo-addition table. If the BG is 30 or more, the larger the value is, the higher the occurrence rate of the post-addition notification effect is, and the number of notification games at the time of occurrence is also set to increase. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93A, the sixth pseudo-addition table is set so that the post-addition notification effect does not occur regardless of the value of the post-addition counter BG. Although a part of the pseudo-addition notification effect may be generated in the sixth pseudo-addition table, it is preferable that the occurrence rate is lower than that of the seventh pseudo-addition table.

That is, in this modification, the pseudo-addition notification effect does not occur in the restricted target bonus that has been transferred in a situation shortly after the start of the advantageous section such as the attack mode, and the number of games to some extent from the start of the advantageous section such as the attack mode. In the restricted target bonus that has been transferred in the situation where the game has been exhausted, a pseudo-addition notification effect will occur.

In this way, in a situation where the attack mode has just started, that is, in a situation where the accumulation of the post-addition counter BG cannot be expected, the pseudo-additional notification effect is pseudo by preventing the pseudo-additional notification effect from being generated. The impression that it is a thing can be further diluted. The accumulation of the post-addition counter BG tends to depend on the number of times a specific role has been won, which can be expected to be added. The influence of the number of times itself on the post-addition counter BG becomes large. On the other hand, as the number of times a specific winning combination is won increases, the influence of the selection rate between the immediate addition notification and the post-addition notification increases, and the influence of the number of winnings of the specific combination itself on the post-addition counter BG becomes relatively small. .. In other words, by adopting the above configuration, if the influence of an event that the player can clearly grasp, such as the number of times a specific winning combination is won, is large, the pseudo-addition notification effect may not be generated in the first place, or the pseudo-addition notification effect may be produced. By making it less likely to occur, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression of notifying the contents of winning in advance.

Further, at the time of addition during the non-restriction target bonus, the immediate addition notification and the post-addition notification may be selected, and the selection rate may be different depending on the progress of the attack mode. When the post-addition notification is selected, the post-addition notification effect accompanied by various red 7-match freeze effects is not generated, and only the process of adding the number of additional games to the post-addition counter BG is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), in a situation where the advantageous section game number AG is less than 100, the post-addition notification is always selected, and if the advantageous section game number AG is 100 or more, a predetermined value is specified. The post-addition notification is selected at a rate (30%). By doing so, in the early stage of the attack mode, the red 7-matched freeze effect does not occur regardless of whether the restricted non-target bonus or the restricted target bonus. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making the winning probability of the pseudo-addition lottery different according to the progress in the restricted target bonus.

In addition, a pseudo freeze will occur when the post-addition notification is selected in the restricted non-target bonus, and a pseudo freeze will occur at a predetermined rate even when the pseudo-addition notification effect is not generated in the restricted target bonus. By doing so, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the freeze occurrence mode (the rate of occurrence of the additional notification effect) in the restricted target bonus and that in the restricted non-target bonus, and it is possible to enhance the effect of making it indistinguishable between the two bonuses. ..

Further, in the early stage of the attack mode, when the addition occurs during the restricted non-target bonus, that is, when the post-addition notification is selected, the pseudo freeze may not occur. In this case, even in the restricted bonus, it is preferable to prevent the pseudo freeze from occurring even if the pseudo-addition lottery is not won in the early stage of the attack mode. As a result, it is possible to give a strong impression that the bonus transferred in the early stage of the attack mode does not generate an addition, or even if an addition occurs, the post-addition notification is always selected (with a high probability). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the pseudo-additional notification effect and the actual additional notification effect.

<Modification example 4>
In this modification, the occurrence rate of the pseudo-additional notification effect differs depending on the set value. FIG. 94 shows a pseudo-addition table in this modification.

As shown in FIG. 94, in the eighth pseudo-addition table of the present modification, in the situation where the post-addition counter BG is 30 or more, the occurrence rate of the pseudo-addition notification effect and the number of notification games at the time of occurrence differ depending on the set value. For example, in a situation where the post-addition counter BG is 30 to 99, the probability that the pseudo-addition notification effect of 30 games will occur is 30% in the settings 1 and 2, 35% in the settings 3 and 4, and 40 in the settings 5 and 6. %, And the higher the set value, the higher the occurrence rate of the pseudo-addition notification effect. Further, in the situation where the post-addition counter BG is 100 to 199, the pseudo-addition notification effect of 50G is set so as not to occur in the settings 1 and 2 but to occur in the setting 3 or higher. Further, the pseudo-addition notification effect of 100 games is set so that it can be selected only in the situation where the post-addition counter BG of the settings 5 and 6 is 200 or more, and when the pseudo-addition notification effect of 100G occurs. , Settings 5 and 6 are confirmed.

By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the pseudo-additional notification effect, and even if the player realizes that the additional notification effect is pseudo. It is possible to suppress an event in which the player feels that the additional notification effect is a meaningless effect.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, whether or not the pseudo-addition notification effect is generated in the restricted target bonus is different depending on the winning mode of the restricted target bonus in the winning game. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a winning result correspondence process for a BB winning game in this embodiment. The winning result correspondence process for the BB winning game is a process executed in accordance with the case where the above-mentioned winning result corresponding process (FIG. 44) is executed, and is, for example, a process executed before step S1401.

In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the game is a winning game of the first BB or the second BB. That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game in which the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. If neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, or if any of the flags is set but set in a game prior to the game, this BB is used as it is. The process for the winning game is finished. By making an affirmative determination in step S4201, the process proceeds to step S4202.

In step S4202, it is determined whether or not the game result of this game is the special lip AB duplication 1 or the special lip AB duplication 2. When the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set triggered by a game result other than these, the processing for this BB winning game is terminated as it is. If the BB winning flag is set with these game results as an opportunity, the process proceeds to step S4203.

In step S4203, a process of grasping the winning result of this game is executed. As described above, when a duplicate winning combination is won in each game, priority / non-priority may be set in the winning order depending on the type of winning combination. Then, in this slot machine 10, the replay is preferentially won in the overlapping role of the replay and the bonus such as the special rip AB duplication 1 and 2. The replay is a game result in which no omission occurs, and in the special rip AB duplication 1 and 2 winning games, either the 9th replay or the 10th replay will win a prize. The process of step S4203 is a process for grasping which of the 9th re-game prize and the 10th re-game prize is established.

In step S4204, it is determined whether or not the tenth replay winning (special lip B winning) is established based on the processing result of step S4203. If the 10th re-game winning is not established, that is, if the 9th re-gaming winning is established, the process for this BB winning game is terminated as it is. If the tenth re-game winning is established, in step S4205, the process of setting the freeze limit flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed, and then the process for the BB winning game is terminated.

As already explained, in the situation where the 9th re-game and the 10th re-game are won in duplicate, the 9th re-game winning is overwhelmingly more likely to be established, and a specific stop operation mode (effective line of the left reel 32L). The tenth replay prize is established only when the stop operation is performed in the stop operation mode) performed at the timing when the thirteenth "youth" symbol arrives. That is, in the process for this BB winning game, the freeze limit flag is basically not set, and the freeze limit flag is set only when the stop operation is performed in a specific stop operation mode in the BB winning game. Will be done.

Next, the second pseudo-effect processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S4301, it is determined whether or not the current bonus state has shifted to the normal mode or the challenge mode. If the mode has changed to the normal mode or the challenge mode, it is determined in step S4302 whether or not the freeze limit flag is set. If the freeze limit flag is set, the second pseudo-effect processing is terminated as it is. If the freeze limit flag is not set, the first pseudo-effect processing is executed in step S4303, and then the second pseudo-effect processing is terminated. As described above, the first pseudo-effect processing is a process for generating a pseudo-freeze effect. That is, when the freeze limit flag is set, the first pseudo-effect processing is not executed, and the pseudo-freeze effect does not occur.

When it is determined in step S4301 that the mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode, it is determined in step S4304 whether or not the post-addition flag is set. If the post-addition flag is set, the pseudo-addition process during BB is executed in step S4305, and then the second pseudo-effect process is terminated. If the post-addition flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4302, and as described above, the process of whether or not to generate the pseudo-freeze effect is executed depending on the presence or absence of the freeze limit flag.

Next, the pseudo-addition process in BB in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97.

The pseudo-addition process in BB in the present embodiment is substantially the same as the process in the first embodiment, and the difference is that the freeze is restricted whether or not a pseudo-freeze effect or various red 7-match freeze effects are generated. The point is that it differs depending on the presence or absence of the flag.

That is, similarly to step S4001 and step S4002, the process of grasping the post-addition counter BG is executed in step S4401, and it is determined in step S4402 whether or not the post-addition counter BG is less than 30. If it is less than 30, it is determined in step S4403 whether or not the freeze limit flag is set. If the freeze limit flag is not set, the first pseudo-effect processing is executed in step S4404, and then the pseudo-addition processing during BB is terminated. On the other hand, when the freeze limit flag is set in step S4403, the pseudo-addition process during BB is terminated as it is. That is, when the freeze limit flag is set, the pseudo freeze does not occur in the situation where the post-addition counter BG is less than 30.

When the post-addition counter BG is 30 or more, the notification game number lottery process is executed in step S4405. In step S4405, similarly to step S4004, the number of notification games is determined based on the first pseudo-addition table and the post-addition counter BG.

After that, in step S4406, it is determined whether or not the freeze limit flag is set. If the freeze limit flag is not set, in steps S4408 to S4422, a process for generating an additional notification effect accompanied by various red 7-matched freeze effects is performed in the same manner as the processes in steps S4006 to S4019. Run. If it is determined in step S4406 that the freeze limit flag is set, the freeze non-occurrence processing is executed in step S4407, and then the pseudo-addition processing during BB is terminated.

<Processing for non-freezing>
The freeze non-occurrence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 98.

In step S4501, it is determined whether or not the processing result of the notification game number lottery process in step S4405 is a pseudo-addition notification effect of 30 games. In the case of the pseudo-addition notification effect of 30 games, in step S4502, a process of adding 30 to the BB post-notification counter provided in various counter areas 106e is executed, and in step S4503, 30 is added from the post-addition counter BG. After executing the subtraction process, the freeze non-occurrence process ends. That is, in this case, the first freeze flag is not set, the freeze effect of the middle red 7 alignment does not occur, and the additional notification of 30 games does not occur. The BB post-notification counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the subtraction amount of the post-addition counter BG for the amount of non-occurrence of such freeze effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S4501, the process proceeds to step S4504, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo-addition notification effect of 50 games is selected. In the case of a pseudo-addition notification effect of 50 games, in step S4505, a process of adding 50 to the BB post-notification counter is executed, and in step S4506, a process of subtracting 50 from the post-addition counter is executed. , Ends freeze non-occurrence processing.

The case of making a negative determination in step S4504 means that the processing result of the current notification game number lottery process is a pseudo-addition notification effect of 100 games. In this case, in step S4507, a process of adding 100 to the BB post-notification counter is executed, and in step S4508, a process of subtracting 100 from the post-addition counter BG is executed, and then the freeze non-occurrence process ends. do.

In this way, in the bonus state triggered by the special lip AB duplication 1, 2 winning, by establishing the 10th re-game prize in the special lip AB duplication 1, 2 winning game, pseudo freeze and various red 7 freeze effects are produced. Execution is restricted. As described above, in the special lip AB overlapping 1 and 2 winning games, basically, the 9th re-game prize is likely to be established, and the 10th re-game prize is difficult to be established. That is, in the special lip AB overlapping 1 and 2 winning games, the 10th re-game winning is not established unless the stop operation is performed aiming at the 10th re-game winning.

Depending on the player, it is considered that not only the player who wants to enjoy the production but also the player who wants to prioritize the progress of the game. Since it does not cause a difference, it is considered that the above configuration in anticipation of the effect of the effect may be rather troublesome for the player who wants to prioritize the progress of the game. Therefore, as in the above configuration, if the 10th re-game prize is established, the pseudo additional notification effect is not generated, so that the game progresses while expecting the effect of the effect. It is possible to meet the needs of players who want to prioritize.

<Process for notification at the end of BB>
The process for notifying at the end of BB will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 99 (a). The BB end notification process is a process executed when the number of remaining payouts becomes 0 in the end determination process (FIG. 46) by the main control device 101, and is, for example, between the processes of step S1603 and step S1604. This is the process to be performed.

In step S4601, it is determined whether or not the post-BB notification counter is larger than 0. That is, it is determined whether or not the bonus that ends this time is the restricted target bonus, and the execution of the pseudo-addition notification effect is restricted during the bonus. If the post-BB notification counter is 0, the BB end notification process is terminated as it is. If the post-BB notification counter is larger than 0, the process proceeds to step S4602.

In step S4602, a process of adding the value of the BB post-notification counter to the display remaining number counter HG is executed. Then, in step S4603, a process of setting an addition command for notifying that the addition of the above addition has occurred is executed. In the display control device 81 that has received this additional command, as an additional notification effect in the effect at the time of full stop, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), an additional notification effect for the number of games for the BB post-notification counter is performed. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. It should be noted that the additional notification effect is carried out by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 without accompanying the freeze effect of various reds.

In the following step S4604, a process of clearing the post-BB notification counter to 0 is executed. Then, after executing the process of clearing the freeze limit flag in step S4605, the process for notifying at the end of BB is terminated.

<Relationship between the stoppage of the winning game and the presence or absence of various freeze effects>
Supplement with reference to FIG. 100 regarding the relationship between the stop result in the bonus winning game in the special lip A duplication 1 and 2 and the special lip AB duplication 1 and 2 and the presence or absence of the pseudo freeze effect and the various red 7 set freeze effect. explain.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, the first BB and the second BB are provided as bonuses, and most of them are based on the special lip A duplication 1, 2 or the special lip AB duplication 1, 2 winning (). About 87%, see Figure 90).

In the winning games of the special lip A duplication 1 and 2 and the special lip AB duplication 1 and 2, the 9th re-game prize as the special lip A can be established. When the 9th re-game prize is established in the winning game, not only whether it is a special lip A duplicate 1 winning game or a special lip A duplicate 2 winning game, but also whether it is a special lip AB overlapping 1 winning game or a special lip AB. Even if it is a duplicate 2 winning game, it cannot be determined from the stop result.

Of these, whether it is the special lip A duplication 1 and the special lip AB duplication 1 or the special lip A duplication 2 and the special lip AB duplication 2 is a stop result in the game to shift to the bonus state ("Red 7"). It can be identified by "matching symbols" or "matching white BAR" symbols).

On the other hand, whether it is the special lip A duplication 1 or 2 or the special lip AB duplication 1 or 2 cannot be determined in the subsequent games once the 9th replay winning is established in the winning game as described above. It has become. More specifically, for example, regardless of whether the special lip A overlap 1 or the special lip AB overlap 1, a pseudo freeze effect occurs in the second winning combination winning game in BB, and a pseudo freeze effect occurs in the third winning combination winning game in BB. Although there is a difference in whether or not it is a typical one, an additional notification effect is generated with a red 7-match freeze effect, which is the same effect in the effect. In the first embodiment described above, such an effect is used to enhance the effect of the special lip AB duplication 1 and 2, which is a restricted target bonus.

On the other hand, when the 10th replay winning game is established in the winning game of the special lip AB duplication 1 and 2, the game is not the special lip A duplication 1 and 2 winning game, but the special lip AB duplication 1 and 2 winning game. It becomes possible to clearly distinguish that.

Therefore, based on the establishment of the 10th re-game prize in this way, in the bonus state based on the special rip AB duplication 1 and 2, the pseudo freeze effect at the time of winning the second role in BB and the third role in BB The pseudo-addition notification effect accompanied by the freeze effect of 7 reds at the time of winning is not generated. In other words, if this bonus is a bonus based on the special lip AB duplication 1 and 2 winning, and there is a high possibility that the player knows that it is a restricted bonus, a pseudo additional notification will be performed. I tried not to. This makes it possible to prevent waste that causes the effect in a situation where it is determined that the effect is a pseudo effect.

In particular, in the pseudo additional notification effect in the slot machine 10, various red 7-aligned freeze effects are generated as the rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, an effect of weakening the pseudo-impression can be expected as compared with a configuration in which a pseudo additional notification effect is generated by a simple display effect. On the other hand, since the stop operation and the like are invalidated during the freeze effect, if it is realized that the freeze effect is a pseudo additional notification effect, the effect of the freeze effect will be. Not only can it not be expected, but on the contrary, there is a possibility that the player may be annoyed by interrupting the progress of the game. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the effect of the freeze effect is achieved by switching the presence or absence of the freeze effect according to the possibility that it is determined whether or not the bonus is the restricted target bonus. It will be possible to exert it more according to the situation.

In this way, while preventing the pseudo additional notification effect, the freeze effect is not generated because the configuration is such that the number of additional games that should have been notified in the pseudo additional notification effect is notified at the end of the bonus. Even if the 10th re-game prize is intentionally established, the inconvenience of not being able to grasp the number of additional games will not occur. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the progress of the game, but it is also possible to prevent a feeling of inequality such as a difference in the amount of information provided (the number of additional games).

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment described above, the effect during the bonus is different depending on the winning mode in the special lip A duplication 1, 2 and the special lip AB duplication 1, 2 winning game, but in this modification, other winnings are made. I will explain the bonus based on the opportunity.

As already explained, the bonus winning triggers include the special lip A duplication 1, 2 and the special lip AB duplication 1, 2 as well as the duplication role with the transition trigger such as strong cherry and weak watermelon (strong cherry duplication 1). , 2 and weak watermelon duplication 1, 2 etc.), and a single 1st BB and a single 2nd BB for winning a bonus alone are provided. Unlike the special rip A duplication 1 and 2 and the special rip AB duplication 1 and 2, which are overlapping roles with the replay, in the overlapping role with these transition triggers and the bonus single role, none of the roles are won in the winning game. Missing can also occur.

As shown in FIG. 101, in this modification, when a dropout occurs in the winning game, an additional notification effect or the like is generated including a pseudo addition, and when the dropout does not occur, the addition notification effect is generated. , Do not generate additional notification effects including pseudo effects. More specifically, in the overlapping role with the transition trigger, for example, of the strong cherry duplication 1 and 2, the strong cherry duplication 2 is the restricted target bonus. Then, in the strong cherry duplication 2 winning game, when the strong cherry winning is established, the freeze restriction flag is set so as not to generate a pseudo additional notification effect. On the other hand, in the strong cherry duplication 2 winning game, when the strong cherry winning is not established, the freeze limit flag is not set so that a pseudo additional notification effect is generated.

Here, among the duplicated roles with the transition trigger, the duplicated role with the first BB is a restricted non-target bonus, and the duplicated role with the second BB is a restricted target bonus. When the bonus is changed to a bonus, it can be clearly determined whether the bonus is a restricted bonus or a non-restricted bonus by the stop result of the bonus winning game. That is, when the player shifts to the bonus state by matching the "Red 7" symbols with the overlapping role with the transition trigger, the bonus is a non-restricted bonus, and the overlapping role with the transition trigger becomes "white". When the player shifts to the bonus state due to the "BAR" symbol alignment, the bonus is a restricted bonus, and if the player understands such a role composition, the additional notification during the bonus state triggered by the transition trigger will be sent. It is possible to clearly determine whether or not it is a pseudo one.

It is considered that the presence or absence of understanding of the above-mentioned combination is different depending on the degree of understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine by the player, and it is generally considered that the player with a high degree of skill in the game has a high degree of understanding. Therefore, in the above-mentioned modification, in the winning game of the overlapping role with the transition trigger, when the transition trigger is missed, a pseudo additional notification effect is generated assuming that the skill level of the game is low. , When the transition trigger prize is established, it is considered that the skill level of the game is high, and the pseudo additional notification effect is not generated. In this way, by generating the effect according to the degree of understanding of the player, it is possible to exert a suitable effect depending on the situation.

In the process of dealing with the winning result for the BB winning game (FIG. 95) in this modification, affirmative determination is made even in the bonus winning game other than the special lip AB duplication 1 and 2 in step S4202, and in step S4204. , Whether or not each role (special lip B, strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.) that overlaps with the bonus and is subject to judgment of whether or not a pseudo additional notification effect is generated has been won. If the prize is established, the freeze limit flag is set in step S4205, and if the prize is not established, the freeze limit flag is not set.

Further, for example, even in the restricted non-target bonus such as the strong cherry duplication 1, the presence or absence of the additional notification effect may be different depending on whether or not the winning game is missed. More specifically, in the game in which the winning combination with the transition trigger is won, the freeze restriction flag is set when the transition trigger winning is established. Further, even in the BB middle addition process (FIG. 84) at the time of winning the BB third role in the non-restriction target bonus, if the freeze limit flag is set, the red 7-matched freeze effect at the time of the additional winning is accompanied. It is preferable to configure the configuration in which the number of additional games is collectively notified at the end of the BB without executing the additional notification effect. More specifically, before the process of setting various flags such as the first freeze flag (step S3806, step S3808, step S3809), it is determined whether or not the freeze limit flag is present, and when the freeze limit flag is not set. , Set the corresponding freeze flag. If the freeze limit flag is set, processing such as adding the number of additional games this time to the post-BB notification counter without setting the freeze flag is performed. As a result, even during the non-restriction target bonus, it is possible to generate an additional notification effect at the end of the bonus state without performing various freeze effects.

As described above, even during the restricted non-target bonus, the presence or absence of the freeze effect is different depending on the stop result (whether or not the bonus is missed, etc.) of the bonus winning game, so that the freeze effect is generated in the restricted bonus. The relationship between the presence or absence of the game and the stop roll in the bonus winning game (whether or not the game is missed, etc.) matches, and it is possible to strengthen the impression that the freeze effect occurs or does not occur depending on the stop roll in the bonus winning game. In other words, it is not determined whether or not the freeze occurs depending on whether the bonus is a restricted target bonus or a restricted non-targeted bonus, but whether or not a freeze occurs depending on the stop result of the bonus winning game. For players with high game proficiency, it is not necessary to generate annoying effects, but for players with low game proficiency, it is more difficult to understand whether the freeze is due to a pseudo additional notification effect. Is possible.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the fact that the freeze limit flag is set is treated as valid over one advantageous section. FIG. 102 (a) is a flowchart showing the BB end notification process in the present modification, and FIG. 102 (b) is a flowchart showing the attack mode end process in the present modification. The process for ending the attack mode is a process performed by the main control device 101 in a game in which the number of remaining games in the attack mode (attack mode continuation number G3) becomes 0.

The BB end notification process in this modification is the same as the process of the second embodiment except that the freeze limit flag is not cleared (FIG. 99 (a)). That is, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the post-BB notification counter is larger than 0, and if it is larger, the value of the post-BB notification counter is added to the display remaining number counter HG in step S4702, and in step S4703. And set the additional command. As a result, at the end of the bonus, an additional notification effect is generated by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. After that, in this modification, the process of clearing the BB post-notification counter to 0 is performed in step S4704, and then the BB end notification process is terminated without clearing the freeze limit flag.

The freeze limit flag is cleared by the process for ending the attack mode.

That is, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the game is the end of the attack mode, and if it is the end game, it is determined in step S4802 whether or not the freeze restriction flag is set. If the freeze limit flag is set, the limit flag is cleared in step S4803, and then the end-time process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S4801 or step S4802, the final processing is terminated as it is.

By doing this, if you succeed in setting the freeze limit flag by winning the 10th replay in the bonus winning game during one advantageous section (attack mode), that state will be inherited and thereafter. Even if the 10th re-game prize or the like is not established in the bonus winning game, the freeze effect (especially pseudo additional notification) in the bonus state will not occur. As a result, the playability is improved, and even if the stop operation for establishing the 10th re-game prize fails, a meaningless freeze effect does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably generate a freeze effect.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, after the freeze limit flag is set, the player can clear the freeze limit flag. FIG. 103 (a) is a flowchart showing a winning result correspondence process for a BB winning game in this modified example. The process for the BB winning game is a process performed by the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 44) by the main control device 101.

In step S4901, it is determined whether or not the current game is a BB winning game based on the winning result. That is, as a result of winning this game, either the game in which the "Red 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the valid line and the first BB winning is established, or the "White BAR" symbols are aligned and stopped on the valid line and the second BB winning is established. Affirmative judgment is made in step S4901 depending on the game to be played. If it is not a BB winning game, the processing for this BB winning game is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4901, it is determined in step S4902 whether or not the freeze restriction flag is set. If the freeze limit flag is not set, the process for the BB winning game is terminated as it is. When the freeze limit flag is set, in step S4903, it is determined whether or not the stop operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 of this game is a predetermined specific operation mode. As the specific operation mode, in this modification, the reverse push operation (the right stop switch 44 is stopped first) operation is used, but other operation modes may be used. If a negative determination is made in step S4903, the process for the BB winning game is terminated as it is. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S4903 and a bonus winning is established in a specific operation mode, the freeze restriction flag is cleared in step S4904, and then the processing for this bonus winning game is terminated.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), for example, the freeze limit flag is set based on the fact that the 10th re-game winning is established in the special lip AB overlapping 1 and 2 winning games. It is preferable that the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like provides notification indicating that the pseudo addition notification effect is not generated (indicated as “actual addition mode” in the figure). Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the state in which the pseudo additional notification effect is not generated can be canceled by performing the above-mentioned specific operation mode. It is good to say.

By doing so, the freeze limit flag is unintentionally set, or the freeze limit flag is set and then the mind is changed. The freeze effect does not occur against the player's intention. You can reduce the number of scenes.

In this case, the operation for clearing the freeze limit flag is less difficult than the operation for setting the freeze limit flag, so that a player with a low skill level of the game unintentionally freezes. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of not being able to clear the flag, such as when the restriction flag is set.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the mode of the pseudo additional notification effect in the restricted target bonus is different. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-addition process in BB according to the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, first, in step S5001, a process of grasping the remaining number of games ZG in the attack mode (more specifically, the number of continuous attack modes G3) is executed. Then, in step S5002, the pseudo-addition lottery process is executed. In the seventh pseudo-addition table in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, the number of notification games selected when performing the pseudo-addition notification effect is set to be different depending on the number of remaining games ZG. Specifically, when the number of remaining games ZG is less than 50, the pseudo additional notification effect is not generated, and as the number of remaining games ZG increases, the pseudo additional notification effect is likely to occur. Has been done. Further, as the number of remaining games ZG increases, it becomes easier to select a pseudo additional notification effect of a large number of games.

In step S5003, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-addition lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S5002. If not won, the first pseudo-effect processing for pseudo-freezing is executed in step S5004, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in step S5005, and then the pseudo-addition processing during BB is terminated. .. In this case, similarly to step S4103 and step S4204, a pseudo freeze effect is generated according to the disconnection counter.

When it is determined in step S5003 that the pseudo-addition lottery has been won, it is determined in step S5006 whether or not the pseudo-addition notification effect of 30 games has been won. If the 30 games have been won, the process proceeds to step S5007 and the process of setting the first freeze flag is executed. In the following step S5008, a process of adding 30 to the pre-addition counter MG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The pre-addition counter MG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games for which a pseudo addition notification effect is performed. In the following step S5009, a process of adding 30 to the display remaining number counter HG is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S5006, it is determined in step S5010 whether or not the pseudo-addition notification effect of 50 games has been won. If the 50 games have been won, the process proceeds to step S5011 to execute the process of setting the second freeze flag. Then, in step S5012, a process of adding 50 to the preload counter MG is executed, and in step S5013, a process of adding 50 to the display remaining counter HG is executed.

The case of making a negative determination in step S5010 means that the player has won the pseudo-additional notification effect of 100 games. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5014 to execute the process of setting the third freeze flag. Then, in step S5015, a process of adding 100 to the preload counter MG is executed, and in step S5016, a process of adding 100 to the display remaining counter HG is executed.

After executing any of the processes of step S5009, step S5013, and step S5014, in step S5017, an additional notification effect of the number of games added to the display remaining counter HG in each of the above processes is performed. An addition command including information is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in step S5005, and then the pseudo-addition process during BB ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of the value of the post-addition counter BG, in the third winning combination winning game in the BB of the restricted target bonus, a pseudo extra-addition notification effect is generated by lottery. Therefore, there may be a difference between the remaining number of games ZG in the actual attack mode and the remaining number counter HG for display, and the remaining number counter HG for display may be larger than the actual number of remaining games ZG for display.

Next, the additional notification process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 106.

In the present embodiment, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the preload counter MG has a value larger than 0. If it is larger than 0, in step S5102, it is determined whether or not the value of the pre-addition counter MG is larger than the number of additional games this time. If it is large, the process proceeds to step S5103 to execute a process of subtracting the number of additional games this time from the pre-addition counter MG, and then ends the main addition notification process. In this case, the additional notification does not occur in this game, and the post-addition notification process is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5102 that the number of additional games this time is equal to or greater than the advance counter MG, the process proceeds to step S5104. In step S5104, a process of subtracting the value of the add-on counter MG from the number of additional games this time is executed. Then, in step S5105, a process of clearing the preload counter MG to 0 is executed.

When it is determined in step S5101 that the pre-loading counter MG is 0, or after the processing of step S5105 is executed, the processing for immediate loading notification and the post-loading notification is executed in steps S5106 to S5112. Therefore, the processing for additional notification is terminated. The processing of steps S5106 to S5112 is the same as the processing of steps S3001 to S3007.

That is, the number of notification games of the additional notification effect pseudo-generated in the pseudo-addition notification processing in BB is stored as the pre-addition counter MG. Then, based on the additional opportunity generated after that, the number of additional games this time is subtracted from the advance counter MG, and when the additional counter MG becomes 0, the remaining number of games is added. That is, the pseudo additional notification effect is executed first, and when an actual addition trigger occurs, the amount of the additional notification effect executed earlier is compensated. By doing so, it is possible to generate a pseudo additional notification effect regardless of the value of the post-addition counter BG, and it is possible to diversify the generation pattern. In the following description, the pseudo-additional notification effect is also referred to as a pre-additional notification effect in relation to the post-additional notification effect.

The second section display process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 107.

In the present embodiment, similarly to the processing of steps S1801 to S1809, in steps S5201 to S5209, based on the upper limit (1500) of the advantageous section game number AG or the digestion of the number of continuous games in the attack mode and the challenge mode. Then, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed. However, in the present embodiment, the processing when the affirmative determination is made in step S5209 and the advantageous section is ended based on the digestion of the number of continuous games in the attack mode and the challenge mode is different.

That is, when an affirmative determination is made in step S5209, it is determined in step S5210 whether or not the display remaining counter HG is larger than 0. When the display remaining counter HG is larger than 0, a special effect command is output to the display control device 81 in step S5212 after the process of clearing the display remaining counter HG to 0 is executed in step S5211. Execute the process to set as. If a negative determination is made in step S5210, or after the process of step S5212 is executed, the process proceeds to step S5205, and a process of clearing the advantageous section game number AG to 0 is executed. The processing after step S5205 is as described above.

That is, as described above, when the advance notification effect is generated and the addition trigger occurs later, the advance counter MG is subtracted to compensate for the number of notification games for the advance notification effect. On the other hand, if the additional opportunity does not occur, or even if the additional opportunity occurs, the number of additional games does not make up for the number of notified games (the pre-addition counter MG does not become 0), the actual remaining. The attack mode or the like ends in a state where the number of remaining counters for display HG is larger than the number of games ZG. That is, before the remaining number counter HG for display reaches 0, the actual number of remaining games ZG may become 0 and the attack mode or the like may end.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when such a situation occurs, a special effect is generated. The special effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. 108 shows a special effect table stored in various table storage areas 105a, and FIG. 109 shows an outline of a special effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65.

When the display control device 81 generates a special effect, the display control device 81 controls the end effect at the end of the attack mode so as to be different from the normal effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), when the end effect at the end of the attack mode is a normal effect, the number of continuous games in the attack mode this time (“number of games” in the figure” is displayed together with the display that the attack mode has ended. (Notation) and the number of medals won in this attack mode (display of "get number" in the figure) are displayed.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of effects are set as special effects. For example, when the special effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), in the end effect at the end of the attack mode, the attack mode is used. Along with displaying the number of continuous games and the number of medals won, a predetermined character (in the figure, a military character holding a weapon) is displayed. Further, for example, when the special effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 109 (c), in the end effect at the end of the attack mode, the number of continuous games in the attack mode and the number of medals won are displayed, and the above special effect A is performed. A character different from the character in the case of (in the figure, a military character who raises a sword by holding a weapon in his hand) is displayed.

In the effect setting process at the end of the attack mode in the display control device 81, which of the special effect A and the special effect B is selected differs depending on the value of the display remaining counter HG at the end and the set value. Is set to. As shown in FIG. 108, when the remaining number counter HG for display is 0, the special effect A and the special effect B are not selected, and the normal effect (FIG. 109 (a)) is selected as the effect at the end of the attack mode. To. When the remaining number counter HG for display is 1 to 9, the selection rate between the normal effect and the special effect A differs depending on the set value. More specifically, in the case of setting 1 or setting 2, the normal effect and the special effect A are selected by 50% each. In the case of setting 3 or setting 4, the normal effect is selected at 40%, and the special effect A is selected at 60%. With setting 5 or setting 6, the normal effect is selected at 30%, and the special effect A is selected at 70%. That is, it is set so that the selection rate of the special effect A increases as the set value increases, and when the attack mode ends in a situation where the remaining number counter HG for display is 1 to 9, the special effect A is set. The more is selected, the higher the setting can be expected.

When the remaining number counter HG for display is 10 or more, the set value is set so as to be easier to narrow down than when the remaining number counter HG for display is less than 10. That is, when the remaining number counter HG for display is 10 to 99, if the setting is 1 or 2, the normal effect is selected at 60%, and the special effect A is selected at 40%. In the case of setting 3 or setting 4, the normal effect is selected at 10%, the special effect A is selected at 70%, and the special effect B is selected at 20%. In the case of setting 5 or setting 6, the normal effect is not selected, the special effect A is selected at 60%, and the special effect B is selected at 40%. That is, when the attack mode ends in the situation where the remaining number counter HG for display is 10 to 99, it becomes possible to determine that the setting is 3 or more when the special effect B is selected, and the normal effect is selected. And it can be determined that the setting is 4 or less. Further, when the special effect A is selected, the possibility of setting 3 or setting 4 is high, and when the special effect B is selected, the possibility of setting 5 or setting 6 is high.

When the remaining number counter HG for display is 100 or more, if setting 1 or setting 2, the normal effect is selected at 90%, and the special effect A is selected at 10%. In the case of setting 3 or setting 4, the normal effect is not selected, the special effect A is selected at 90%, and the special effect B is selected at 10%. In the case of setting 5 or setting 6, the normal effect is not selected, the special effect A is selected at 10%, and the special effect B is selected at 90%. That is, when the attack mode ends in a situation where the remaining number counter HG for display is 100 or more, it can be determined that the setting 1 or the setting 2 is set when the normal effect is selected. Further, when the special effect A is selected, the possibility of setting 3 or setting 4 is high, and when the special effect B is selected, the possibility of setting 5 or setting 6 is high, and it is easy to narrow down the setting. Is easier than the situation where the remaining number counter HG for display is less than 100.

As described above, as a result of the advance notification effect, there is a discrepancy between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual remaining game number ZG, and the attack mode ends even if the display remaining number counter HG does not become 0. However, in such a situation, a special effect that allows the setting value to be narrowed down can occur. In this way, the disappointment that the attack mode ends before the display remaining counter HG becomes 0 can be compensated for by the joy of being able to narrow down the set values.

A situation in which the advance notification effect is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 110.

As shown in FIG. 110A, when the attack mode is started as an advantageous section at the timing of te1, the initial number of games in the attack mode is input to the remaining number of games ZG and the remaining number counter for display HG. Is also entered with the same number of initial games. After that, each time the game is exhausted, the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG are subtracted.

When the restricted target bonus is started at the timing of te2, the advance notification effect may occur during the bonus state up to the timing of te5. For example, when the advance notification effect occurs at the timing of te3 or te4, the remaining number counter HG for display is added, but since this effect is pseudo, the actual addition of the remaining number of games ZG is performed. Not done. As already described, the advance notification effect is also an additional notification effect accompanied by various red 7-match freeze effects, and the freeze effect occurs at the start of reel rotation of the next game of the third winning combination winning game in BB.

When the bonus ends at the timing of te5, the subtraction of the remaining number of games ZG and the remaining number counter HG for display is restarted every time the game is exhausted. Then, when an actual addition opportunity occurs at the timing of te6 or te7, the number of notification games is supplemented by the advance notification effect at the timing of te3 or te4, and in the figure, the remaining number counter HG for display and the rest The gap with the number of games ZG is eliminated. As a result, when the remaining number of games ZG becomes 0 at the timing of te8 and the attack mode ends, the remaining number counter HG for display also becomes 0.

As shown in FIG. 110 (b), when the attack mode is started as an advantageous section at the timing of tf1, the initial number of games in the attack mode is input as in FIG. 110 (a), and then the game. Each time the game is exhausted, the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG are subtracted.

When the restricted target bonus is started at the timing of tf2, the advance notification effect may occur during the bonus state up to the timing of tf5. For example, when the advance notification effect occurs at the timing of tf3 or tf4, the remaining number counter HG for display is added, but since this effect is pseudo, the actual addition of the remaining number of games ZG is performed. Not done. These advance notification effects are the same as the advance notification effects at the timings of te3 and te4.

When the bonus ends at the timing of tf5, the subtraction of the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG is restarted every time the game is exhausted. In FIG. 110 (b), an actual addition trigger occurs at the timing of tf6, and the number of notification games is supplemented by the advance notification effect at the timing of tf3, while the advance notification effect at the timing of tf4. It shows the case where the compensation of the number of notification games was not performed in. In this case, when the remaining number of games ZG becomes 0 at the timing of tf7 and the attack mode ends, the remaining number counter HG for display is not 0, and the notification game in the advance notification effect at the timing of tf4. The attack mode will end with only a few remaining. In this case, the remaining number counter HG for display is forcibly subtracted to 0 in the end game, a special effect is generated, and a set value is suggested.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Regardless of the value of the post-addition counter BG, the occurrence rate of the additional notification effect shifts to the restricted target bonus due to the configuration in which the pseudo additional notification effect is generated during the restricted target bonus in which the additional lottery is restricted. It does not depend on the situation and can be produced with a higher degree of freedom.

The difference between the remaining game number display ZGP and the actual remaining game number ZG due to the advance notification effect is compensated for by an additional opportunity that may occur later. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of scenes in which the attack mode ends with the above deviation occurring, and the effect of the advance notification effect (the effect of determining that the actual addition is being performed) is more preferable. It can be demonstrated.

The advance notification effect is likely to occur when the number of remaining games in the attack mode is large, and is unlikely to occur when the number of remaining games is small. By doing so, it is possible to generate an advance notification effect according to the ease with which the above compensation is performed. In other words, in situations where compensation cannot be performed, such as when the number of remaining games in the attack mode is small, by avoiding the advance notification effect as much as possible, the scene where the attack mode ends with the above deviation occurring can be seen. Can be reduced.

When the attack mode ends with the above deviation occurring, the setting value suggestive effect is generated as a special effect. This makes it possible to follow the disappointment that the attack mode ends before the remaining game number display ZGP on the display becomes 0.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, another form of displaying the number of games to be notified by the advance notification effect will be described. That is, in the third embodiment, the number of games notified by the advance notification effect is added to the display remaining number counter HG, and is distinguished from the display that does not include the advance notification effect as the remaining game number display ZGP. In this modified example, the display is made indistinguishable from the display that does not take into account the pre-advanced notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 111A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the number of games for the advance notification separately from the remaining game number display ZGP. In the figure, the display of the number of games for the advance notification is displayed as "? Number of games". In this case, when the display control device 81 grasps that the current additional notification effect is the advance notification effect based on the additional command received from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 does not display the number of remaining games ZGP but the first. The display of the number of games for the additional notification is configured to be updated by adding the number of additional games this time. Then, the remaining game number display ZGP is subtracted and updated by 1 for each game digestion, while the game number display for the advance notification is not subtracted for each game digestion. Further, when the addition of the number of games occurs after that and the addition notification effect is restricted, the change of the display of the remaining game number display ZGP is also restricted as in the third embodiment, and the advance notification portion is further restricted. The display of the number of games is not changed. Then, when the remaining game number display ZGP reaches a predetermined number (1), of the game number display for the pre-addition notification, the supplemented portion is added to the remaining game number display ZGP as a post-addition notification effect. It is good to have a configuration that does.

By doing so, it is possible to clearly understand that the number of games added by the advance notification effect is an undetermined amount. On the other hand, by limiting the additional notification at the time of subsequent additional winning, the undetermined portion is displayed as it is, and it is not possible to determine whether or not the additional notification effect has been compensated. , It is possible to make people interested in whether or not the unconfirmed amount is confirmed, it is possible to appropriately increase the attention of each game that does not generate additional notification, and it is possible to entertain the attack mode until the end. Will be.

In addition, when an additional opportunity occurs, the mode of displaying the number of games for the advance notification may be changed. For example, when an additional opportunity occurs, the color, shape, and background of the number of games displayed for the advance notification may be changed according to the expected degree of addition. By doing so, when the number of remaining games display ZGP reaches a predetermined value, it is possible to detect in advance the expected occurrence of the post-addition notification effect for the amount of compensation.

In addition, regarding the display of the number of games for the advance notification, not only the number of notification games for which the advance notification effect was performed, but also the number of notification games for the additional notification effect that was actually won is partially added (by lottery, etc.). It may be configured to be used. By doing so, the display of the number of games for the advance notification is not displayed only for the undetermined amount, and it is possible to increase the expectation that the display of the number of games will be added after the fact.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, as in the third embodiment, the number of notification games of the advance notification effect is added to the remaining game number display ZGP and updated, and then the display of the remaining game number display ZGP is displayed. It is possible to change to a special display where it is difficult to determine the number of games.

In FIG. 111 (b), the display (numerical display) of the numerical portion indicating the number of games of the remaining game number display ZGP is shown as "???" as a special display, and the advantageous section ends in what game later. Or, it is difficult or impossible to determine how many games will be the trigger game for the additional notification. For example, in the display control device 81, when the advance notification effect is generated, a change lottery is performed, and when the change lottery is won, the numerical display is changed to the special display. By doing so, even if the advantageous section ends without compensation for the advance notification, it becomes difficult to detect the end game in advance, and the player feels a sense of loss. Can be reduced.

It is preferable that the change to the special display is performed in the game in which the number of at least the number of games for the advance notification is shown in the number part of the remaining game number display ZGP. For example, in a game in which the display control device 81 performs a process of grasping the value of the remaining game number display ZGP in each game, and displays a numerical value (for example, 150) indicating a specific value (for example, 150) that is equal to or greater than the number of games for the advance notification. , The above-mentioned change lottery may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to change from the numerical display to the special display even if the advance notification amount is not completely compensated.

Further, even if the advance notification effect does not occur, the number display of the remaining game number display ZGP may be changed to the above specific display in the game in which the predetermined number display (for example, "0150") is used. good. In this way, even if the number of games is counted from the display before the change to the specific display, the game may end with the number of games as counted, and the remaining game number display ZGP is the undetermined amount due to the advance notification effect. It is possible to weaken the impression that the numerical display includes.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the configuration of the addition notification processing when the addition trigger occurs after the advance notification effect is performed is different. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing a part of the additional notification process in this modification.

In step S5301, it is determined whether or not the preload counter MG is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S5302, and it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the addition this time is a transition trigger. If it is not a transition trigger, that is, if an additional winning is won based on a so-called normal winning combination such as a push order bell or a push order replay, the above steps S5102 to S5105 are performed in steps S5303 to S5306. Similarly to the above, the process of subtracting the number of additional games this time from the pre-addition counter MG is performed. In step S5302, if an additional winning role is won based on a so-called rare role that is a transition trigger and has a relatively low winning probability such as a strong cherry or a weak watermelon, the process proceeds to step S5106 and subtraction from the advance counter MG is performed. Instead, the process (step S5106 to step S5112) for adding and notifying the number of games of the game itself is executed.

From the point that the additional lottery at the time of winning the rare role is easier to win than the additional lottery at the time of winning the normal role, in the rare role winning game, there is a great expectation that the additional notification effect will occur. Conceivable. Based on such a premise, in the above configuration, the addition based on the normal role with a high appearance rate in each game is used to supplement the advance notification effect, and the addition based on the rare role with a low appearance rate in each game is used. , The configuration is such that the additional notification is performed as it is without compensating for the additional notification effect. As a result, in a game in which there is a great expectation that the additional notification effect will occur, the game will be difficult for the player to notice without giving a sense of loss or discomfort that the additional notification effect will not occur. It is possible to compensate for the number of notification games for the on-board notification effect.

Depending on the winning combination at the time of the additional winning after the advance notification effect is generated, whether or not it can be used to compensate for the advance notification effect is different, but the result that triggers the advance notification effect (third role in BB). ) And the situation do not affect the judgment of whether or not it will be used for compensation at the time of additional winning. That is, it can be said that the determination of whether or not to be used for compensation at the time of the subsequent addition winning is a process performed independently of the content of the advance notification effect except for the value of the advance counter MG. By doing so, it is difficult to cause an event that the content of the effect at the time of the subsequent additional winning is significantly different depending on the content of the advance notification effect, and the effect of the advance notification effect is achieved by not giving a sense of discomfort to the effect. Can be enhanced.

It should be noted that, depending on the number of remaining games ZG in the attack mode, the ease of being used to supplement the advance notification effect at the time of the additional winning may be different. Even in this way, the judgment of compensation can be made independently of the production content of the advance notification effect. In this case, the smaller the number of remaining games ZG is, the easier it is to be used for compensation, so that it is possible to reduce the number of events in which the divergence remains when the number of remaining games ZG becomes 0.

<Modification example 4>
In this modification, based on the third embodiment in which the number of notification games of the notification effect is added to the remaining number of games display ZGP (the value of the remaining number of games display ZGP becomes equal to the display remaining number counter HG). In a game in which the display remaining number counter HG has a predetermined value, the number of notification games of the advance notification effect is subtracted from the value of the remaining game number display ZGP. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing a post-addition notification process in this modification.

If it is determined in step S5401 that the interval is advantageous, the subtraction process of the display remaining counter HG is executed in step S5402. Then, in step S5403, it is determined whether or not the display remaining counter HG after the subtraction process is the first predetermined number (102, 52, 32). The first predetermined number is a number corresponding to the number of games (100, 50, 30) that can be notified by the advance notification effect, and more specifically, the number of games that can be notified by the advance notification effect is notified. It is the number obtained by adding the number of games (2) for. When it is determined in step S5403 that the number is the first predetermined number, it is determined in step S5404 whether or not the post-addition flag is set. When the post-addition flag is set, in step S5405, it is determined whether or not the post-addition counter BG is larger than the second predetermined number (100). The second predetermined number in step S5405 is set to be a relatively large value as the number of additional games in the one additional opportunity, and the case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S5405 is after a relatively large number of games. This is the case when a ride notification occurs.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5405, a process for generating a freeze effect is performed at the start of rotation of the next game in step S5406. Specifically, the process of setting the fourth freeze flag and inputting 1 to the freeze counter FC is executed. Although detailed description of the process is omitted, in the rotation effect process (FIG. 74) in this modification, when the freeze counter FC becomes 0 and the fourth freeze flag is set, the fourth freeze flag is cleared. At the same time, a delay freeze effect is set to delay the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R over a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec). Therefore, in the next game in which the fourth freeze flag is set, the start of rotation of the reel is delayed for a predetermined period. In the following step S5407, a process for controlling the display control device 81 is executed so that the freeze effect for intermediate addition is executed in the next game. More specifically, the freeze command for intermediate addition is output to the display control device 81. Further, in step S5407, in the next game, the process of adding the value of the post-addition counter BG to the display remaining counter HG and subtracting the added amount from the post-addition counter BG and the case where the post-addition counter BG becomes 0. Is a process for clearing the post-addition flag (for example, a process for setting a flag for it).

The freeze effect for intermediate addition will be described with reference to FIG. 114.

The freeze effect for intermediate addition is an effect performed during the above-mentioned predetermined period in which the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is delayed. In this effect, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the remaining game number display ZGP in the auxiliary display unit 65, which is shown in FIG. 114 (a), is added and updated to be changed. In this case, the illusion effect (special notification) shown in FIG. 114 (b) is executed before the display is changed to FIG. 114 (c). In the fantasy production, a male character wrapped in flames is displayed, and a male voice with a thick voice, "You were only looking at a ghost!" Was emitted from the speaker 64 until then. It is explained that the display was a pseudo display. It is more preferable that the dialogue is configured so that characters are also displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. The illusion effect is executed over the predetermined period, and when the predetermined period elapses, the illusion effect ends, and the display after the change of the remaining game number display ZGP in FIG. 114 (c) is obtained. The player can grasp that the illusion effect is generated by delaying the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the illusion effect is performed during a predetermined period in which the start of rotation is delayed and the game operation cannot be performed. By looking at it, you can expect the effect of preventing oversight of the fantasy effect and the effect of improving the degree of attention.

When it is determined in step S5404 that the post-addition flag is not set, it is determined in step S5408 whether or not the pre-addition counter MG is the third predetermined number (100, 50, 30). The third predetermined number is a number corresponding to the number of games (100, 50, 30) that can be notified by the advance notification effect, and more specifically, the number of games that can be notified by the advance notification effect. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S5408 indicates the case where the number of the notification games is not completely compensated after the advance notification effect.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5408, a process for generating a freeze effect is performed at the start of rotation of the next game in step S5409. Specifically, the process of setting the fourth freeze flag and inputting 1 to the freeze counter FC is executed. In the following step S5410, a process for controlling the display control device 81 is executed so that the freeze effect for subtraction is executed in the next game. More specifically, the subtraction freeze command is output to the display control device 81. Further, in step S5410, in the next game, a process of subtracting the value of the advance counter MG from the display remaining counter HG and subtracting the subtracted amount from the advance counter MG is performed (for example, it). Process to set the flag for).

The freeze effect for subtraction will be described with reference to FIG. 114.

The subtraction freeze effect is an effect corresponding to the intermediate addition freeze effect, and the operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the same as that of the intermediate addition freeze effect, but only the display content on the auxiliary display unit 65 is different. It is a production. That is, the subtraction freeze effect is an effect performed during the above-mentioned predetermined period in which the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is delayed based on the fourth freeze flag. In this effect, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), the remaining game number display ZGP in the auxiliary display unit 65, which is shown in FIG. 114 (a), is subtracted and updated to be changed. In this case, the illusion effect (special notification) shown in FIG. 114 (b) is executed before the display is changed to FIG. 114 (d). The illusion effect is as described above, and a notification is given for displaying a male character wrapped in flames and explaining that the previous display was a pseudo display. The difference from the freeze effect for intermediate addition is whether the remaining game number display ZGP is added or subtracted after the illusion effect.

If it is determined in step S5403 that the display remaining number counter HG is not the first predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S5411, and the display remaining number counter HG is set in steps S5411 to S5411 in the same manner as in steps S3104 to S3110. After executing the process for performing the post-addition notification effect when the fourth predetermined number (1) is reached, the post-addition notification process is terminated. The fourth predetermined number is a smaller value than the first predetermined number, and the post-addition notification effect is an effect that can occur in a game after the halfway addition freeze effect and the subtraction freeze effect. If a negative determination is made in any of step S5401 and step S5405, or after any of the processes of step S5407 and step S5410 is executed, the post-addition notification process is terminated as it is.

In this way, when the value of the remaining number counter HG for display becomes the first predetermined number and the remaining game number display ZGP becomes a value corresponding to the number of notified games of the advance notification effect, the freeze effect for intermediate addition or the freeze effect for intermediate addition or Freeze effect for subtraction may occur. In the freeze effect for intermediate addition, the remaining game number display ZGP is significantly added and changed, and in the subtraction freeze effect, the remaining game number display ZGP is significantly subtracted and changed, so it is a happy event for the player. One of the two extremes of absent events will occur. As a result, it is possible to attract attention to the freeze effect for addition and the freeze effect for subtraction, and to raise the feeling of excitement during the illusion effect, which is a turning point, to the climax.

The above-mentioned freeze effect for subtraction occurs when the amount of the advance notification effect is not completely compensated, and when the partial compensation is performed, as shown in the third embodiment. In addition, a special effect is generated and the set value is suggested. That is, the remaining number counter HG for display becomes the first predetermined number, and even if the freeze effect for subtraction does not occur, finally (when the remaining number counter HG for display becomes the fourth predetermined number) for display. The difference between the remaining number counter HG and the remaining number of games ZG can be subtracted. Then, the subtraction amount when the fourth predetermined number is reached is smaller than the subtraction amount when the first predetermined number is reached. Then, if the freeze effect for subtraction can be avoided with the first predetermined number, this time, even if the post-addition notification is generated at the fourth predetermined number, all the compensation is done, or all the compensation is not made. It is expected that a special effect will occur, and it will be possible to create a new playability by utilizing not only the effect of the advance notification effect but also the subtraction of the deviation.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description contents of each embodiment and each modification described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be individually applied to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments and modifications, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) As a restricted target bonus, a difference in winning probability is provided depending on the set value, and a pseudo-addition notification is generated during the restricted target bonus. However, it is sufficient if there is a setting difference in the transition rate of the restricted target bonus, for example. A bonus that is transferred through a transition lottery when the number of winnings or winnings of small winning combinations with different settings reaches a specific number may be a restricted bonus.

(2) When the additional notification effect is generated during the bonus, the additional notification effect is generated at the start of the next game of the game in which the third role in the BB is won. It may be configured to generate an additional notification effect in the game that has become, or it may be configured to generate an additional notification effect in a game a plurality of times after the game in which the third role in the BB is won. However, if the game in which the third role in the BB is won and the game in which the additional notification effect is generated are too far apart, there is a possibility that the third role in the BB will be won again in the meantime. In that respect, at the start of the game in which the third winning combination is won in BB or the next game, the content of the notification is not complicated and is preferable.

In this case, the freeze counter FC, which is executed according to the additional notification effect, may be changed to input the corresponding numerical value. For example, if the freeze effect is to be generated in the game that won the additional lottery, the freeze counter may be used. If 1 is input to FC and a freeze effect is generated after 2 games of the game won in the additional lottery, 3 may be input to the freeze counter FC.

(3) Although the configuration is accompanied by a freeze effect as the additional notification during the bonus, the freeze effect may be generated even when the additional notification is executed in the attack mode other than during the bonus.

(4) Although the restricted target bonus (or restricted non-target bonus) in the first BB and the second BB has been explained, a setting difference is set in the winning probability of the CB, and a pseudo-addition notification effect is generated during the CB state that is the restricted target bonus. It may be configured to make it. In this case, by providing a CB having no setting difference in the winning probability and a CB state having a setting difference, a CB state as a restricted target bonus and a CB state as a restricted non-target bonus will occur. The effect of the relationship between 1BB and 2BB can be expected even in both CB states. This is not limited to CB, but can also be applied to single bonus (SB), middle bonus (MB) and regular bonus (REG) in which the upper limit of the number of remaining payouts is smaller than that of BB.

(5) The restricted target bonus (or restricted non-target bonus) in the first BB and the second BB that shift to the bonus state as the gaming state has been described, but the transition state is not limited to the bonus state and is a predetermined RT state. May be good. That is, in the specific RT state where the transition rate has a setting difference, the execution of the additional lottery may be restricted, and the pseudo-addition notification effect may be executed during the specific RT state. In this case, by not limiting the execution of the additional lottery in the normal RT state where there is no setting difference in the transition rate, the effect of the relationship between the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus can be expected depending on both RT states. ..

(6) Assuming that the addition in the restricted non-target bonus is executed with the winning of the third role in the BB as an opportunity, the pseudo-addition notification effect in the restricted target bonus is executed with the winning of the third role in the BB as an opportunity. However, the configuration may be different between the trigger of the addition in the restricted non-target bonus and the trigger of the pseudo-addition notification effect in the restricted target bonus. For example, the pseudo-addition notification effect in the restricted target bonus may be configured to be performed with the winning of the second role in the BB as an opportunity. In this case, the pseudo-freeze effect in the restricted bonus may be configured to be performed with the winning of the third role in the BB as an opportunity.

(7) The lottery table of each game in the bonus state is shared between the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus, and the same lottery table is used, but a different lottery table may be used. Further, a different lottery table may be used for each game of the first BB state and the second BB state.

(8) The pseudo-addition notification effect is configured to be executed during the restricted target bonus in which the additional lottery is restricted, but it may be executed in a state where the additional lottery is restricted, for example, as a configuration to be executed in the carry-over state. May be good. In this case, since the additional lottery is restricted not only in the carry-over state of the restricted target bonus but also in the carry-over state of the restricted non-target bonus, it can be the execution target of the pseudo-addition notification effect.

(9) The freeze effect generated in the pseudo-addition notification effect and the add-on notification effect is not limited to the above. For example, the freeze effect may be such that the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is delayed over a predetermined period. In this case, the expected degree of the number of games notified in the pseudo-addition notification effect may be different depending on the length of the delayed predetermined period.

(10) In the freeze effect, the "Red 7" symbol alignment is temporarily suspended, but the configuration may not be paused, or the combination of symbols to be paused may be changed. The configuration may be such that the expected degree of the number of additional notification games is suggested by the number of specific symbols (for example, "red 7" symbols) that stop on the effective line.

(11) The number of games to be notified in the pseudo-addition notification effect is not limited to the above, and the number of games to be notified may be less than 30 games, or the number of games to be notified to be larger than 100 games may be notified. May be played, and the range of the number of notified games may differ depending on the situation at the time of bonus transition. By configuring the configuration so that the notification of the number of games smaller than 30 games can be made, it is possible to generate the pseudo-addition notification effect even when the accumulated amount of the post-addition counter BG is small.

(12) In the pseudo-addition notification effect, a freeze effect is generated as a rotation effect process by the main control device 101, and the line where the "Red 7" symbol alignment is temporarily stopped suggests the expected degree of the number of notification games. However, it may be changed as follows.

For example, an operation mode combination is provided in which the winning result differs depending on the order of the stop operations of the stop switches 42 to 44, and when the stop operation is performed in the first order, the first result is won and the second order different from the first order is stopped. When operated, it is assumed that a second result different from the first result is won. Then, the stop roll at the time of winning the first result is, for example, a stop roll at which the "red 7" symbols are aligned on the upward-sloping line L5, and the stop roll at the time of winning the second result is, for example, "red" at the upper line L1. 7 ”It is a stop roll where all the symbols are aligned and stopped. Then, it is assumed that the additional notification effect (pseudo-addition notification effect) is generated based on the winning of the operation mode combination, and whether the order notification of the first order, which is the first result winning, is executed according to the number of games to be notified. , It is determined whether to execute the order notification of the second order which is the second result winning. In this case, regardless of the order of the order notification, it is preferable to generate a stop instruction effect such as "Aim for red 7!" On the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64.

Further, the stop roll at the time of winning the first result is, for example, the stop roll at which the "red 7" symbols are aligned on the right-up line L5, and the stop roll at the time of the second result winning is "red" at the right-up line L5. 7 ”Although the symbol is tempted, the“ Red 7 ”design stops at a position different from the upward-sloping line L5 on a predetermined reel (for example, the final stop reel in the second order), and the stop roll is set to be out of the tempai. When the stop operation is performed in the first order, the "Red 7" symbols are aligned and stopped, and when the stop operation is performed in the second order, the "Red 7" symbols are out of the tempai. Then, when the operation mode combination is won, when the additional lottery is won or when the pseudo-addition notification effect is performed (when there is an unnotified addition that is the target of the pseudo-addition notification effect), the above "Aim for Red 7". When the stop instruction effect such as "!" Is executed and the order notification of the first order is executed and the additional lottery is not won or the pseudo additional notification effect is not generated (unnotified which is the target of the pseudo additional notification effect). (When there is no addition), it is preferable to execute the stop instruction effect and execute the order notification of the second order.

In these cases, as the additional notification effect or the pseudo-addition notification effect, it is preferable to perform the stop instruction effect or the order notification based on the above stop order in place of or in addition to the freeze effect.

Even in this way, the additional notification effect can be enjoyed together with the stop result, and the reliability given to the player is improved as compared with the additional notification effect on the simple display screen. However, for the player who understands the game characteristics of the advantageous section in which the winning combination differs depending on the operation order of the stop operation, the first-order order notification and the second-order order notification are pseudo additional notifications. It can be easily predicted that it is a part of the effect, and it is considered that the additional notification effect accompanied by the freeze effect under the jurisdiction of the main control device 101 can gain the trust of the player.

(13) Although the addition notification process is executed by the main control device 101, it may be executed by the display control device 81. However, when the pseudo addition notification effect is performed by using the drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the value of the post-addition counter BG is set to the control device that performs the drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. It is preferable that the display control device 81 manages the post-addition counter BG (the display control device 81 manages the post-addition counter BG). It is preferable that the display control device 81 manages the drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R performed together with the additional notification effect.

(14) In a configuration in which the generation mode of the pseudo additional notification effect differs depending on the set value, not only the occurrence rate and the number of notification games but also the effect at the time of occurrence (for example, the effect content displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65) is set. The configuration may differ depending on the value. Further, the difference depending on the set value of the generation mode and the ease of narrowing down the set value are not limited to those having the above configuration, and the set value of the generation mode is not limited to the setting value of the generation mode as long as it is a distribution mode that assists the game of predicting the set value. The difference is optional.

(15) By setting the freeze restriction flag, the pseudo additional notification effect accompanied by various red 7-match freeze effects is restricted, but in the pseudo additional notification effect, various red 7-match freeze effects are used. In addition to non-occurrence, the additional notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like may be generated. That is, if the freeze effect that restricts the start and progress of the game operation and control does not occur, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who does not like the game progress to be hindered by the effect.

(16) By setting the freeze limit flag, the execution of the pseudo additional notification effect is restricted, and the additional notification of the limit is executed at the end of the BB, but the limit is executed at the end of the BB. The configuration may be such that the additional notification is not executed. The additional notification for that amount is at least notified in a game in which the remaining number counter HG for display is a predetermined value as a post-addition notification, and the notification at the end of BB causes a substantial difference in the player's advantage. This is because it does not cause it.

(17) Although the freeze limit flag is set according to the stop result of the BB winning game, the freeze limit flag may be set based on the operation of the player. For example, even in a configuration in which the freeze limit flag is set according to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the BB winning game or the BB winning game (for example, the configuration is such that the freeze limit flag is not set if the forward push is performed, and the freeze limit flag is set if the reverse push is performed). Alternatively, the freeze limit flag is set when the length of the period during which the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (ON operation) exceeds a predetermined period (for example, it is set when the stop switch 42 to 44 is pressed and held for 3 seconds or longer). It may be configured to be set based on the operation of other operating means.

In addition, the freeze limit flag is set according to the stop result of the BB winning game to limit the execution of the pseudo additional notification effect, but the control during the BB differs depending on the stop result of the BB winning game. It should be. For example, depending on the stop roll (by setting the flag), the number of sliding frames of the sliding control in the BB is changed, the lottery table in the BB is changed, and the effect content in the BB is changed. There may be.

(18) The freeze restriction flag may be set in advance (before the BB is won). However, in this case, with the operating means (credit input switches 56 to 58, start lever 41, stop switches 42 to 44) used for normal game operations so that they are not unintentionally set by normal game operations. May be configured to set the freeze limit flag using a different operating means.

(19) The freeze limit flag can be cleared by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of BB winning, but the freeze limit flag can also be cleared by the operation of other operation modes or other operation means. good. In this case, it is easier to operate than the operation of setting the freeze limit flag, and it is preferable that the freeze limit flag can be cleared.

(20) If the bonus is won in a role that overlaps with a role that may be missed, and if the stop operation is performed so that the missing role does not occur in the duplicate role winning game (in the case of a missed role winning), the freeze limit flag However, it may be configured to set the freeze limit flag when a miss occurs. By doing so, it is possible to remind players with low skill level of the game and players who want to enjoy the freeze effect of the importance of the stop operation, and to arouse the aspiration of the game operation technique to generate the freeze effect. Is possible. In addition, for players with a high degree of skill in the game, it is possible to select whether to perform a stop operation and generate a freeze effect so as not to cause a dropout, or to generate a dropout and not to generate a freeze effect. I will let you. If a dropout occurs, it becomes difficult to understand the winning trigger, so it becomes difficult to determine whether it is a restricted bonus or a non-restricted bonus, and as a result, it can be a configuration that makes the production entertaining. In other words, the options that are forced on highly skilled players are all options that can entertain some kind of game production, and the players who are eager to advance the game can enjoy the game production. It will be a configuration that can be provided.

(21) By setting the freeze limit flag, all the freeze effects in the bonus are prevented from occurring, but it may be configured to partially occur. For example, when 100 games are selected in the notification game number lottery process (step S4004, etc.), a pseudo-addition notification effect accompanied by a freeze effect (upper red 7-match freeze effect) occurs, and 50 games or 30 games are selected. If this is done, the configuration may be such that freeze does not occur. Even a player who understands that it is a pseudo additional notification effect is considered to be happy with a large amount of additional notification effect, and as described above, a pseudo additional notification for a predetermined number of games or more (100 games or more) is given. If it is a production, if it is configured to be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the freeze restriction flag, an effect that pleases the player to some extent can be expected.

In addition, because the freeze limit flag was set, the freeze effect related to the pseudo-addition notification effect (various red 7-match freeze effect and pseudo-freeze effect) was not generated, but due to another opportunity different from the pseudo-addition notification effect. It is advisable that a freeze effect (for example, a freeze for notifying that a premier role has been won) can occur.

(22) The 9th re-game (special rip A) and the 10th re-game (special rip B) are set as non-restricted bonuses for the special rip A duplications 1 and 2 that are duplicated with the 9th re-game (special rip A). The winning probability is set so that the special lip AB duplications 1 and 2, which are duplicate winnings with), are restricted target bonuses, but these relationships may be reversed. That is, a special lip that is a duplicate winning with the 9th re-game and a special rip that is a duplicate winning with the 9th re-game and the 10th re-game by setting a setting difference in the winning probability of the duplicate A 1 and 2 as a restricted target bonus. The winning probability of AB duplication 1 and 2 may be set as a non-restricted bonus without setting a difference. In this way, the operation of stopping aiming at the 10th re-game winning at the time of winning is an operation for determining that the additional lottery is actually performed, and the additional lottery is actually performed in the above embodiment. Although the operation for determining that the bonus is not performed is an operation with the opposite intention, it is possible to determine whether or not the bonus is subject to restriction.

(23) The pre-addition notification effect and the pseudo-addition notification effect based on the post-addition counter BG may be mixed. That is, even if the post-addition counter BG is sufficiently accumulated when the third winning combination in the BB is won, the pre-addition notification effect may be generated instead of the pseudo-addition notification effect based on the accumulated counter BG.

(24) After performing the pre-addition notification effect, if an additional trigger occurs, the additional notification is restricted as compensation for the pre-addition notification effect, but the advance notification and the post-addition notification are selected. After that, the notification may be restricted on one side when the post-addition notification is selected or when the advance notification is selected, and may not be restricted on the other side (notification is performed and is not used for compensation).

(25) After performing the advance notification effect, the subtraction process when there is a difference between the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG is performed with a predetermined first predetermined number or fourth predetermined number. Although it is configured, the execution lottery may be performed in each game, and the subtraction process may be performed when the execution lottery is won. In this case, it is also possible to realize a playability that makes it enjoyable whether the winning of the execution lottery or the compensation for the advance notification effect (additional winning) is completed first.

(26) The subtraction process after performing the advance notification effect may be executed when the result of the game becomes a specific result. For example, the subtraction process is performed according to the number of times that a specific role that is an additional trigger is won but is not added, or the number of times that a predetermined role (for example, a strong cherry) is won is not won. It may be configured to be executed.

(27) In the case where the bonus and the attack mode are simultaneously won, the advance notification effect may be executed during the carry-over state before the bonus transition. A bonus that can be won at the same time as an attack mode or the like is a non-restricted bonus, and a lottery can be executed in addition to the bonus. On the other hand, even if it is a non-restricted bonus, the additional lottery is restricted in the bonus carry-over state, so there is a gap between the bonus state and the carry-over state in the restricted non-target bonus depending on whether or not the additional lottery is possible. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the advance notification effect is generated during the carry-over state, there is a high possibility that it will be compensated after the fact (attack mode during or after the bonus, etc.), and it will be possible to fill the above gap. , It is possible to appropriately secure the effect balance by using the advance notification effect.

(28) In the restricted target bonus, not only the additional lottery but also the execution of the mode transition lottery is restricted depending on the situation at the time of transition, and the result of the mode transition lottery may be notified in a pseudo manner. In this case, for example, at the time of winning the third role in the BB in the restricted target bonus won in the normal mode, a right-up red 7-match freeze effect corresponding to winning the attack mode transition lottery is generated. Then, after the end of the restricted bonus, an effect that the attack mode is being prepared (notification that the status is waiting for promotion replay winning) is executed, and if the attack mode is won during the preparation, it is as it is. Move to attack mode (generate push order notification when promotion replay is won), and if attack mode is not won during the preparation (if attack mode is not won over a predetermined number of games), for example, the above illusion effect is generated. After that, it may be configured to end the production during preparation.

(29) Although the configuration in which the suggestion of the set value can be executed by the pseudo-addition notification effect in the restricted target bonus with a setting difference is shown, the suggestion of the set value can be executed regardless of the pseudo-addition notification effect in the restricted target bonus. In this way, it is possible to add a privilege to the restricted bonus as an alternative to the superiority of the restricted bonus over the restricted non-target bonus. In addition, on the premise that the suggested value of the set value can occur in both the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus, the restricted target bonus has a higher occurrence rate of the set value suggestion than the restricted non-target bonus. It is possible to add a privilege to the restricted bonus even if the configuration is such that the setting value is easily suggested.

(30) The configuration is such that the presence or absence of the additional notification effect is different depending on the stop result at the time of winning the bonus, but it is sufficient if some effect mode in the bonus is different. The background color of the production may be different.

(31) Although the freeze limit flag is set according to the stop result at the time of winning the bonus, the freeze limit flag may be set depending on the game between the winning of the bonus and the winning.

(32) The freeze limit flag may be set according to the stop result during the bonus. That is, both when the 2nd role in BB is won and when the 3rd role in BB is won are common in that the 9th re-game is won, and the 3rd role in BB is the 10th re-game. The difference is that the second role in BB does not win the 10th replay. That is, if the player succeeds in establishing the 10th re-game prize, it can be determined that it is based on the winning of the third role in the BB, and the pseudo freeze is based on the third role in the BB. It is possible to determine whether it is a thing or a thing based on the second role in BB. Therefore, if a stop roll that is the 10th re-game prize appears during the bonus, the freeze limit flag is set, and in particular, if the configuration is such that the occurrence of pseudo-freeze is restricted, the additional lottery is not executed. It is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity caused by performing a pseudo-freeze even though the is determined.

(33) When the game number addition lottery in the attack mode is won, the addition notification process is executed after the game number addition process is executed, but the addition is added before the game number addition process is executed. It may be configured to execute the notification process. That is, the notification timing may be determined before adding the number of additional games this time to the number of remaining games in the attack mode. In this case, for example, when the post-addition notification is selected, the post-addition counter BG may be added in the game, and the number of games may be added in the game in which the post-addition notification is executed. .. When determining whether or not the sum of the number of executed games and the number of remaining games in the attack mode has reached the upper limit number of games, the upper limit number of games is taken into consideration by taking into account the value of the add-on counter BG for the amount for which the above-mentioned add-on notification is selected. It is preferable to have a configuration in which it is determined whether or not the value has been reached.

(34) The post-addition lottery table is not limited to the above. For example, depending on the value of the post-addition counter BG and the type of the specific combination, either the post-addition notification or the immediate addition notification is selected, but both the post-addition notification and the immediate addition notification are selected. In some cases, the number of additional games at the time of the additional winning may be allocated to the post-addition notification and the immediate addition notification. In this case, the ratio allocated to the post-addition notification and the immediate addition notification may be different depending on the number of additional games, the specific combination, the value of the post-addition counter BG, and the like.

Specifically, for example, when 100 games are added to the additional notification based on the strong cherry winning, 50 games are allocated to the post-addition notification and the remaining 50 games are allocated to the immediate addition notification, but based on the strong cherry winning. If the additional 30 games are won, the allocation ratio may be different depending on the number of additional games, such that all 30 games are allocated to the immediate addition notification and not to the post-addition notification. In addition, when 100 games are added to the additional winning based on the weak cherry winning, 80 games are allocated to the additional notification, and the remaining 20 games are allocated to the immediate additional notification. The allocation ratio may be different depending on the type of combination. Further, in the case where the additional 100 games are won based on the strong cherry winning, if the additional counter BG is 30 or more, 50 games are allocated to the additional notification and the remaining 50 games are allocated to the immediate notification. However, if the post-addition counter BG is less than 30, the allocation ratio may be different depending on the value of the post-addition counter BG, such that all 100 games are allocated to the post-addition notification.

(35) As the section display, the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display unit N9 have been described as an example, but the configuration of the section display is not limited to the above. The section display may be configured to clearly display whether or not it is an advantageous section by at least switching the display mode. For example, the arrangement position and the size of the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display unit N9. Now, the display mode (lighting mode) in the advantageous section may be different from the above. For example, the operation unit of the start lever 41 and a part or all of the predetermined credit input switches 56 to 58 are configured to be capable of light emission control, and the operation unit and the credit input switches 56 to 58 emit light based on the advantageous section. It may be configured to secure the function as a section display by a predetermined operation unit. As described above, in the configuration in which the display of the section display is started at the timing before the operation of the next game of the start game is allowed, the above-mentioned predetermined operation unit is the operation target at the end of the start timing. By displaying the advantageous section at or near the predetermined operation unit as described above, it becomes easier to grasp the transition to the advantageous section.

Further, the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 may include a display unit having a function of a section display. In this case, at least the display unit having the function of the section display is preferably controlled by the main control device 101, and the auxiliary display unit 65 itself is controlled by the main control device 101 to perform the function of the section display. It may be configured to be controlled by the main control device 101 together with the display unit having the display unit.

Further, as a section display, an accessory that can be displaced between a predetermined first position and a second position different from the first position is provided at a position (for example, the front portion of the gaming machine) that can be visually recognized by the player. Notifying whether or not the section is advantageous depending on the display mode including the accessory by arranging the accessory in the first position and the display mode including the accessory by arranging the accessory in the second position. It may be configured.

(36) In the instruction monitor 68, the display mode of the push order information (“1” to “6”) using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is not limited to the above. For example, as the push order combination, the winning combination differs depending on the stop switches 42 to 44 that are first stopped, and the stop order of the second reel and the third reel includes a three-choice pushing order combination that is not related to the winning combination. In this case, the push order information (display of "7") displayed by lighting the first display segment N1, the sixth display segment N6, and the seventh display segment N7, and the first display segments N1 to No. 7 The push order information (display of "8") displayed by lighting the display segment N7, the first display segment N1 to the third display segment N3, the sixth display segment N6, and the seventh display segment N7. The push order information (display of "9") displayed by lighting the segment N7 may be configured to notify the push order of these three-choice push order combinations.

(37) In the instruction monitor 68, the timing at which the push order information using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is turned off is not limited to the third reel stop ON operation, and is at least operated by the push order notification. It suffices if the push order notification is performed until the stop switches 42 to 44 to be pressed are grasped (the push order information may be displayed). For example, it may be at the time of the second reel stop ON operation or at the time of the second reel stop OFF operation. Further, when the push order notification of the three-choice push order combination is performed, it may be the first reel stop ON operation or the first reel stop OFF operation. Further, the light may be turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time of these operations.

Further, the timing may be later than the time when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the timing may be the time when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed, or a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) is set from the time when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. It may be configured to turn off after a lapse of time, or it may be at the end of medal payout.

(38) The instruction monitor 68 may be used in combination with the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62. In these cases, the push order notification is performed on each display unit 60 to 62 at the timing when the push order notification is performed, while the original display of each display unit 60 to 62 is displayed at the timing when the push order notification is not performed. It is good to have a configuration to do.

When it is also used as the credit display unit 60, the credit display unit 60 may display the credit at least until the bet operation is performed, and then the push order notification (based on the operation of the start lever 41) may be performed. The push order notification ends at least before the timing when the number of medals acquired (paid out) in the game increases and is updated (the timing when the medal payout starts) (the push order information is turned off). For example, it is preferable that the configuration is completed by the time of the third reel stop ON operation, and the medal payout is switched to the credit display when the medal payout is started.

The remaining payout number display unit 61 is a display unit that displays the number of remaining payouts in the bonus. There are two games, one in which the remaining payout number is displayed by the remaining payout number display unit 61 and the other in which the push order notification is performed. It may not be duplicated. In this case, the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 may be generated during the bonus.

When it is also used as the payout number display unit 62, it is preferable that the push order notification ends at least before the payout medal number display of the game is started on the payout number display unit 62. For example, when the push order notification is terminated (the push order information is turned off) when the third reel stop ON operation is performed and the payout combination is won, the number of payouts is displayed at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation. It is good to do. Such a configuration may be applied to the remaining payout number display unit 61.

Further, the push order notification may be performed by using these display units 60 to 62. In the game panel 25, the credit display unit 60 is arranged side by side, the remaining payout number display unit 61 is arranged in the middle, and the payout number display unit 62 is arranged in the right side (FIG. 1). If the left stop switch 42 should be operated, the credit display unit 60 is displayed, if the middle stop switch 43 should be operated, the remaining payout number display unit 61 is displayed, and if the right stop switch 44 should be operated, the payout is made. It may be configured to notify the pressing order by displaying the number display unit 62 or the like. In this case, as described above, from after the bet operation is performed to the time when the third reel stop is turned ON, the push order is notified on the display units 60 to 62 for any of the display units 60 to 62. Even so, where the original display function is guaranteed, the period from the time when such a bet operation is performed to the time when the third reel stop ON operation is performed is the period during which the push order notification is performed by these display units 60 to 62, and other than that. In the period of, it is preferable to configure the original display of each display unit 60 to 62.

(39) The advantageous section may be defined as follows. A section in which push order notification corresponding to a prize related to the maximum number of payouts is generated at least once. More specifically, in a push order bell in which 9 medals, 3 medals or 0 medals can be paid out depending on the stop order, a push order notification that causes 9 medals to be paid out is generated at least once. Section.

(40) In addition to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, CBs (1st CB to 4th CB) are provided as transitional combinations whose small winning combination probabilities can change due to the transition of the gaming state, but in addition to or in place of these transitional combinations. Other transition roles may be provided. As other transition roles, MB (middle bonus) that does not have a limit on the number of sliding frames, REG (regular bonus) that has a smaller maximum number of acquisitions than the 1st BB and 2nd BB, and 1 game JAC game can be executed. SB (single bonus) etc. can be considered. In addition, the maximum number of acquisitions for each bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit acquisition number in the CB state may be 3 cards, which is less than 15 cards, or 0 cards.

(41) Although the medals are not paid out at the time of winning the transitional combination (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB), the medals may be paid out.

(42) In order to prevent a difference in the probability and advantage of the transition lottery to the attack mode and the additional lottery depending on the set value, the lottery is performed based on the lottery result with no particular setting difference, but the setting difference. Although the lottery is performed based on the result of a certain lottery, the setting difference may be prevented by adjusting the benefits at the time of winning (the winning probability of the privilege, the transition lottery, etc. and the number of additional games). For example, in setting 1, a specific winning combination is provided with a probability of winning with a probability of 1/100, and in setting 6 with a probability of winning with a probability of 1/10. In the case of setting 6, it is set to 1/2, and in setting 6, it is set to 1/20. By doing so, the total additional winning probability is 1/200 regardless of any set value, and there is no setting difference.

(43) Transition to Attack Mode, etc. By winning the lottery or additional lottery, it is basically decided that an event that is advantageous to the player will occur, but for example, an end lottery such as the attack mode may be performed. However, it may be configured to perform a subtraction lottery for the number of continuous games.

(44) Although the game in the situation where the number of bets is 3 has been mainly described, the above invention may be applied to a 1-bet game in which the number of bets is 1 or a 2-bet game in which the number of bets is 2. For example, in the case of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section in the 1-bet game or the 2-bet game, and the case of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section in the 3-bet game, the display start mode table of the section display can be displayed. By making them different, the display start mode of the section display may be different.

(45) The number of forced termination games in the advantageous section is not limited to the above number (1500), and may be larger or smaller than the above number (1500).

(46) As the compulsory termination condition of the advantageous section, not only the maximum number of games (1500) may be exhausted, but also the maximum number of medals to be paid out (3000) may be provided in addition to or in place of the maximum number of games (1500).

(47) The additional lottery table and the number of additional games The lottery table is not limited to the above, and the winning probability, the range and the average of the number of additional games at the time of winning, etc. are arbitrary. For example, as the number of additional games, the number of games (2000 games, etc.) exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous section may be selected.

(48) Although the VB mode as a pseudo bonus is configured to be able to shift only during the attack mode, it may be configured to be transitionable even from the normal mode. In this case, if the lottery for transition to the VB mode is won, the winning game is set as the start game, and the display of the section display is started at a timing before the operation of the next game of the start game is allowed. And it is sufficient. Further, in this case, when the first BB and the second BB are simultaneously won in the VBB mode, the game in which the first BB and the second BB are won may be set as the start game.

(49) Transition to advantageous section As a specific role that triggers a lottery or an additional lottery, a small role with medal payout such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc., and a prize with these strong cherries, etc. Although the specific re-games having a common aspect and the overlapping combinations of these small roles and the specific re-games with the medals have been described as examples, the results that trigger the lottery are not limited to these results. For example, it may be configured to perform a single role of a predetermined bonus, a transition lottery to an advantageous section even in a normal replay, or the like. Further, a transition lottery or the like may be performed based on the number of digested games, the cumulative number of points separately given based on each result, and the like. In any case, it suffices as long as the trigger for the transition lottery to the advantageous section does not cause a difference in the winning probability and the frequency of occurrence depending on the set value.

(50) At the time of winning the push order bell or push order replay, the winning combination differs depending on the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the privilege to be given is different, and the stop order is notified. The configuration is such that the advantage for the player is different depending on whether or not the player has it, but any role may be used in which the advantage for the player is different by notifying the player about the stop operation.

For example, in the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel, the first symbol (for example, "black BAR" symbol) and the second symbol (for example, "red 7" symbol) cannot be aimed at the same time (at positions separated by 5 symbols or more). )Deploy. Then, the first symbol of the left reel 32L, the predetermined symbol of the middle reel 32M (for example, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol), and the predetermined symbol of the right reel 32R (for example, the "first replay" symbol or When the "second replay" symbol stops at the valid line, the first result prize is established, and the second symbol of the left reel 32L and the predetermined symbol of the middle reel 32M (for example, the "first replay" symbol) or "1st replay" symbol are established. The second result winning is established when the "second replay" symbol) and the predetermined symbol of the right reel 32R (for example, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol) stop at the valid line. The winning mode of the first result and the second result is set. In this case, if the first result is stopped by aiming at the first symbol at the time of winning the first result, the first result winning can be established, but if the stopping operation is aimed at the second symbol instead of the first symbol, the first result winning is won. It does not hold and the corresponding benefits are not granted. Similarly, if the second result is stopped by aiming at the second symbol at the time of winning the second result, the second result winning can be established, but if the stopping operation is aimed at the first symbol instead of the second symbol, the second result winning is won. It does not hold and the corresponding benefits are not granted. After that, a specific combination is set up in which either the first result or the second result is won, and when the specific combination is won, which of the first result and the second result is won (first symbol and first). Which of the two symbols should be aimed at to stop the left reel 32L) can be notified. Even in such a configuration, the winning result (either the first result or the second result) can be won by the notification, and the advantage for the player changes depending on the presence or absence of the notification. Then, at least one of a mode in which such notification is easily performed, a mode in which the probability of transition to a mode in which the notification is easily performed is high, and a mode in which the winner of the transition lottery to these modes is before the transition. The situation including the above modes may be regarded as an advantageous section, and the situation including at least one of the above modes including each mode and each mode based on the push order combination may be regarded as an advantageous section.

That is, even if the winning combination is the same, the stop operation for making the stop result different is not limited to the stop order, and may be any stop operation mode including the stop operation timing, and the notification for performing such a stop operation mode is sufficient. Is not limited to the push order notification, and may be any mode notification regarding the operation mode.

(51) Regarding the advantageous section, the winning probability of the transition lottery and the benefits at the time of winning (transition mode, number of additional games, etc.) are common regardless of the set value, but the winning probability etc. differs depending on the set value. May be good. In this case, depending on the type of result that triggers the lottery such as the transition lottery, there are cases where there is a difference in the probability due to the set value and the privilege at the time of winning, and there is a case where there is no difference in the probability due to the set value and the privilege at the time of winning. It may be configured to be used.

(52) The number of continuous games in the advantageous section is managed by the number of advantageous section games AG or the like, but for example, until the predetermined number of games is exhausted (for example, 50 games) or until the predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example,). (Until the replay is won three times in a row) may be set as one set and managed according to the number of sets. Specifically, in the attack mode, a predetermined number of games (50 games) is set as one set, and the number of sets is determined by lottery at the start of the attack mode or at the time of the attack mode transition lottery. Then, the attack mode is terminated when the determined number of sets is exhausted. In this case, when the measurement conditions such as winning a specific combination are satisfied in the attack mode, etc., the additional lottery for the number of sets is performed as the additional lottery in the attack mode. It is advisable to add the number of sets.

In such a configuration, in relation to the upper limit number of games (1500 games) in the advantageous section, for example, a predetermined number of predetermined games (for example, 50 games) may be set as one set, or a predetermined end condition may be satisfied (for example, replay). If one set is whether to win 3 consecutive games or to consume a specific number of games (for example, 50 games), the number of sets (30 sets) obtained by dividing the maximum number of games by the predetermined number of games or the specific number of games is used. The upper limit set number may be set, and the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated by digesting the upper limit set number. In this case, it is preferable that the number of sets of advantageous sections is grasped by a predetermined counter, and the counter is forcibly terminated when the upper limit value (30) is reached. If challenge mode and precursor mode are added, the number of games is determined so that the total number of games of precursor mode and challenge mode is one set (for example, the number of games is determined so that these challenge modes and precursor modes are also added to the number of sets. When the counter reaches the upper limit value including these modes, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached. In a configuration in which the number of games per set can fluctuate (a configuration in which one set is whether a predetermined end condition is satisfied or a specific number of games is exhausted), the number of games is less than the maximum number of games in the advantageous section. The counter for the number of sets can be the upper limit.

In relation to the pseudo-addition notification effect, it is preferable to use the unreported portion of the set number to pseudo-notify that the set number has been added during the restricted bonus.

(53) The push order notification may be performed even in the challenge mode or the precursor mode. More specifically, when the specific gaming state is entered as an advantageous section including the attack mode, challenge mode, precursor mode, etc., the advantageous section is displayed until at least a predetermined number of push order notifications (once) occur. It may be a configuration that does not end.

(54) The ball ejection rate is changed according to each set value, and the setting 1 is configured to have the lowest ball ejection rate and the setting 6 is configured to have the highest ball ejection rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase / decrease and the mode of increase / decrease of are changed. For example, the payout rates of some of the set values may be the same, such as the payout rates of the setting 1 and the setting 2, but the payout rates of the other set values may be different. Further, the settings 1, 3 and 5 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is high, and the settings 2, 4 and 6 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is low. In addition, in the settings 1 and 5, the amount of balls ejected increases in a short time and the amount of balls ejected decreases in a long time, and in the settings 2, 3 and 4, it takes longer than the settings 1 and 5 to increase the predetermined amount. The decrease in a predetermined amount may be shorter than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may be configured such that the increase or decrease of the ball output hardly occurs. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(55) A slot machine having a reel and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, a reel and five corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Further, the slot machine in which the effective line is set to one line in the situation where the number of bets is three has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the effective line may be five lines.

(56) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having a ball throwing and ball paying out function such as a pachinko machine (so-called ball-using rotating drum type gaming machine) may be used. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

For example, in a pachinko machine or a ball-using spinning machine, a configuration having a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball ejection rate, etc., and the above inventions may be applied as suggestions and teaching effects of these set values. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high probability state and a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is high or low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as a high probability state, and entry into a predetermined ball entry portion. In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball rate is high or low, the above inventions may be applied with the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 as the high ball entry state.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

The invention shown in each of the following feature groups is "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions. However, it is known that a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, for a slot machine, a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, the internal lottery is carried out, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. And the stop result of the reel is the internal lottery. When the result corresponds to the above-mentioned result, a privilege according to the result is given (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values of the plurality of stages is set. Function to execute the setting process of winning probability by 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The game is based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (for example, special lip AB duplication 1), and the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. Advantageous transition means for shifting the state to an advantageous advantageous state (restricted target bonus) for the player (a function of executing a process of shifting to the restricted target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101).
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the transition result in the case where the first set value is set by the setting means and the case where the second set value different from the first set value is set is Different,
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function to execute the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As a gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal gaming state are provided.
A transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal gaming state being a predetermined specific result. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific gaming state is executed. Function) and
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of the specific gaming states (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) and
Based on the establishment of the predetermined end condition, the normal end condition for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (the normal end condition is satisfied in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101). Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on),
An increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, the first increase notification (immediate ride notification) that the increase process is performed based on the game in which the specific condition that triggered the increase process is satisfied. (A function to execute the setting process of the additional effect by the display control device 81), which can be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65).
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, the second increase notification that the increase process is performed based on the game after the game in which the specific condition that triggered the increase process is satisfied. A second increase notification execution means (a function of executing the setting process of the addition effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing (post-addition notification) by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65), and
Regarding the result of the increase processing that is the target of the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution means, the unnotified portion grasping means for grasping the result of the unnotified portion (the post-addition counter BG by the main control device 101 is grasped). Function to execute processing etc.) and
Based on the result of the unreported portion by the unreported portion grasping means, the third increase notification executing means (the process for pseudo-addition in BB by the main control device 101) capable of executing the second increase notification during the advantageous state is performed. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result stops. It shifts to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, a specific gaming state is provided such that the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body, and the advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for shifting to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game.

Moreover, in the specific gaming state, an increase process for increasing the remaining number that can trigger the end of the specific gaming state is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition, and as a result notification, the first increase notification and the second increase notification are performed. Will be done. Therefore, in the game property of waiting for the winning of the advantageous state while enjoying the benefit of the mode notification of the specific gaming state, the waiting situation while enjoying the benefit can be extended by the increase processing, and the above-mentioned advantageous state is satisfied. Chaining with a specific gaming state is more likely to occur. The winning probability of the advantageous state differs depending on the set value that causes a change in the increasing mode of the game medium, and if the set value is easy to shift to the advantageous state, the probability of winning frequently shifts to the advantageous state during the specific gaming state. Therefore, the chain between the specific gaming state and the advantageous state is likely to occur, and if the set value is difficult to shift to the advantageous state, the chain between the specific gaming state and the advantageous state is unlikely to occur, so that the set value is a chain. It can have a great impact on the game. Then, it is considered that the player wants a game table with a set value in which a chain is likely to occur and plays the game, and in the game hall where a plurality of game tables can be installed, the game with the desired set value is played. It can also provide the fun of finding a platform.

On the other hand, if the difference in increase / decrease in the game medium becomes too large depending on the set value, the operating rate of the game consoles other than the game consoles having the desired set value may be significantly reduced, and the game may be too much to desire the desired set value. It is possible that the player will pay attention only to acquiring a large amount of medium, and the player may not be able to fully enjoy the game production. That is, if the advantage of the advantageous state is too high in the chain of games, the difference in increase / decrease of the game medium depending on the set value becomes too large, and the above inconvenience may become apparent. However, in a game in which each state is simply exchanged between the advantageous state and the specific game state, the relationship between the states is diluted even if the chain occurs, and the game is played. It is easy to get bored.

Therefore, in the above configuration, during an advantageous state in which the transition rate differs depending on the set value, the unnotified portion of the second increase notification for notifying the result in the game after the game in which the increase processing is performed can be executed. It was configured. In this way, by using the unnotified portion of the second increase notification, it is not necessary to increase the advantage of the advantageous state by performing an increase process of the specific gaming state during the advantageous state, and the increase / decrease depending on the set value is not necessary. It is possible to strengthen the relationship between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state while not increasing the difference.

Regarding the "first increase notification execution means", "in a series of games triggered by a game in which the specific condition that triggered the increase process is satisfied when the increase process is performed by the increase means". Setting of the addition effect by the first increase notification execution means (display control device 81) that can execute the first increase notification (immediate ride notification) that the increase processing has been performed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). It may be expressed as "a function of executing a process)", and the "second increase notification executing means" may be expressed as "when the increase process is performed by the increase means, the increase process is triggered by the increase process". In a game that is later than the game in which the specific conditions are satisfied and is determined after the fact, the second increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed is provided by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary). It may be expressed as "a second increase notification execution means (a function of executing an additional effect setting process by the display control device 81)" that can be executed by the display unit 65). This is also applicable to the following other features.

The above "normal transition means" may be expressed as follows.

Based on the "normal transition means for shifting to the normal gaming state when the specific gaming state ends" and the "remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state", the specific gaming state is said to be normal. Normal transition means to transition to the gaming state. "

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that it is provided with limiting means (a function of executing the processing of step S3601 by the main control device 101) capable of limiting the execution of the increasing processing by the increasing means in the advantageous state. ..

Since the execution of the increase process is restricted by the limiting means, the game in the advantageous state is a game that does not substantially affect the advantage in the specific gaming state. Based on such a premise, if it is possible to execute the notification of the unnotified portion of the second increase notification during the advantageous state as in the feature A1, the game in the advantageous state without increasing the advantage of the advantageous state too much. It is possible to enhance the impression that is a game that can affect the advantage of a specific gaming state.

Feature A3. Depending on whether the first set value is set by the setting means or the second set value different from the first set value is set, the second increase notification is transmitted by the third increase notification execution means. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, which has a common probability of being executed.

According to the above configuration, although the transition rate to the advantageous state differs depending on the set value, the probability that the second increase notification is executed during the advantageous state is the same regardless of the set value, so that the advantageous state is in progress. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value from the occurrence rate of the second increase notification. In particular, considering that the range of increase / decrease in the game medium depending on the set value should be reduced, it is considered that the difference in advantage depending on the set value should not occur with respect to the specific game state, and the increase process is executed. It is considered that the rate, that is, the rate of occurrence of the increase notification, should not be different depending on the set value. Then, if the occurrence rate of the second increase notification in the advantageous state does not differ depending on the set value as in the above configuration, in relation to the first increase notification and the second increase notification in the specific gaming state. There is no discrepancy, and it is possible to enjoy the second increase notification in an advantageous state without discomfort.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The third increase in the predetermined game in the advantageous state in the case where the first set value is set by the setting means and the case where the second set value different from the first set value is set. The probability that the second increase notification is executed by the notification execution means is common. "

Further, "... the probabilities are common" may be expressed as "... the probabilities are the same or substantially the same". The expressions "common" and "same or substantially the same" include configurations that do not completely match, and the winning probabilities may be matched to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify them. The degree to which the expressions "common" and "same or substantially the same" indicate is the same as when they are indicated by other features.

Feature A4. In the case where the first set value is set by the setting means and the case where the second set value different from the first set value is set, the third increase notification executing means sets the first setting value in a predetermined manner. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that the probabilities of executing the increase notification are different.

According to the above configuration, not only the transition rate to the advantageous state but also the probability that the second increase notification is executed in the predetermined mode during the advantageous state differs depending on the set value. Therefore, for example, a set value in which both the transition rate to the advantageous state and the execution rate of the second increase notification in the predetermined mode are high and a set value in which both the transition rate and the execution rate are low are all advantageous. The difference in the number of occurrences of the second increase notification in the total predetermined mode in the state becomes large, and the impression received by the setting value on the higher side (a happy image because a lot of the second increase notification is executed) and the setting value on the lower side. The difference from the impression received in (the image that I am not happy because the second increase notification is not executed easily) is also large. On the other hand, as described in feature A1, increasing the execution rate of the second increase notification during the advantageous state does not affect the advantage, so that the number of occurrences of the second increase notification in a predetermined mode during the entire game The difference also does not affect the advantage. By doing so, it is possible to make the difference in the impression given larger than the difference in the actual advantage due to the difference in the set value, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game while ensuring the fairness of the game. can.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The third increase in the predetermined game in the advantageous state in the case where the first set value is set by the setting means and the case where the second set value different from the first set value is set. The probability that the second increase notification is executed differs depending on the notification execution means in a predetermined mode. "

Feature A5. A first control means (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the drive control means, and a second control means (display control device 81) having the second increase notification execution means are provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the unreported portion grasping means is possessed by the first control means.

According to the above configuration, a lottery is performed based on the operation of the start operation means, and a lottery involved in the interests of the player in performing a game in which the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means to establish a prize. By providing a drive control means for driving control of the means and the orbiting body in the first control means and providing a configuration for notification such as the second increase notification execution means in the second control means, each function is distributed. By making the processing suitably feasible and consolidating the means involved in profits into the first control means, it is possible to appropriately take measures against fraudulent acts and the like.

Then, by providing the unreported portion grasping means on the first control means side, it is possible to reflect the grasping result of the unreported portion grasping means in the processing on the first control means side. That is, for example, the grasping result of the unreported portion grasping means can be reflected in the lottery by the lottery means, and the grasping result of the unreported portion grasping means can be reflected in the drive control of the orbiting body by the drive control means. It is possible. By doing so, even if the second increase notification by the third increase notification execution means is performed as an effect, the effect is compared with the configuration in which only the display screen for the effect controlled by the second control means is used. It is possible to enhance the effect.

In the above configuration, "a predetermined information can be output from the first control means to the second control means, while a predetermined information is output from the second control means to the first control means." By providing the "no" configuration, the significance of providing the unreported portion grasping means on the first control means side is further enhanced.

Feature A6. The normal game operation is that the drive control means starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated, and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. year,
When the second increase notification is executed by the third increase notification execution means, the special drive control means for controlling each of the orbitals so that the specific game operation in which the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted is performed ( The gaming machine according to feature A5, which comprises a function of executing a rotation effect processing by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, when the second increase notification is performed during the advantageous state, a so-called freeze occurs as a specific game operation in which the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the second increase notification is performed through the fact that the progress of the orbiting start and stop of the orbiting body is restricted and the second increase notification is performed, and the second increase notification is performed during the freeze. If this is performed, it is possible to prevent the second increase notification from being overlooked. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the second increase notification and to appropriately exert the effect of performing the second increase notification during the advantageous state.

Feature A7. The third increase notification execution means can execute the second increase notification in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (third role in BB) in the advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A6.

According to the above configuration, the second increase notification can be executed in the game in which the lottery result in the advantageous state is a special result. By doing so, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the second increase notification during the advantageous state was generated not because the execution was predetermined or merely a production, but because a special result was assigned as a lottery result. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect as if the increase process was actually performed.

Feature A8. In the advantageous state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the execution lottery means (pseudo-addition lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing the execution lottery as to whether or not to execute the second increase notification is performed. Has a function to execute)
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the third increase notification execution means executes the second increase notification according to a lottery result by the execution lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the second increase notification is not executed only by winning the special result, but the second increase notification is executed through the execution lottery. Therefore, the second increase notification may not be executed when the special result is won. By doing so, the increase notification is performed in a flow closer to the actual flow of the increase process, and the effect of making the person think that the increase process has been performed is enhanced.

Not only that, by adopting the above configuration, when the lottery result in the advantageous state becomes a special result, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort without executing the second increase notification. That is, as described in the feature A1, the third increase notification execution means is configured to execute the second increase notification based on the unnotified portion by the second increase notification execution means, and when there is no unnotified portion. May require a special configuration that does not require execution of the second increase notification, for example, changing the lottery table so that the special result is not won. In that respect, in the case of a configuration that undergoes an execution lottery as in the above configuration, if there is no unreported portion, it is sufficient to simply make the execution lottery non-winning, and it works well without using a special configuration. It becomes possible to manage whether or not the second increase notification is executed.

Feature A9. When the execution lottery means shifts to the advantageous state in the first situation, the winning probability of the execution lottery is set as the first probability, and when the execution lottery shifts to the advantageous state in a second situation different from the first situation. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the winning probability of the execution lottery can be set to a second probability higher than the first probability.

According to the above configuration, the execution probability of the second increase notification at the time of winning the special result is different depending on the situation of shifting to the advantageous state, and the execution mode of the second increase notification is diversified, and the second increase notification is in the advantageous state. In the game by the second increase notification, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

Feature A10. In the execution lottery means, the situation where the number of games after the transition to the specific gaming state is less than the predetermined number is the first situation, and the situation where the number of games after the transition is the predetermined number or more is the second situation. The gaming machine according to feature A9, which is characterized in that it is possible to use.

If the number of digested games after the transition to the specific gaming state increases, it is highly possible that the specific condition for executing the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is satisfied, and the second increase notification execution is executed. There is also a high possibility that there is an unreported portion of the second increase notification by means. Further, in the case of the number of digested games, the first situation or the second situation is determined regardless of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied before the transition to the advantageous state. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, the increase notification in the advantageous state is the second increase notification while adjusting the execution rate of the second increase notification in relation to the unnotified portion of the second increase notification without discomfort. It is possible to make it difficult to directly predict this from the success or failure of specific conditions.

Feature A11. In the execution lottery means, the situation where the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state is less than the specific number is defined as the second situation, and the situation where the number of games after the transition is equal to or more than the specific number is defined as the first situation. The gaming machine according to feature A9 or feature A10, characterized in that it is possible to play.

As the number of digestion games in the advantageous state increases, it is more likely that a game with a special result that triggers the execution of the second increase notification has occurred. Then, on the condition that the increase process that triggers the second increase notification is not performed during the advantageous state, the more the second increase notification is executed during the advantageous state, the smaller the unreported portion is. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, as the number of digestion games in the advantageous state increases, the second increase notification is less likely to be executed, and the event that the unnotified portion is exhausted can be less likely to occur. Therefore, the execution rate of the second increase notification can be adjusted without discomfort in relation to the unnotified portion of the second increase notification.

Feature A12. The execution lottery means has a situation in which the unnotified portion of the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is less than the number of games of the second increase notification based on the winning of the special result this time, as the first situation. Any of the features A9 to A11, wherein the second situation can be a situation in which the unreported portion is equal to or greater than the number of games of the second increase notification based on the winning of the special result this time. The game machine according to 1.

In the above configuration, the number of unreported games is directly determined and the winning probability of the execution lottery is different, and when there is no or little unreported game, the second increase notification is executed. The occurrence can be avoided more reliably.

Feature A13. The privilege granting means grants a privilege corresponding to the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination predetermined in the effective position is stopped. ,
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a special result (second role in BB) that does not trigger the execution of the second increase notification by the third increase notification execution means is provided.
The privilege granting means is characterized in that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and when the special pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the special result can be granted. The gaming machine according to any one of A7 to A12.

According to the above configuration, a special pattern combination corresponding to a special result that can be an execution trigger of the second increase notification can appear other than when the special result is won. Since the second increase notification is not executed based on the special result other than the time when the special result is won, the appearance of the special pattern combination does not necessarily mean that the second increase notification is executed. By doing so, it is possible to resemble the event when the increase processing is actually performed, including the scene where the second increase notification is not executed, and the increase processing is performed as if the second increase notification in the advantageous state is performed. The effect that makes you feel as if you were broken is enhanced.

Feature A14. The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein the privilege corresponding to the special result and the privilege corresponding to the special result are common.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the stop result is shared between the time when the special result is won and the time when the special result is won, the second increase notification is made by further sharing the privilege given regardless of the result. It is possible to further enhance the effect of obscuring the execution opportunity of.

Feature A15. The first special lottery means (attack mode by the main control device 101, etc.) capable of executing the first special lottery as to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined trigger result. Function to execute the lottery process by adding the number of games),
When the lottery result by the first special lottery means is the result that the specific condition is satisfied, the mode of the increase notification for the increase processing based on the establishment of the specific condition is the first increase by the first increase notification execution means. A second special lottery means (by the main control device 101) capable of executing a second special lottery for selecting one aspect from a plurality of aspects including the mode of notification and the mode of the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution means. Function to execute post-addition lottery processing) and
Equipped with
As the trigger result, a high probability trigger result (push order bell, push order replay) in which the winning probability by the lottery means is relatively affirmative and a low probability trigger result (rare role such as strong cherry or weak watermelon) are set. Has been
In the second special lottery when the winning result is obtained in the first special lottery based on the high probability opportunity result, the winning result is obtained in the first special lottery based on the low probability opportunity result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the mode of the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is more easily selected than the second special lottery.

According to the above configuration, the increase processing based on the high-probability trigger result is more likely to be the target of the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution means than the increase processing based on the low-probability trigger result. In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is a low-probability trigger result, and the result is a so-called rare role, a flashy production is generally performed, and the player is not only easy to notice the winning, but also. It is easy to recognize that the trigger for the increase process has occurred. On the other hand, if the lottery result by the lottery means is a high-probability trigger result, it is harder to recognize that it triggers the increase process than in the case of the low-probability trigger result. Based on such a premise, the increase processing based on the high probability trigger result is easily targeted for the second increase notification as described above, so that the increase processing is performed and the second increase notification execution means. It becomes difficult to realize that the unreported portion is accumulated. By doing so, when the second increase notification is performed during the advantageous state, it becomes difficult to understand what result the second increase notification is derived from.

It should be noted that the above configuration has a high probability if the configuration of "the first special lottery based on the low probability trigger result is more likely to be the winning result than the first special lottery based on the high probability trigger result". It is possible to further enhance the effect of making it difficult to realize that the increase process has been performed based on the trigger result.

Feature A16. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, the transition result winning is reserved until the pattern combination for the transition is stopped at the effective position.
The drive control means has a plurality of symbol combinations including a symbol combination for the first winning and a symbol combination for the second winning that is different from the symbol combination for the first winning at the effective position at the time of winning the transition result. Controls each of the orbiting bodies so that they can be stopped.
When the pattern combination for the first winning is stopped, the execution of the second increase notification by the third increase notification executing means is permitted, while when the pattern combination for the second winning is stopped, the execution of the second increase notification is permitted. Features A1 to A15 characterized by having means for limiting the execution of the second increase notification by the third increase notification execution means (a function of executing a process of setting a freeze restriction flag by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, whether or not the second increase notification is executed during the advantageous state after the transition is different depending on the stop result at the time of winning the transition result. More specifically, in the transition result winning game, when the first winning symbol combination is stopped, the second increase notification is executed, and when the second winning symbol combination is stopped, the execution of the second increase notification is restricted. To. These stop rolls appear based on the operation of the stop operation means by the player, and whether the first winning pattern combination is stopped or the second winning pattern combination is stopped is determined. Basically, it can be said that it is a matter left to the operation of the player. That is, the configuration is such that the player can select whether or not to execute the second increase notification in the advantageous state, and it is possible to generate an effect according to the various needs of the player.

Feature A17. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set.
Based on the establishment of the predetermined termination condition, the low advantage transition means for shifting the high advantage state to the low advantage state (the normal termination condition is satisfied in the second process of displaying the section by the main controller 101). Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on),
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of the highly advantageous state (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) and
An increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, the increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed can be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). Means (a function that performs processing for executing the additional notification effect by the main control device 101) and
The unexecuted portion for grasping the unexecuted portion for which the increase processing is not executed by the increase means although the specific condition is satisfied, or the increase processing is performed by the increase means but the increase notification is not executed. The grasping means (a function of executing the process of grasping the post-addition counter BG by the main control device 101) and
A second increase notification execution capable of executing the increase notification for the unexecuted portion grasped by the unexecuted portion grasping means by the predetermined notification means during a predetermined restriction period in which the establishment of the specific condition is restricted. Means (a function of executing pseudo-addition processing during BB by the main control device 101) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and in the high advantage state, the remaining number of high advantage states is increased when a specific condition is satisfied. Since it has a so-called addition function and an increase notification is performed in response to an increase in the remaining number, the expectation that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. Moreover, in the above configuration, the increase notification may be performed based on the unexecuted portion of the increase processing or the increase notification during a predetermined restriction period in which the establishment of the specific condition is restricted, and during such a restriction period, the increase notification may be performed. However, the degree of attention in the high advantage state is increasing. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest in the high advantageous state while preventing a discrepancy between the actual remaining number and the number of times of notification.

The above-mentioned "low advantage transition means" may be expressed as follows.

The high advantageous state is referred to as "a low advantageous transition means for shifting to the low advantageous state when the high advantageous state ends" or "based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the high advantageous state". A low-advantage transition means to shift to a low-advantage state. "

The configurations shown in the features A1 to A16 may be applied individually to the configurations of the features A17, or the configurations shown in the features A1 to A16 may be applied in combination. In this case, the "high advantage state" is the "specific gaming state", the "low advantage state" is the "normal gaming state", the "predetermined time limit period" is the "advantageous state", and the "first increase notification execution means" is the "first". The "1 increase notification execution means", the "second increase notification execution means", and the "second increase notification execution means" may be appropriately read and applied as the "third increase notification execution means" and the like.

Feature A18. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result (for example, special lip AB duplication 1), and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the specific transition result is stopped at the effective position. , An advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific advantageous state (restricted target bonus) that is advantageous for the player (a function of executing a process of shifting to the restricted target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101).
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set.
Based on the establishment of the predetermined termination condition, the low advantage transition means for shifting the high advantage state to the low advantage state (the normal termination condition is satisfied in the second process of displaying the section by the main controller 101). Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on),
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of high-advantageous states (ZG number of remaining games in advantageous section) and
An increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, the increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed can be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). Means (a function that performs processing for executing the additional notification effect by the main control device 101) and
The unexecuted portion for grasping the unexecuted portion for which the increase processing is not executed by the increase means although the specific condition is satisfied, or the increase processing is performed by the increase means but the increase notification is not executed. The grasping means (a function of executing the process of grasping the post-addition counter BG by the main control device 101) and
The second increase notification execution means (by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increase notification for the unexecuted portion grasped by the unexecuted portion grasping means by the predetermined notification means in the predetermined specific advantageous state. Function to execute pseudo-addition processing during BB) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific transition result, and a pattern combination for transition corresponding to the specific transition result is obtained. When stopped, it shifts to a specific advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and in the high advantage state, the remaining number of the high advantage states is increased when a specific condition is satisfied. Since it has a so-called addition function such as, and an increase notification is performed in response to an increase in the remaining number, the expectation that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. Moreover, during the specific advantageous state, the increase notification may be performed based on the unexecuted portion of the increase processing or the increase notification, and the degree of attention regarding the high advantageous state is increased. In this case, since it is not necessary to actually satisfy the specific condition if the increase notification is for the unexecuted portion, for example, a configuration in which the specific condition cannot be satisfied in the specific advantageous state or the establishment of the specific condition is restricted. It is possible to execute the increase notification even in a configuration in which a specific condition is difficult to be satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest in the high advantageous state while preventing a discrepancy between the actual remaining number and the notified number.

The above-mentioned "low advantage transition means" may be expressed as follows.

The high advantageous state is referred to as "a low advantageous transition means for shifting to the low advantageous state when the high advantageous state ends" or "based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the high advantageous state". A low-advantage transition means to shift to a low-advantage state. "

Feature A19. The gaming machine according to feature A18, which comprises means for limiting the establishment of the specific condition (a function of executing the process of step S3601 by the main control device 101) in the predetermined specific advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to execute the increase notification even if the specific condition is not satisfied in the advantageous specific advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved without increasing the advantage of the specific advantageous state too much. Is possible.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"In the predetermined specific advantageous state, the establishment of the specific condition is restricted."

Feature A20. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values of the plurality of stages is set. It is equipped with a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
The increase notification is executed by the second increase notification execution means depending on whether the first setting value is set by the setting means or the second setting value different from the first setting value is set. The gaming machine according to the feature A18 or the feature A19, which is characterized by having a common probability.

According to the above configuration, since the probability that the increase notification is executed during the specific advantageous state is common regardless of the set value, it is difficult to predict the set value from the occurrence rate of the increase notification during the specific advantageous state. Can be done. In particular, considering that the range of increase / decrease in the game medium depending on the set value should be reduced, it is considered that the difference in the advantage due to the set value should not occur in the high advantageous state, and the increase process is executed. It is considered that the rate, that is, the rate of occurrence of the increase notification, should not be different depending on the set value. Then, if the occurrence rate of the increase notification during the specific advantageous state does not differ depending on the set value as in the above configuration, there will be no discrepancy in relation to the increase notification during the high advantageous state, and the specific advantageous state will not occur. It is possible to entertain the increase notification inside without any discomfort.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The first setting value in the predetermined game in the predetermined advantageous state in the case where the first setting value is set by the setting means and the case where the second setting value different from the first setting value is set. 2 The probability that the increase notification is executed by the increase notification execution means is common. "

Feature A21. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values of the plurality of stages is set. It is equipped with a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
Depending on whether the first set value is set by the setting means or the second set value different from the first set value is set, the increase is performed in a predetermined manner by the second increase notification executing means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A20, characterized in that the probabilities of executing notifications are different.

According to the above configuration, the probability that the increase notification is executed in a predetermined mode during the specific advantageous state differs depending on the set value. Therefore, for example, the difference in the number of occurrences of the increase notification becomes large between the set value in which the execution rate of the increase notification in the predetermined mode is high and the setting value in which the execution rate is low, and the impression received by the setting value on the higher side (many). The difference between the impression received at the lower setting value (the image that is not happy because the increase notification is not executed easily) and the impression that the increase notification is executed is also large. On the other hand, since the increase notification during the specific advantageous state does not affect the advantage even if the execution rate is increased, the difference in the number of occurrences of the increase notification during all the games does not affect the advantage. By doing so, it is possible to make the difference in the impression given larger than the difference in the actual advantage due to the difference in the set value, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game while ensuring the fairness of the game. can.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The first setting value in the predetermined game in the predetermined advantageous state in the case where the first setting value is set by the setting means and the case where the second setting value different from the first setting value is set. (2) The probability that the increase notification is executed differs depending on the increase notification execution means. "

Feature A22. A first control means (main control device 101) having at least the low advantageous transition means and a second control means (display control device 81) having the first increase notification execution means are provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A21, wherein the unexecuted portion grasping means is possessed by the first control means.

According to the above configuration, the function is provided by providing the first control means with a low advantageous state transition means that is related to the interests of the player, and providing the second control means with a notification configuration such as the first increase notification execution means. It is possible to appropriately execute each process while achieving decentralization, and it is possible to appropriately take measures against fraudulent acts by consolidating the means involved in profits into the first control means.

Then, by providing the unexecuted portion grasping means on the first control means side, it is possible to reflect the grasping result of the unexecuted portion grasping means in the processing on the first control means side. That is, for example, it is possible to reflect the grasping result of the unexecuted portion grasping means in the lottery of each game, and the grasping result of the unexecuted portion grasping means can be reflected in the result notification mode of each game (reel control of the slot machine, etc.). ) Can be reflected. By doing so, even if the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is performed as an effect, the effect of the increase is compared with the configuration in which only the display screen for the effect controlled by the second control means is used. It will be possible to increase it further.

In the above configuration, "a predetermined information can be output from the first control means to the second control means, while a predetermined information is output from the second control means to the first control means." By providing the "no" configuration, the significance of providing the unexecuted portion grasping means on the first control means side is further enhanced.

Feature A23. The normal game operation is that the drive control means starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated, and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. year,
When the increase notification is executed by the second increase notification execution means, the special drive control means (main control) that controls each of the orbitals so that the specific game operation in which the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted is performed. The gaming machine according to feature A22, which comprises a function of executing a rotation effect processing by the device 101).

According to the above configuration, when the increase notification is performed during the specific advantageous state, a so-called freeze occurs as a specific game operation in which the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the increase notification is performed through the fact that the progress of the orbiting of the orbiting body is restricted and freezes, and if the increase notification is performed during the freeze, the increase notification can be performed. It is also suppressed that the increase notification is overlooked. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the increase notification and to appropriately exert the effect of performing the increase notification during the specific advantageous state.

Feature A24. The second increase notification execution means can execute the increase notification in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (third combination in BB) in a predetermined specific advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A18 to A23.

According to the above configuration, the increase notification based on the unexecuted portion can be executed in the game in which the lottery result in the specific advantageous state is a special result. By doing so, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the increase notification during the specific advantageous state was generated not because the execution was decided in advance or just a production, but because a special result was assigned as a lottery result. Will be. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect as if the increase process was actually performed.

Feature A25. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the predetermined specific advantageous state, the execution lottery means (pseudo-addition lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing the execution lottery as to whether or not to execute the increase notification is performed. Has the ability to execute)
The gaming machine according to feature A24, wherein the second increase notification execution means executes the increase notification according to a lottery result by the execution lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the increase notification is not executed by the second increase notification execution means only by winning the special result, but the increase notification is executed through the execution lottery. Therefore, the increase notification may not be executed when the special result is won. By doing so, the increase notification is performed in a flow closer to the actual flow of the increase process, and the effect of making the person think that the increase process has been performed is enhanced.

Not only that, by adopting the above configuration, when the lottery result in the specific advantageous state becomes a special result, it is less likely to give a sense of discomfort without executing the increase notification. That is, as described in the feature A18, the second increase notification execution means is configured to execute the increase notification based on the unexecuted portion, and if there is no unexecuted portion, for example, the special result is not won. A special configuration that does not require execution of increase notification, such as changing the lottery table, may be required. In that respect, in the case of a configuration that undergoes an execution lottery as in the above configuration, if there is no unexecuted portion, it is sufficient to simply make the execution lottery non-winning, and it works well without using a special configuration. It is possible to manage whether or not the increase notification is executed.

Feature A26. When the execution lottery means shifts to the predetermined specific advantageous state in the first situation, the winning probability of the execution lottery is set as the first probability, and the second execution lottery means different from the first situation to the predetermined specific advantageous state. The gaming machine according to feature A25, wherein the winning probability of the execution lottery can be set to a second probability higher than the first probability when the situation shifts.

According to the above configuration, the execution probability of the increase notification at the time of winning the special result is different depending on the situation of shifting to the specific advantageous state, the execution mode of the increase notification is diversified, and the increase notification during the specific advantageous state is diversified. It is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature A27. In the execution lottery means, the situation where the number of games after the transition to the high advantage state is less than the predetermined number is the first situation, and the situation where the number of games after the transition is the predetermined number or more is the second situation. The gaming machine according to feature A26, which is characterized in that it is possible to use.

If the number of digested games after the transition to the high advantageous state increases, there is a high possibility that there is an unexecuted portion of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means. Further, in the case of the number of digested games, the first situation or the second situation is determined regardless of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied before shifting to the specific advantageous state. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, the increase notification in the specific advantageous state is based on the unexecuted portion while adjusting the execution rate of the increase notification in relation to the unexecuted portion of the increase notification without discomfort. Can be difficult to predict directly from the success or failure of specific conditions.

Feature A28. The execution lottery means has a second situation in which the number of games after the transition to the predetermined specific advantageous state is less than the specific number, and the number of games after the transition is the specific number or more. The gaming machine according to the feature A27 or the feature A27, which is characterized in that the first situation can be set to.

As the number of digested games in a specific advantageous state increases, it is considered that there is a high possibility that a game that can be an execution target of the increase notification has occurred. Then, in the configuration in which the increase processing that triggers the increase notification is not performed during the specific advantageous state, the more the increase notification is executed during the specific advantageous state, the smaller the unexecuted portion is. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it becomes difficult to execute the increase notification as the number of digested games in the specific advantageous state increases, and it is possible to prevent the event that the unexecuted portion is exhausted. Therefore, the execution rate of the increase notification can be adjusted without discomfort in relation to the unexecuted portion.

Feature A29. In the execution lottery means, the situation in which the unexecuted portion of the increase notification is less than the number of games of the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is defined as the first situation, and the unexecuted portion is the second situation of the present time. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A26 to A28, wherein the second situation can be a situation in which the number of games of the increase notification by the increase notification execution means is or more.

In the above configuration, the number of unexecuted games is directly determined and the winning probability of the execution lottery is different, and when there is no or little unexecuted game, the second increase notification execution means tries to execute the increase notification. It is possible to more reliably avoid the occurrence of such an event.

Feature A30. The privilege granting means grants a privilege corresponding to the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination predetermined in the effective position is stopped. ,
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a special result (second role in BB) that does not trigger the execution of the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is provided.
The privilege granting means is characterized in that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and when the special pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the special result can be granted. The gaming machine according to any one of A24 to A29.

According to the above configuration, a special pattern combination corresponding to a special result that can be a trigger for executing the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means can appear other than when the special result is won. Since the increase notification is not executed based on the special result, the appearance of a special pattern combination does not necessarily mean that the increase notification is executed. By doing so, it is possible to resemble the event when the increase processing is actually performed, including the scene where the increase notification is not executed, and the increase notification during the predetermined period is as if the increase processing was performed. The effect reminiscent is enhanced.

Feature A31. The gaming machine according to feature A30, wherein the privilege corresponding to the special result and the privilege corresponding to the special result are common.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the stop result at the time of winning the special result and the time of winning the special result are shared, the privilege given regardless of the result is further shared to execute the increase notification. It is possible to enhance the effect of obscuring the opportunity.

Feature A32. The first special lottery means (attack mode by the main control device 101, etc.) capable of executing the first special lottery as to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined trigger result. Function to execute the lottery process by adding the number of games),
When the lottery result by the first special lottery means is the result that the specific condition is satisfied, the execution mode of at least one of the increase processing and the increase notification based on the establishment of the specific condition is grasped by the unexecuted portion grasping means. A second special lottery means (a function of executing a post-addition lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a second special lottery for selecting one aspect from a plurality of aspects including a target aspect, and
Equipped with
As the trigger result, a high probability trigger result (push order bell, push order replay) in which the winning probability by the lottery means is relatively affirmative and a low probability trigger result (rare role such as strong cherry or weak watermelon) are set. Has been
In the second special lottery when the winning result is obtained in the first special lottery based on the high probability opportunity result, the winning result is obtained in the first special lottery based on the low probability opportunity result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A31, wherein the mode to be grasped is more easily selected by the unexecuted portion grasping means than the second special lottery.

According to the above configuration, the specific condition based on the high-probability trigger result is more likely to be grasped by the unexecuted portion grasping means because the increase processing or the increase notification is not executed than the specific condition based on the low-probability trigger result. In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is a low-probability trigger result, and the result is a so-called rare role, a flashy production is generally performed, and the player is not only easy to notice the winning, but also. It is easy to recognize that the trigger for the increase process has occurred. On the other hand, if the lottery result by the lottery means is a high-probability trigger result, it is harder to recognize that it triggers the increase process than in the case of the low-probability trigger result. Based on such a premise, the unexecuted portion that is the target of the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is configured so that the increase processing and the increase notification based on the high probability trigger result are likely to be unexecuted as described above. It becomes difficult to realize that is accumulated. By doing so, when the increase notification is performed during the specific advantageous state, it becomes difficult to understand what result the increase notification is derived from.

It should be noted that the above configuration has a high probability if the configuration of "the first special lottery based on the low probability trigger result is more likely to be the winning result than the first special lottery based on the high probability trigger result". It is possible to further enhance the effect of making it difficult to realize that the increase process has been performed based on the trigger result.

Feature A33. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific transition result, the specific transition result winning is reserved until the pattern combination for the transition is stopped at the effective position.
The drive control means has a plurality of symbol combinations including a symbol combination for the first winning and a symbol combination for the second winning that is different from the symbol combination for the first winning at the effective position at the time of winning the transition result. Controls each of the orbiting bodies so that they can be stopped.
When the first winning pattern combination is stopped, the second increase notification executing means is allowed to execute the increase notification, while when the second winning pattern combination is stopped, the second increase notification execution means is allowed to be executed. 2. Any one of the features A18 to A32, which comprises means for limiting the execution of the increase notification by the increase notification execution means (a function of executing a process of setting the freeze limit flag by the main control device 101). The game machine described in.

According to the above configuration, whether or not the increase notification during the specific advantageous state that occurs thereafter is executed differs depending on the stop result at the time of winning the specific transition result. More specifically, in the transition result winning game, when the first winning symbol combination is stopped, the increase notification is executed, and when the second winning symbol combination is stopped, the execution of the increase notification is restricted. To. These stop rolls appear based on the operation of the stop operation means by the player, and whether the first winning pattern combination is stopped or the second winning pattern combination is stopped is determined. Basically, it can be said that it is a matter left to the operation of the player. That is, the configuration is such that the player can select whether or not to execute the increase notification in the specific advantageous state, and it is possible to generate an effect according to the various needs of the player.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first transition result (for example, special lip A duplication 1), and the pattern combination for the first transition corresponding to the first transition result is stopped at the effective position. Based on this, the first advantageous transition means (the process of shifting to the restricted target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the first advantageous state (restricted non-target bonus) which is advantageous for the player. Function to execute) and
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result (for example, special lip AB duplication 1), and the pattern combination for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result is stopped at the effective position. Based on this, the process of shifting the gaming state to the second advantageous state (restricted target bonus) which is advantageous for the player (the process of shifting to the restricted non-target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) is performed. Function to execute) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function to execute the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As a gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal gaming state are provided.
A transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal gaming state being a predetermined specific result. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific gaming state is executed. Function) and
Based on the establishment of the predetermined end condition, the normal end condition for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (the normal end condition is satisfied in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101). Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on),
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of the specific gaming states (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) and
An increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, the increase notification execution means (display) capable of executing the increase notification (immediate ride notification) about the result of the increase processing by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). (Function to execute the setting process of the additional effect by the control device 81) and
Equipped with
The increase notification executing means can execute the increase notification in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.
In the first advantageous state, the specific condition can be satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined special result (third combination in BB), while in the second advantageous state, the lottery is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific condition is not satisfied when the lottery result by means is the special result.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result or the second transition result, and these first transition results and When the pattern combination corresponding to the second transition result is stopped, the player shifts to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state which is advantageous for the player. In such a configuration, a specific gaming state is provided such that the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body, and the advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for shifting to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game.

Moreover, in the specific gaming state, an increase process for increasing the remaining number that can trigger the end of the specific gaming state is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the increase notification is performed. Therefore, in the game property of waiting for winning in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state while enjoying the benefit of the mode notification of the specific gaming state, the waiting situation can be extended while enjoying the benefit by the increase processing. Therefore, the chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state is more likely to occur. Not only that, when the state shifts to the first advantageous state, the increase process can be performed even during the first advantageous state. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the second advantageous state, the increase process cannot be performed during the second advantageous state. Therefore, the degree of advantage varies greatly depending on which advantageous state is transitioned to during the specific gaming state, and the gameability is significantly improved from such a viewpoint.

As described above, by not performing the increase processing in the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the difference in the advantage from the first advantageous state and increase the fluctuation range of the increase / decrease in the game medium. On the other hand, looking at the second advantageous state alone, the game in the second advantageous state is not interesting for the player who expected the transition to the first advantageous state, and there is a concern that the degree of attention will decrease. On the other hand, in the second advantageous state, even if the increase notification is performed as a mere effect, the deviation from the fact that the increase process is not performed is large, and there is a possibility that it may be a factor of reducing the degree of attention.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the increase processing is performed during the second advantageous state, but the increase notification is performed during the second advantageous state, and the increase notification during the second advantageous state is performed during the first advantageous state. It is configured to be executed triggered by a special result which is the result of the game in the case. That is, in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the increase notification is executed in the game having a special result, and the increase notification performed during the second advantageous state is the lottery result by the actual lottery means. Will be based on. Therefore, when the increase notification is performed without undergoing the increase processing during the second advantageous state, the impression that the increase notification is actually performed through the increase processing is strengthened, not merely as an effect. Is possible. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of attention of the second advantageous state.

The above configuration is
"The increase notification executing means can execute the increase notification in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, and in the first advantageous state, the lottery result by the lottery means is predetermined. The specific condition can be satisfied when a special result (third combination in BB) is obtained, while in the second advantageous state, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result, the specific condition is satisfied. Does not hold ",
"The increase notification executing means can execute the increase notification in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, and the specific condition can be satisfied in the first advantageous state, while the first advantageous state. 2 It is not satisfied in the advantageous state, and in the first advantageous state, the specific condition may be satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined special result (third combination in BB). On the other hand, in the second advantageous state, if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result, the specific condition may not be satisfied. "

Further, the above-mentioned "normal transition means" may be expressed as follows.

Based on the "normal transition means for shifting to the normal gaming state when the specific gaming state ends" and the "remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state", the specific gaming state is said to be normal. Normal transition means to transition to the gaming state. "

Feature B2. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will win the special result in the first advantageous state and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will win the special result in the second advantageous state are common. The gaming machine according to the feature B1.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the increase notification in the first advantageous state and the occurrence rate of the increase notification in the second advantageous state are common, and the increase notification in the second advantageous state is increased in the first advantageous state. It is possible to further enhance the effect of imitating notification.

Feature B3. The privilege granting means can grant the privilege corresponding to the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. can be,
The increase notification executing means can execute the increase notification in a game in which the special symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position in the first advantageous state, and the special symbol combination can be executed in the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the increase notification can be executed in a game in which the player can stop at the effective position.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which an increase notification can be performed at the time of winning a special result in both advantageous states, not only the lottery result but also the stop result is common, and the executed increase notification is an increase notification based on the lottery result. Can be further strengthened. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention in the second advantageous state of the feature B1.

In particular, it is based on the premise that the lottery by the lottery means related to the interests of the player, the driving of the orbiting body, etc. are performed by the control device on the main side, and the production of the display screen etc. is performed by the control device on the sub side. For example, it is considered that the player trusts the movement and the stop result of the orbiting body under the control of the main side rather than the production content under the control of the sub side. That is, it is considered that there is a high possibility that the content shown only by the effect of the display screen or the like without the movement of the orbiting body or the stop result will be seen as a mere effect. In that respect, in the above configuration, since the effect contents of the increase notification in the second advantageous state and the increase notification in the first advantageous state match, including the stop result, the effect is not a mere effect but actually increases. It is more likely that the process has been performed.

Feature B4. The special result is the first special result.
The privilege granting means corresponds to the first special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result stops at the effective position. It is possible to give benefits to
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined second special result (first combination in BB) in the first advantageous state, the specific condition is not satisfied and in the second advantageous state. Even when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second special result, the specific condition is not satisfied.
The increase notification executing means does not execute the increase notification when the second special result is won in the first advantageous state and the special pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the second special result is not executed. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the increase notification is not executed when the second special result is won in an advantageous state and the special pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position.

In both cases, a first special result and a second special result having a common stop result are provided as a special pattern combination, and in the first advantageous state, an increase process can be executed when the first special result is won. When the second special result is won, the increase process is not executed. Further, in the second advantageous state, the increase process is not executed regardless of whether the first special result or the second special result is won. In this way, it becomes difficult to understand whether the increase notification that can be executed during the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is the increase notification triggered by the first special result or the second special result. , It becomes possible to make it difficult to realize that the increase notification during the second advantageous state has not undergone the increase process.

Feature B5. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will win the second special result in the first advantageous state and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will win the second special result in the second advantageous state are common. The gaming machine according to feature B4, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the increase notification when the special pattern combination is stopped during the first advantageous state and the occurrence rate of the increase notification when the special pattern combination is stopped during the second advantageous state. In common, it is possible to further enhance the effect of resembling the increase notification in the second advantageous state to the increase notification in the first advantageous state.

Feature B6. The feature B3 is characterized in that the increase notification executing means can execute the increase notification in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state at the timing after the special pattern combination is stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of B5.

According to the above configuration, in the case where the increase notification is performed when the special pattern combination can be stopped, the increase notification is executed after the special pattern combination is stopped. On the premise that the effect of making the player trust is higher when the stop result is higher than the notification such as the display effect, it can be said that the above configuration is a configuration in which the reliability of the notification content is given before the increase notification. That is, it is configured to execute the increase notification after determining or convincing that the increase process was actually performed by the stop result. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making the increase notification during the second advantageous state seem to be accompanied by the increase process.

Feature B7. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result, it is possible to execute a determination process for determining whether the game having the special result is the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state. It is equipped with a determination means (a function of executing the process of step S3601 by the main control device 101).
The increase notification executing means executes the first process when it is determined by the determination means that it is in the first advantageous state, and the first process when it is determined that it is in the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, which is characterized by performing a process different from that of the above.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the increase notification is performed using the same special result in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the increase notification process is the first process and the second process based on the determination result by the determination means. It depends on the processing. That is, the processing configuration at the time of winning the special result is common to the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state halfway, and the complicated processing configuration is suppressed in order to achieve the excellent effects of the above-mentioned features. ..

Feature B8. The first process and the second process are set so that at least a predetermined common process (addition process of the display remaining number counter HG by the main control device 101) exists between the first process and the second process. The gaming machine according to feature B7, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the processing after the determination processing when the special result is won differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, a common process is set for the processing after the determination processing. Therefore, while making it easy to distinguish the advantageous states in the gaming machine, the processing configuration is similar, and the processing configuration can be further simplified.

Feature B9. The increase notification execution means is
In the first advantageous state, it is possible to execute the increase notification about the result of the increase process executed based on the special result winning in the first advantageous state.
It is characterized in that, in the second advantageous state, the increase notification about the result of the increase process executed before the transition to the second advantageous state can be executed based on the special result winning. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B8.

According to the above configuration, in the first advantageous state, it is premised that the increase notification corresponding to the result of the increase processing executed based on the special result winning in the first advantageous state is executed, and the second advantageous state is executed. Among them, the increase notification corresponding to the result of the increase process performed before the transition to the second advantageous state is executed based on the special result winning. By doing so, even in a configuration in which the specific condition is not satisfied during the second advantageous state, the increase notification can be executed during the second advantageous state, and the increase processing executed during the advantageous state can be performed. It is possible to strengthen the impression that it corresponds.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, wherein the pattern combination for the first transition and the pattern combination for the second transition are common.

According to the above configuration, since the pattern combination for the first transition to shift to the first advantageous state and the symbol combination for the second transition to shift to the second advantageous state are common, the stop result at the time of transition is obtained. From now on, it will not be possible to determine which is the advantageous state this time. As a result, it becomes difficult to determine whether the increase notification to be executed is the increase notification that has undergone the increase processing or the increase notification that is not, and the degree of attention during the second advantageous state can be suitably increased.

Feature B11. The first transition result and the second transition result both include the advantageous result (first BB) that enables the transition to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state, and one of them is the advantageous result. It is a result including a duplicate result (special lip B) different from
The privilege-giving means stops the pattern combination for duplication different from the pattern combination for the first transition and the pattern combination for the second transition, which is a pattern combination corresponding to the duplication result, at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, which is characterized in that a privilege corresponding to the duplicated result is given based on the above.

According to the above configuration, there is a difference between the first transition result and the second transition result as to whether or not the winning content includes the duplicate result, and the duplicate result is the pattern combination for the first transition or the pattern for the second transition. A prize is won when a combination of patterns for duplication that is different from the combination stops. Therefore, by stopping the combination of symbols for duplication and establishing the duplication result winning, it is possible to determine whether the first transition result is won or the second transition result is won. As a result, it is determined that the increase notification in the second advantageous state has not undergone the increase processing, while obtaining the effect of making the increase notification in the second advantageous state seem to have undergone the increase processing as described above. If you think about it, it will be possible, and it will be possible to meet the conflicting needs of players who want to enjoy the production and those who do not.

Feature B12. When the stop operation means is operated in the first aspect in which the overlapping pattern combination corresponding to the overlapping result can be stopped, the overlapping pattern combination can be stopped, while the first aspect can be stopped. When the operation is performed in the second mode different from the above, another pattern combination different from the pattern combination for duplication is stopped.
The gaming machine according to feature B11, wherein the other pattern combination can be stopped regardless of whether the first transition result or the second transition result is won.

According to the above configuration, in order to establish the duplicate result winning and to judge the first transition result and the second transition result, it is necessary to operate the stop operation means in the first aspect, and in the first aspect, it is necessary to operate the stop operation means. If the second aspect is adopted, the first transition result and the second transition result cannot be determined. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the increase notification is the first increase notification or the second increase notification only when the stop operation means can be operated as the first aspect. In this way, if you want to enjoy the effect, you can operate it in the second mode, otherwise you can operate it in the first mode, and the player's needs can be met by the operation mode of the stop operation means. It will be possible to pick up on the machine side.

Feature B13. The gaming machine according to feature B12, wherein the second aspect is a mode that can be easily operated by a player as compared with the first aspect.

According to the above configuration, in order to be able to determine the type of increase notification, it is necessary to operate in the more difficult first mode, and the increase notification is made in the playability of the slot machine in which the stop operation means is operated to advance the game. It is possible to incorporate even the presence or absence of judgment of the type of game into the playability.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"In the specific orbital body (left reel 32L) of each of the above-mentioned orbiting bodies, the number of arrangements of the patterns corresponding to the overlapping pattern combinations is smaller than the number of arrangements of the patterns corresponding to the other pattern combinations". , "The period in which the operation of the stop operation means is in the first aspect is shorter than the period in which the operation is in the second aspect".

Feature B14. The specific condition is described in any one of the features B1 to B13, which is characterized in that the specific condition can be satisfied in the game in which the first transition result is won, but not in the game in which the second transition result is won. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, the winning game has the effect of adjusting the payout according to the success or failure of the specific condition, which matches the relationship between the first advantageous state in which the specific condition can be satisfied and the second advantageous state in which the specific condition is not satisfied. You can expect to include it.

In particular, if this configuration is applied to a configuration such as feature B11 in which the stop result of the winning game may be different, the game will be played while paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the winning game. Assuming that, naturally, the stop operation of each stop operation means is likely to be a cautious operation, and it is easy to attract attention to the stop result of the winning game. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably exert the effect of the feature B11.

Feature B15. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values of the plurality of stages is set. It is equipped with a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result depending on whether the first set value is set by the setting means or the second set value different from the first set value is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, wherein the probability is common, but the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second transition result is different.

According to the above configuration, in the first advantageous state in which the increase process is performed (the specific condition can be satisfied), the winning probability is common regardless of the set value, and the increase process is not performed (the specific condition is not satisfied). ) In the second advantageous state, the winning probability differs depending on the set value. By doing so, the playability that makes the winning result and the advantage different depending on the stop operation mode is realized regardless of the set value depending on the second advantageous state, and then the winning probability of the second advantageous state is determined by the set value. It is also possible to give the impression that the set value is involved in the playability of the above-mentioned stop operation mode by imitating the first advantageous state in which the probability is different.

Feature B16. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbit of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first transition result (for example, special lip A duplication 1), and the pattern combination for the first transition corresponding to the first transition result is stopped at the effective position. Based on this, the first advantageous transition means (the process of shifting to the restricted target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the first advantageous state (restricted non-target bonus) which is advantageous for the player. Function to execute) and
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result (for example, special lip AB duplication 1), and the pattern combination for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result is stopped at the effective position. Based on this, the process of shifting the gaming state to the second advantageous state (restricted target bonus) which is advantageous for the player (the process of shifting to the restricted non-target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) is performed. Function to execute) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function to execute the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As a gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal gaming state are provided.
A transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal gaming state being a predetermined specific result. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific gaming state is executed. Function) and
Based on the establishment of the predetermined end condition, the normal end condition for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (the normal end condition is satisfied in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101). Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on),
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of the specific gaming states (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) and
An increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, the first increase notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification (immediate ride notification) about the result of the increase processing by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). (A function to execute the setting process of the additional effect by the display control device 81) and
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, the increase process is allowed to be executed by the increasing means, while when the specific condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state, the increase by the increasing means is allowed. Specific means for restricting the execution of the process (additional lottery table set to allow the additional lottery during the restricted non-target bonus by the main control device 101 and limit the additional lottery during the restricted bonus), and
When the specific condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state, the increase process is not executed by the increase means, or the increase process is performed by the increase means but the increase notification is not executed. A second increase notification execution means (a function of executing a pseudo-addition process during BB by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increase notification by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the execution amount, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result or the second transition result, and these first transition results and When the pattern combination corresponding to the second transition result is stopped, the player shifts to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state which is advantageous for the player. In such a configuration, a specific gaming state is provided such that the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body, and the advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for shifting to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game.

Moreover, in the specific gaming state, an increase process for increasing the remaining number that can trigger the end of the specific gaming state is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the increase notification is performed. Therefore, in the game property of waiting for winning in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state while enjoying the benefit of the mode notification of the specific gaming state, the waiting situation can be extended while enjoying the benefit by the increase processing. Therefore, the chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state is more likely to occur. Not only that, when the state shifts to the first advantageous state, the increase process can be performed even during the first advantageous state. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the second advantageous state, the increase process cannot be performed during the second advantageous state. Therefore, the degree of advantage varies greatly depending on which advantageous state is transitioned to during the specific gaming state, and the gameability is significantly improved from such a viewpoint.

As described above, by not performing the increase processing in the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the difference in the advantage from the first advantageous state and increase the fluctuation range of the increase / decrease in the game medium. On the other hand, looking at the second advantageous state alone, the game in the second advantageous state is not interesting for the player who expected the transition to the first advantageous state, and there is a concern that the degree of attention will decrease. On the other hand, in the second advantageous state, even if the increase notification is performed as a mere effect, the deviation from the fact that the increase process is not performed is large, and there is a possibility that it may be a factor of reducing the degree of attention.

Therefore, in the above configuration, although the increase processing is not performed even if the specific condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state, the increase notification is actually performed based on the unexecuted portion of the increase processing and the increase notification. It is possible to improve the playability in the second advantageous state while preventing a discrepancy between the remaining number and the notified number. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention of the game without increasing the advantage in the second advantageous state too much.

The above "normal transition means" may be expressed as follows.

Based on the "normal transition means for shifting to the normal gaming state when the specific gaming state ends" and the "remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state", the specific gaming state is said to be normal. Normal transition means to transition to the gaming state. "

Feature B17. The gaming machine according to feature B16, wherein the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state and the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state are common.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the increase notification in the first advantageous state and the occurrence rate of the increase notification in the second advantageous state are common, and the increase notification in the second advantageous state is increased in the first advantageous state. It is possible to further enhance the effect of imitating notification.

Feature B18. The specific condition can be satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined special result (third role in BB).
The specific means allows the execution of the increase processing when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result in the first advantageous state, while the lottery result by the lottery means is said in the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to feature B16 or feature B17, which limits the execution of the increase process when a special result is obtained.

According to the above configuration, in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the game result that triggers the establishment of the specific condition becomes common as a special result. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the increase processing has been performed even for the increase notification in the second advantageous state in which the execution of the increase processing is actually restricted.

Feature B19. The privilege granting means can grant the privilege corresponding to the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. can be,
When the specific means allows the execution of the increase process in the first advantageous state and when the execution of the increase process is restricted in the second advantageous state, the special is set to the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature B18, wherein the combination of patterns of the above can be stopped.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the increase notification can be performed at the time of winning the special result, not only the lottery result but also the stop result is common, and the impression that the executed increase notification is the increase notification based on the lottery result is further strengthened. Is possible. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention during the second advantageous state.

In particular, it is based on the premise that the lottery by the lottery means related to the interests of the player, the driving of the orbiting body, etc. are performed by the control device on the main side, and the production of the display screen etc. is performed by the control device on the sub side. For example, it is considered that the player trusts the movement and the stop result of the orbiting body under the control of the main side rather than the production content under the control of the sub side. That is, it is considered that there is a high possibility that the content shown only by the effect of the display screen or the like without the movement of the orbiting body or the stop result will be seen as a mere effect. In that respect, in the above configuration, since the effect contents of the increase notification in the second advantageous state and the increase notification in the first advantageous state match, including the stop result, the effect is not a mere effect but actually increases. It is more likely that the process has been performed.

Feature B20. The special result is the first special result.
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a second special result (second combination in BB) different from the first special result is set.
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the first special result can be given. can be,
The lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, and when the special pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the second special result can be given.
The gaming machine according to feature B19, wherein the specific condition is not satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second special result (third combination in BB).

In both cases, a first special result and a second special result having a common stop result are provided as a special pattern combination, and in the first advantageous state, an increase process can be executed when the first special result is won. When the second special result is won, the increase process is not executed. Further, in the second advantageous state, the increase process is not executed regardless of whether the first special result or the second special result is won. In this way, it becomes difficult to understand whether the increase notification that can be executed during the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is the increase notification triggered by the first special result or the second special result. , It becomes possible to make it difficult to realize that the increase notification during the second advantageous state has not undergone the increase process.

The "second special result" is expressed as "a second special result different from the first special result as a lottery result by the lottery means in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state". It is possible to more clearly show the effect of winning the second special result during both advantageous conditions.

Feature B21. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will win the second special result in the first advantageous state and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will win the second special result in the second advantageous state are common. The gaming machine according to feature B20, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the increase notification when the special pattern combination is stopped during the first advantageous state and the occurrence rate of the increase notification when the special pattern combination is stopped during the second advantageous state. In common, it is possible to further enhance the effect of resembling the increase notification in the second advantageous state to the increase notification in the first advantageous state.

Feature B22. The game according to any one of features B19 to B21, wherein the second increase notification execution means can execute the increase notification at a timing after the special pattern combination stops at the effective position. Machine.

According to the above configuration, in the case where the increase notification is performed when the special pattern combination can be stopped, the increase notification is executed after the special pattern combination is stopped. On the premise that the effect of making the player trust is higher when the stop result is higher than the notification such as the display effect, it can be said that the above configuration is a configuration in which the reliability of the notification content is given before the increase notification. That is, it is configured to execute the increase notification after determining or convincing that the increase process was actually performed by the stop result. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making the increase notification during the second advantageous state seem to be accompanied by the increase process.

Feature B23. The specific condition can be satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined special result (third role in BB).
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result, it is possible to execute a determination process for determining whether the game having the special result is the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state. It is equipped with a determination means (a function of executing the process of step S3601 by the main control device 101).
The first increase notification execution means executes the first process after being determined by the determination means to be in the first advantageous state.
Any of the features B16 to B22, wherein the second increase notification executing means executes a second process different from the first process after being determined by the determination means to be in the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the increase notification is performed using the same special result in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the increase notification process is the first process and the second process based on the determination result by the determination means. It depends on the processing. That is, the processing configuration at the time of winning the special result is common to the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state halfway, and the complicated processing configuration is suppressed in order to achieve the excellent effects of the above-mentioned features. ..

Feature B24. The first process and the second process are set so that at least a predetermined common process (addition process of the display remaining number counter HG by the main control device 101) exists between the first process and the second process. The gaming machine according to feature B23, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the processing after the determination processing when the special result is won differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, a common process is set for the processing after the determination processing. Therefore, while making it easy to distinguish the advantageous states in the gaming machine, the processing configuration is similar, and the processing configuration can be further simplified.

Feature B25. The gaming machine according to any one of features B16 to B24, wherein the pattern combination for the first transition and the pattern combination for the second transition are common.

According to the above configuration, since the pattern combination for the first transition to shift to the first advantageous state and the symbol combination for the second transition to shift to the second advantageous state are common, the stop result at the time of transition is obtained. From now on, it will not be possible to determine which is the advantageous state this time. As a result, it becomes difficult to determine whether the increase notification to be executed is the increase notification that has undergone the increase processing or the increase notification that is not, and the degree of attention during the second advantageous state can be suitably increased.

Feature B26. The first transition result and the second transition result both include the advantageous result (first BB) that enables the transition to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state, and one of them is the advantageous result. It is a result including a duplicate result (special lip B) different from
The privilege-giving means stops the pattern combination for duplication, which is a pattern combination corresponding to the duplication result, and is different from the pattern combination for the first transition and the pattern combination for the second transition at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of features B16 to B25, which is characterized in that a privilege corresponding to the duplicated result is given based on the above.

According to the above configuration, there is a difference between the first transition result and the second transition result as to whether or not the winning content includes the duplicate result, and the duplicate result is the pattern combination for the first transition or the pattern for the second transition. A prize is won when a combination of patterns for duplication that is different from the combination stops. Therefore, by stopping the combination of symbols for duplication and establishing the duplication result winning, it is possible to determine whether the first transition result is won or the second transition result is won. As a result, it is determined that the increase notification in the second advantageous state has not undergone the increase processing, while obtaining the effect of making the increase notification in the second advantageous state seem to have undergone the increase processing as described above. If you think about it, it will be possible, and it will be possible to meet the conflicting needs of players who want to enjoy the production and those who do not.

Feature B27. When the stop operation means is operated in the first aspect in which the overlapping pattern combination corresponding to the overlapping result can be stopped, the overlapping pattern combination can be stopped, while the first aspect can be stopped. When the operation is performed in the second mode different from the above, another pattern combination different from the pattern combination for duplication is stopped.
The gaming machine according to feature B26, wherein the other pattern combination can be stopped regardless of whether the first transition result or the second transition result is won.

According to the above configuration, in order to establish the duplicate result winning and to judge the first transition result and the second transition result, it is necessary to operate the stop operation means in the first aspect, and in the first aspect, it is necessary to operate the stop operation means. If the second aspect is adopted, the first transition result and the second transition result cannot be determined. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the increase notification is the first increase notification or the second increase notification only when the stop operation means can be operated as the first aspect. In this way, if you want to enjoy the effect, you can operate it in the second mode, otherwise you can operate it in the first mode, and the player's needs can be met by the operation mode of the stop operation means. It will be possible to pick up on the machine side.

Feature B28. The gaming machine according to feature B27, wherein the second aspect is a mode that can be easily operated by a player as compared with the first aspect.

According to the above configuration, in order to be able to determine the type of increase notification, it is necessary to operate in the more difficult first mode, and the increase notification is made in the playability of the slot machine in which the stop operation means is operated to advance the game. It is possible to incorporate even the presence or absence of judgment of the type of game into the playability.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"In the specific orbital body (left reel 32L) of each of the above-mentioned orbiting bodies, the number of arrangements of the patterns corresponding to the overlapping pattern combinations is smaller than the number of arrangements of the patterns corresponding to the other pattern combinations". , "The period in which the operation of the stop operation means is in the first aspect is shorter than the period in which the operation is in the second aspect."

Feature B29. The gaming machine according to any one of features B16 to B28, wherein the specific condition can be satisfied by winning the first transition result, but not even if the second transition result is won. ..

According to the above configuration, the effect of adjusting the ball output depending on the success or failure of a specific condition is consistent with the relationship between the first advantageous state in which the execution of the increase processing is permitted and the second advantageous state in which the execution of the increase processing is restricted. Can be expected including the winning game.

In particular, if this configuration is applied to a configuration such as feature B26 in which the stop result of the winning game may be different, the game will be played while paying attention to whether or not the increase processing is performed in the winning game. Assuming that, naturally, the stop operation of each stop operation means is likely to be a cautious operation, and it is easy to attract attention to the stop result of the winning game. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably exert the effect of the feature B26.

Feature B30. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values of the plurality of stages is set. It is equipped with a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result depending on whether the first set value is set by the setting means or the second set value different from the first set value is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features B16 to B29, wherein the probability is common, but the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second transition result is different.

According to the above configuration, the first advantageous state in which the execution of the increase processing is allowed has a common winning probability regardless of the set value, and the second advantageous state in which the execution of the increase process is restricted depends on the set value. Winning probability is different. By doing so, the playability that makes the winning result and the advantage different depending on the stop operation mode is realized regardless of the set value depending on the second advantageous state, and then the winning probability of the second advantageous state is determined by the set value. It is also possible to give the impression that the set value is involved in the playability of the above-mentioned stop operation mode by imitating the first advantageous state in which the probability is different.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
Each orbit is performed so that a normal gaming operation of starting the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stopping the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated is performed. Drive control means for controlling the body (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values of the plurality of stages is set. Function to execute the setting process of winning probability by 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
As for the winning result by the lottery means, the winning probability is common between the case where the first set value is set by the setting means and the case where the second set value different from the first set value is set. Based on the transition result (for example, special lip A duplication 1) and the transition symbol combination (“Red 7” symbol alignment) stopped at the effective position, the gaming state is advantageous for the player. 1 First advantageous transition means (function to execute the process of shifting to the restricted target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) to shift to the advantageous state (restricted non-target bonus),
The lottery result by the lottery means is a second transition result (for example, a special lip) in which the winning probability differs depending on whether the first set value is set by the setting means or the second set value is set. AB duplication 1), the second advantage of shifting the gaming state to the second advantageous state (restricted target bonus) which is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the pattern combination for the transition is stopped at the effective position. Transition means (a function to execute a process of shifting to a restricted non-target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101),
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function to execute the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As a gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal gaming state are provided.
A transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal gaming state being a predetermined specific result. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific gaming state is executed. Function) and
Based on the establishment of the predetermined end condition, the normal end condition for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (the normal end condition is satisfied in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101). Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on),
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of the specific gaming states (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) and
An increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, the first increase notification (immediate ride notification) that the increase process is performed based on the game in which the specific condition that triggered the increase process is satisfied. (A function to execute the setting process of the additional effect by the display control device 81), which can be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65).
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, the second increase notification that the increase process is performed based on the game after the game in which the specific condition that triggered the increase process is satisfied. A second increase notification execution means (a function of executing the setting process of the addition effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing (post-addition notification) by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65), and
Equipped with
The notification mode of the first increase notification in the first advantageous state by the first increase notification execution means and the execution mode of the second increase notification in the second advantageous state by the second increase notification execution means cannot be distinguished. Or a gaming machine characterized by being difficult to identify.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result or the second transition result, and these first transition results and When the pattern combination corresponding to the second transition result is stopped, the player shifts to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state which is advantageous for the player. In such a configuration, a specific gaming state is provided such that the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body, and the advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for shifting to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game.

Moreover, in the specific gaming state, an increase process for increasing the remaining number that can trigger the end of the specific game state is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition, and when the increase process is performed, the first increase notification or the second increase processing is performed. Increase notification is performed. Therefore, in the game property of waiting for winning in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state while enjoying the benefit of the mode notification of the specific gaming state, the waiting situation while enjoying the benefit can be extended by the increase processing. Therefore, the chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state is more likely to occur.

Here, the winning probability is the same for the first transition result that triggers the transition to the first advantageous state, regardless of the set value, and the second transition result that triggers the transition to the second advantageous state is set. The winning probability differs depending on the value. Therefore, the mode of increasing or decreasing the game medium can be adjusted by the appearance rate of the second advantageous state. However, if the configuration is such that the difference in the appearance rate of the second advantageous state can be clearly grasped, it becomes too easy to grasp the set value, which may affect the operating rate of each game table in the game hall.

Therefore, in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the stop result at the time of winning (at the time of transition) is a combination of patterns for transition, and the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are distinguished from each other. It is hard to stick. Moreover, the first increase notification during the first advantageous state and the second increase notification during the second advantageous state are also indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish, and whether the increase notification is the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state. It is difficult to make a judgment. The first increase notification is a notification when the increase processing is performed in the game, and the second increase notification is a notification when the increase processing is performed in an earlier game. There is. In this way, by making it difficult to distinguish between advantageous states such as the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, in which the presence or absence of a difference in winning probability depending on the set value and the content of the increase notification are different, the second advantageous state is obtained. Even if the difference in the increase / decrease mode of the game medium is designed, it is difficult to determine whether it is the difference due to the set value (the difference in the transition rate to the second advantageous state) or the difference due to the first advantageous state. .. Therefore, while designing an increase mode of the game medium according to the set value, it is possible to make it seem as if the increase mode, that is, the increase or decrease of the game medium was realized by the player's own luck, and vice versa. In addition, it is possible to give the impression that the increase or decrease of the game medium is due to the set value rather than the luck of the player himself. As a result of the above, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, "indistinguishable or difficult to identify" may be expressed as "indistinguishable or difficult to identify by the player", "common" or "same or substantially the same". You may.

Further, the above-mentioned "normal transition means" may be expressed as follows.

Based on the "normal transition means for shifting to the normal gaming state when the specific gaming state ends" and the "remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state", the specific gaming state is said to be normal. Normal transition means to transition to the game state. "

Feature C2. The drive control means includes specific drive control means (a function of executing various freeze effect processes by the main control device 101) for controlling each orbiter in a predetermined specific mode.
When the first increase notification is executed in the first advantageous state, the first increase notification execution means controls each of the orbiters in the specific mode by the specific drive control means.
When the second increase notification is executed in the second advantageous state, the second increase notification execution means is such that the specific drive control means controls each of the orbiters in the specific mode. The gaming machine according to the feature C1.

According to the above configuration, the first increase notification in the first advantageous state and the second increase notification in the second advantageous state are common not only in the common notification mode but also in the control of the orbiting body as a specific mode. By doing so, for example, the player is more likely to recognize the same thing as compared with a configuration in which only the effect on the display screen is resembled.

In particular, it is based on the premise that the lottery by the lottery means related to the interests of the player, the driving of the orbiting body, etc. are performed by the control device on the main side, and the production of the display screen etc. is performed by the control device on the sub side. For example, it is considered that the player trusts the operation of the orbiting body under the control of the main side rather than the production content under the control of the sub side. It is possible to more preferably exert an effect that makes it difficult to distinguish between the state and the second advantageous state.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the specific drive control means controls each orbiting body so that a specific gaming operation in which the start or progress of the normal gaming operation is restricted is performed as the specific embodiment. ..

According to the above configuration, when the first increase notification or the second increase notification is performed, a so-called freeze occurs as a specific game operation in which the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the increase notification is performed through the fact that the progress of the orbiting of the orbiting body is restricted and freezes, and if the increase notification is performed during the freeze, the increase notification can be performed. It is also suppressed that the increase notification is overlooked. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to both increase notifications and to appropriately exert the effect of performing the increase notifications during both advantageous states.

Feature C4. As the specific aspect, there is a first specific aspect (a (pseudo) additional notification effect accompanied by a middle-stage red 7-match freeze effect) and a second specific aspect (a (pseudo) additional notification effect accompanied by a right-up red 7-match freeze effect). ,
When the first increase notification execution means executes the first increase notification corresponding to the first increase processing performed in the first advantageous state, the first increase notification execution means by the specific drive control means. When the first increase notification corresponding to the second number of the increase processing is performed so that the control of each orbital body which is a specific aspect is performed, the second increase by the specific drive control means is performed. The control of each of the orbitals in a specific mode is performed, and the control is performed.
When the second increase notification of the first number is executed in the second advantageous state, the second increase notification execution means controls each of the orbiting bodies according to the first specific mode by the specific drive control means. When the second increase notification of the second number is executed, the specific drive control means is characterized in that each of the orbiting bodies according to the second specific mode is controlled. The gaming machine according to the feature C2 or the feature C3.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of specific modes are set as control modes of the orbiting body, and the specific modes executed according to the remaining number of specific gaming states increased in the increase processing are different. Then, in the case of the increase notification corresponding to the increase processing of the first number, the orbiting body is controlled in the first specific mode regardless of whether it is the first increase notification or the second increase notification, and the second number. In the case of the increase notification corresponding to the increase processing of, the orbiting body is controlled in the second specific mode regardless of whether it is the first increase notification or the second increase notification. In this way, by associating the specific control of the orbiting body, which tends to leave an impression, with the remaining number increased by the increase processing, the impression that the first increase notification and the second increase notification are the same increase notification can be further strengthened. Is possible.

Feature C5. The first increase notification executing means is when the result of the first specific lottery (the function of executing the BB middle addition process in the main control device 101) performed in the first advantageous state is the winning result (addition winning). The first increase notification is executed, and when the result of the first specific lottery is not a winning result, the first non-increase notification (pseudo-freeze effect and special lip A or special lip B winning prize) can be executed.
The second increase notification executing means is a winning result (pseudo-addition winning) as a result of the second specific lottery (a function of executing the pseudo-addition processing in BB in the main control device 101) performed in the second advantageous state. In this case, the second increase notification can be executed, and when the result of the second specific lottery is not the winning result, the second non-increase notification (pseudo-freeze effect and special lip A or special lip B winning prize) can be executed. can be,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the notification mode of the first non-increasing notification and the notification mode of the second non-increasing notification are indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish.

According to the above configuration, if the first specific lottery is won in the first advantageous state, the first increase notification is executed, and if the second specific lottery is won in the second advantageous state, the second increase notification is performed. Not only the notification modes of the first increase notification and the second increase notification when winning, but also the notification modes of the first non-increasing notification and the second non-increasing notification when non-winning are not distinguishable or difficult to identify. Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether the state is the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state from these non-increasing notifications. By doing so, it becomes possible to more preferably exert the effect of making it difficult to distinguish between the two advantageous states.

Feature C6. The notification mode of the first increase notification other than the first advantageous state by the first increase notification execution means and the execution mode of the second increase notification other than the second advantageous state by the second increase notification execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, which is identifiable.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the first increase notification and the second increase notification can be distinguished except during the advantageous state (during the specific gaming state), the first increase notification and the second increase notification are performed in the advantageous state. By executing the above, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that the first increase notification and the second increase notification are the same increase notification in the advantageous state.

Feature C7. The second increase notification execution means is
Except for the second advantageous state, the game is later than the game in which the increase processing is performed, and the predetermined notification is a predetermined mode (remaining corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG). In the game) in which the number display is 1 remaining, the second increase notification can be executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein in the second advantageous state, the second increase notification can be executed regardless of the predetermined notification mode.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the second increase notification is performed in a game in which a predetermined notification is a predetermined mode, in the second advantageous state, the second notification is performed regardless of the predetermined notification mode. If the increase notification is executed, the impression that the second increase notification in the second advantageous state is not the usual second increase notification is given, and the first increase notification and the second increase notification in the advantageous state are the same increase notification. It is possible to strengthen a certain impression.

Feature C8. The first increase notification execution means can execute the first increase notification in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result in the first advantageous state.
The second increase notification executing means is characterized in that, in the second advantageous state, the second increase notification can be executed in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, the first increase notification in the first advantageous state and the second increase notification in the second advantageous state can be executed in the game with the special result regardless of the increase notification. By doing so, the first increase notification and the second increase notification during the advantageous state are common as the game result, which not only enhances the effect of making it difficult to distinguish between the two advantageous states, but also the second increase notification draws a lottery. The second increase notification in the second advantageous state is different from the other second increase notification (second increase notification executed in the game in which the predetermined notification is a predetermined mode) by being executed randomly through the process. It is possible to strengthen the impression that it is the same as the first increase notification.

Feature C9. When the first set value is set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first transition result is higher than the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second transition result. High probability,
When the second set value is set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first transition result is higher than the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, which is characterized by a low probability.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the winning probability of the first transition result without the setting difference of the winning probability and the winning probability of the second transition result with the setting difference of the winning probability differs depending on the set value and is the first set value. If so, the first transition result is easier to win, and if it is the second set value, the second transition result is easier to win. That is, when the increase notification occurs during the advantageous state, if it is the first set value, the possibility that the increase notification is the first increase notification is high, and if it is the second set value, the increase notification is the second. There is a high possibility that it is an increase notification. In this way, by reversing which increase notification is performed depending on the set value, it is difficult to determine the type of increase notification and the two advantageous states, but there is a substantial difference depending on the set value. Therefore, it is possible to play a game that predicts the set value.

Feature C10. The first increase notification executing means is when the result of the first specific lottery (the function of executing the BB middle addition process in the main control device 101) performed in the first advantageous state is the winning result (addition winning). The first increase notification is executed, and
The second increase notification executing means is a winning result (pseudo-addition winning) as a result of the second specific lottery (a function of executing the pseudo-addition processing in BB in the main control device 101) performed in the second advantageous state. In some cases, the second increase notification is executed,
The first specific lottery is the winning result depending on whether the player shifts to the first advantageous state in the first situation or shifts to the first advantageous state in a second situation different from the first situation. Probabilities can be different,
The probability that the second specific lottery will be a winning result may differ depending on whether the situation shifts to the second advantageous state in the first situation or the second advantageous state in the second situation. And
The probability that the first specific lottery will result in a winning result when the situation shifts to the first advantageous state in the first situation, and the second specific lottery when the situation shifts to the second advantageous state in the first situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, which has a common probability of winning a winning result.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first increase notification is performed via the first specific lottery in the first advantageous state and the second increase notification is performed via the second specific lottery in the second advantageous state, the first specific lottery is performed. And the winning probability of the second specific lottery may differ depending on the situation of shifting to an advantageous state. By doing so, the susceptibility to the chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state differs depending on the situation of shifting to the advantageous state, and the game playability is significantly improved.

In addition, the probability that the first specific lottery and the second specific lottery will be the winning results is common between the case of shifting to the first advantageous state in the first situation and the case of shifting to the second advantageous state in the first situation. When the situation shifts to an advantageous state in these first situations, it is difficult to determine which advantageous state is from the winning probability of the specific lottery. This makes it more difficult to discriminate between the two advantageous states, and makes it possible to more preferably exert the effect of the feature C1.

Feature C11. The probability that the first specific lottery will result in a winning result when the situation shifts to the first advantageous state in the second situation, and the second specific lottery when the situation shifts to the second advantageous state in the second situation. The gaming machine according to the feature C10, which has a common probability of winning a winning result.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the first specific lottery and the second specific lottery is common not only in the advantageous state shifted in the first situation but also in the advantageous state shifted in the second situation. By doing so, it is premised that the winning probability of the specific lottery differs depending on the situation of shifting to the advantageous state, and the first increase notification and the second increase notification are executed regardless of the transition in any situation. Since the probabilities are common, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making it difficult to distinguish between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

Feature C12. The probability that the first specific lottery will result in a winning result when the situation shifts to the first advantageous state in the second situation, and the second specific lottery when the situation shifts to the second advantageous state in the second situation. The gaming machine according to the feature C10, which is characterized in that the probability of winning is different from that of the winning result.

According to the above configuration, the winning probabilities of the first specific lottery and the second specific lottery are the same in the advantageous state shifted in the first situation, but in the advantageous state shifted in the second situation, the first specific lottery is performed. And the second specific lottery have different winning probabilities. By doing so, it is difficult to distinguish between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in the first situation, and it is easy to distinguish between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in the second situation. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability by leaving room for determining the second advantageous state and predicting the set value.

Feature C13. A situation grasping means (a function of executing a game number management process by the main control device 101) for grasping the state of the specific gaming state when at least the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state can be transferred.
A discriminating means (a function of executing the process of step S4101 by the main control device 101) for discriminating between the first situation and the second situation according to the grasping result by the situation grasping means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C10 to C12.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the specific lottery in the shifted advantageous state differs depending on the progress of the specific gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to more preferably improve the enjoyment of the game playability created by the chain of the specific game state and the advantageous state.

Feature C14. The situation grasping means has not executed the second increase notification among the increase numbers based on the increase process in which the second increase notification is performed by the second increase notification execution means during the specific gaming state. Equipped with an increase number grasping means for grasping the minute (a function of executing a process of grasping the post-addition counter BG by the main control device 101).
The second increase notification executing means executes the second increase notification in the second advantageous state based on the grasping result of the increase number grasping means.
The gaming machine according to feature C13, wherein the discriminating means discriminates between the first situation and the second situation according to the grasping result of the increase number grasping means.

According to the above configuration, it is premised that the second increase notification in the second advantageous state is performed based on the unexecuted portion of the second increase notification, and the winning probability of the specific lottery differs depending on the unexecuted portion. By doing so, for example, it is possible to adjust the winning probability of the specific lottery so as to make it difficult for the second increase notification to be performed when the unexecuted portion is small, and the adjustment is in the first advantageous state. If it is also applied to the first specific lottery in the above, it is possible to make the adjustment while preventing the difference between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

Feature C15. The situation grasping means has not executed the second increase notification among the increase numbers based on the increase process in which the second increase notification is performed by the second increase notification execution means during the specific gaming state. Equipped with an increase number grasping means for grasping the minute (a function of executing a process of grasping the post-addition counter BG by the main control device 101).
The second increase notification executing means executes the second increase notification in the second advantageous state based on the grasping result of the increase number grasping means.
The discriminating means is characterized in that it is possible to discriminate between the first situation and the second situation according to the number of digested games in the specific gaming state grasped by the situation grasping means. Or the gaming machine according to the feature C14.

According to the above configuration, it is premised that the second increase notification in the second advantageous state is performed based on the unexecuted portion of the second increase notification, and the winning probability of the specific lottery according to the number of digested games in the specific gaming state. Is different. That is, the unexecuted portion of the second increase notification can be predicted to some extent depending on the number of digested games, and with such a configuration, it is necessary to grasp the unexecuted portion of the second increase notification when shifting to an advantageous state. Since it is eliminated, the processing can be simplified. Not only that, the unexecuted portion has a randomness of success or failure of a specific condition, and the player cannot grasp the unexecuted portion, whereas the player can grasp the number of digested games. If the winning probability of the specific lottery is different depending on the parameters that can be grasped by the player, the fairness of the game is ensured so as not to make the player feel distrust.

Feature C16. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result, the first specific pattern combination (stopped result of the ninth replay winning prize) can be stopped at the effective position, and the first specific pattern can be stopped. The second specific pattern combination that is different from the combination (the stop result that is the 10th replay winning prize) can be stopped, and it becomes possible to stop.
The situation grasping means is a pattern grasping means (b prize for a BB winning game by the main control device 101) for grasping a pattern combination stopped at the effective position at the time of winning the second transition result, which is a trigger for the transition to the second advantageous state. Equipped with a function to execute result handling processing)
1. The discriminating means according to any one of features C13 to C15, wherein the discriminating means can discriminate between the first situation and the second situation according to the grasping result of the pattern grasping means. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the second specific lottery, that is, the execution rate of the second increase notification changes depending on the pattern combination stopped in the second transition result winning game that triggers the transition to the second advantageous state. If the configuration is such that the second increase notification in the second advantageous state is merely an effect and does not affect the actual remaining number of the specific gaming states, the second increase notification is executed to perform the effect. It is considered that there will be conflicting needs of the player who wants to enjoy and the player who wants not to execute the second increase notification. In that respect, if it is possible to select whether or not to produce the effect according to the combination of patterns at the time of winning, as in the above configuration, the gaming machine can be made to meet the various needs of the player.

Feature C17. When the first specific lottery is not won in the first advantageous state, the second increase notification executing means notifies the increase notification of the non-winning amount after the end of the first advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C10 to C16, which can be executed as an increase notification.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the first specific lottery is adjusted in the configuration in which the winning probability of the second specific lottery is adjusted according to the situation of the second advantageous state and the winning probability of the first specific lottery is adjusted accordingly. It is possible to avoid an event in which the notification of the non-winning amount is not performed in order to match the second specific lottery. By doing so, it is possible to reasonably match the winning probability of the first specific lottery side with the second specific lottery side.

Feature C18. The specific condition is set so as not to be satisfied in the second advantageous state.
The second increase notification during the second advantageous state by the second increase notification execution means is a notification corresponding to the increase processing executed in the game before the transition to the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C17.

Since the transition rate differs depending on the set value in the second advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the superiority or inferiority of the gameability in the specific game state from occurring depending on the set value by using the above configuration. The fairness of the game in sex is guaranteed. In addition, since the second increase notification in the second advantageous state has the same notification mode as the first increase notification in the first advantageous state, is the increase processing performed even during the second advantageous state? It is possible to give the impression as described above, and while ensuring fairness during the specific gaming state as described above, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the gaming property due to it.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
Each orbit is performed so that a normal gaming operation of starting the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stopping the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated is performed. Drive control means for controlling the body (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The winning result by the lottery means is the first transition result (for example, the special lip A duplication 1), and the symbol combination (“red 7” symbol alignment) corresponding to the first transition result is stopped at the effective position. Based on the above, the first advantageous transition means (the process of shifting to the restricted target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to the first advantageous state (restricted non-target bonus) which is advantageous for the player is executed. Function to do) and
The lottery result by the lottery means is a second transition result (for example, special lip AB duplication 1) different from the first transition result, and the pattern combination corresponding to the second transition result is stopped at the effective position. Based on this, the process of shifting the gaming state to the second advantageous state (restricted target bonus) which is advantageous for the player (the process of shifting to the restricted non-target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) is performed. Function to execute) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The first transition result is a result including at least the first specific result (special lip A).
The second transition result is a result including at least the first specific result and a second specific result (special lip B) different from the first specific result.
In the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the specific notification executing means (process for adding in BB by the main control device 101, for pseudo-adding in BB) capable of executing the specific notification (additional notification effect, pseudo-addition notification effect). Function to execute processing) and
When the first specific pattern combination corresponding to the first specific result is stopped at the effective position, the specific notification execution means is allowed to execute the specific notification, while the second specification corresponding to the second specific result is allowed. When the pattern combination of the above is stopped, the limiting means (a function of executing the winning result correspondence process for the BB winning game by the main control device 101) capable of restricting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification executing means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, on the premise of a configuration in which the specific notification can be executed in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state transitioned by the first transition result or the second transition result, the first specific result included in both transition results. When the first specific pattern combination corresponding to the above is stopped, the specific notification is executed in any advantageous state, and when the second specific pattern combination corresponding to the second specific result included only in the second transition result is stopped, it is specified. Execution of notification is restricted. In this way, since the execution of the specific notification during the second advantageous state can be restricted by the stop result at the time of winning the second transition result, it is determined whether the specific notification is executed or not depending on whether the specific notification is executed or not. It is possible to switch whether or not to stop by the stop roll. By doing so, whether or not the above advantageous state can be determined is determined by the player's own stop operation, and in a configuration provided with a plurality of advantageous states, it is a pleasure to determine the type of the advantageous state. Or, you can enjoy the joy of not discriminating.

Feature D2. When the specific notification is executed, the specific notification execution means can perform specific control (freeze effect) to limit the progress of a predetermined game operation.
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein when the execution of the specific notification is restricted by the limiting means, the execution of the specific control is also restricted.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is a notification accompanied by a specific control in which the progress of a predetermined game operation is restricted, and the player recognizes the specific notification through the restriction of the game operation as in the so-called freeze effect. At the same time, the degree of attention of the specific notification is increased. On the other hand, even with such a specific control having a high effect of production, it is considered that it may be rather troublesome for a player who wants to prioritize smooth progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who wants to prioritize the progress of the game by limiting the execution of the specific notification by the stop result and not performing the specific control at the time of the restriction.

Feature D3. The feature D1 or the feature D2 is set so that the execution of the specific notification is restricted by the limiting means and the execution of the specific notification is not restricted so that the advantage for the player does not change. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the advantage does not change depending on the presence or absence of the specific notification. Therefore, for example, as in the effect of the feature D2, the player who wants to prioritize the game progress is selected (select the restriction of the specific notification). Can be done more purely, regardless of the advantage.

Feature D4. In the drive control means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result and the stop operation means is operated in a specific mode capable of stopping the second specific pattern combination, the first (2) While the specific pattern combination can be stopped, each orbiter is controlled so that the first specific pattern combination is stopped when the operation is performed in a mode different from the specific mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in a specific mode at the time of winning the second transition result, the second specific pattern combination is stopped and the execution of the specific notification is restricted, while the specific mode is used. If the operation is not performed, the first specific pattern combination is stopped instead of the second specific pattern combination, and the execution of the specific notification is not restricted. In this way, by making the presence or absence of execution of the specific notification different depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, it is possible to leave the execution of the specific notification to the player's selection and grasp the selection on the gaming machine side. Will be.

Feature D5. In the drive control means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result and the stop operation means is operated in a specific mode capable of stopping the second specific pattern combination, the first 2 Features D1 to be characterized in that each orbiter is controlled so that the first specific pattern combination is stopped when the specific pattern combination can be stopped, but the operation is not performed in the specific mode. The gaming machine according to any one of D4.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in a specific mode at the time of winning the second transition result, the second specific pattern combination is stopped and the execution of the specific notification is restricted, while the specific mode is used. If the operation is not performed, the first specific pattern combination is stopped instead of the second specific pattern combination, and the execution of the specific notification is not restricted. In this way, by making the presence or absence of execution of the specific notification different depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, it is possible to leave the execution of the specific notification to the player's selection and grasp the selection on the gaming machine side. At the same time, since either the first specific pattern combination or the second specific pattern combination is stopped, even if the specific mode for limiting the specific notification fails, no omission occurs. You can make that choice with confidence.

Feature D6. In the specific orbital body (left reel 32L) of each of the orbiting bodies, the number of arrangements of the patterns corresponding to the second specific pattern combination is smaller than the number of arrangements of the patterns corresponding to the first specific pattern combination. The gaming machine according to feature D4 or feature D5.

According to the above configuration, when trying to stop the second specific pattern combination instead of the first specific pattern combination, stop aiming at the second side pattern, which is smaller in number than the first side, in the specific orbiting body. It is necessary to operate (operate in a specific mode). That is, stopping the second specific pattern combination in a specific mode is a more difficult operation than stopping the first specific pattern combination. By doing so, basically, the specific notification is executed to give priority to the effect, and the execution of the specific notification is restricted only when the difficult operation is intentionally performed. It is possible to avoid events that are difficult to execute, and it can be expected to have the effect of arousing the aspiration of the player's operation skills.

Feature D7. The first pattern corresponding to the first specific pattern combination and the second pattern corresponding to the second specific pattern combination are the predetermined above in the specific orbiting body on the upstream side of the orbit with respect to the second pattern. The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein the first symbol is located and the other first symbol is arranged so as to be located on the downstream side of the circumference with respect to the second symbol.

According to the above configuration, if the timing of the stop operation for the specific orbiting body is the timing until the predetermined first symbol on the upstream side reaches the effective position, the first symbol is stopped. Then, after the predetermined first symbol has passed the effective position, the second symbol is stopped at the timing until the second symbol reaches the effective position, and the second symbol has passed the effective position. If it is later, the other first pattern on the downstream side stops at the effective position. That is, if the second symbol is to be stopped, it is limited to the timing between the time when the predetermined first symbol passes through the effective position and the time when the second symbol reaches the effective position. By doing so, it is possible to set the priority order of pulling in the first pattern and the second pattern while making it possible to stop both the first pattern and the second pattern.

Feature D8. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated at the first timing, the corresponding pattern combination is stopped, the corresponding privilege is given by the privilege giving means, and the stop operation means is given. If the operation is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the corresponding pattern combination does not stop and the corresponding privilege is not given by the privilege giving means. ) Is provided,
The second specific pattern combination is characterized in that corresponding patterns are arranged on each of the orbitals so that the combination cannot be stopped when operated at the first timing. Features D4 to D7 The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the stop operation is mainly performed at the first timing in the normal time so that the privilege at the time of winning the operation response result can be fully enjoyed, and based on such a premise. , The second specific pattern combination does not stop when the stop operation is performed at the first timing. That is, if an attempt is made to limit the specific notification, it is necessary to perform a stop operation at a timing different from the normal time, and it is possible to prevent an event in which the specific notification is unintentionally restricted.

Feature D9. A storage means (freeze restriction flag by the main control device 101) that can store stop information that the second specific pattern combination corresponding to the second specific result has stopped even when the second transition result is won. It has a function to execute the setting process).
The limiting means has a configuration capable of limiting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification executing means based on the stop information.
The storage means can hold the stop information even after the end of the second advantageous state based on the second transition result winning that triggered the storage of the stop information, features D1 to D8. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, the stop information for stopping the second specific symbol combination is retained even after the second advantageous state, so that the second specific symbol combination is not stopped when the next second transition result is won. However, the execution of the specific notification during the second advantageous state is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to improve the operability without forcing the second specific pattern combination to be stopped each time.

Feature D10. A storage means (freeze restriction flag by the main control device 101) that can store stop information that the second specific pattern combination corresponding to the second specific result has stopped even when the second transition result is won. It has a function to execute the setting process).
The limiting means has a configuration capable of limiting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification executing means based on the stop information.
The erasing means (BB winning game winning result by the main control device 101) capable of erasing the stop information stored by the storage means before the transition to the second advantageous state based on the specific operation by the player. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, which is characterized by having a function of executing a corresponding process).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to solve the problem that the specific notification is unintentionally restricted when the second specific pattern combination is accidentally stopped.

Feature D11. The gaming machine according to feature D10, wherein the operation of stopping the second specific pattern combination is more difficult to operate than the specific operation.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress an event in which a player who has unintentionally stopped the second specific pattern combination cannot easily release the restriction of the specific notification even if he / she tries to release the restriction.

The specific configuration of the above configuration is as follows, for example.

"The drive control means is said to be the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result and the stop operation means is operated at a specific timing at which the second specific pattern combination can be stopped. While the second specific pattern combination can be stopped, each orbiter is controlled so that the first specific pattern combination is stopped when the operation is performed at a timing different from the specific timing.
The specific operation is to operate each of the stop operation means in a specific order. "

Feature D12. When the erasing means performs the specific operation before the transition to the second advantageous state based on the winning of the second transition result for the second specific pattern combination that triggered the storage of the stop information. The gaming machine according to feature D10 or feature D11, wherein the stop information can be erased before the transition to the second advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific pattern combination is accidentally stopped, the specific operation is performed before the second advantageous state transition based on the second transition result winning of stopping the second specific symbol combination. If this is done, it becomes possible to execute the specific notification in the second advantageous state. As a result, the number of scenes in which the specific notification is unintentionally restricted is reduced, and the effect of the specific notification can be preferably expected.

Feature D13. The erasing means is after the second advantageous state based on the winning of the second transition result for the second specific pattern combination that triggered the storage of the stop information is completed, and the second transition result is obtained. The gaming machine according to any one of features D10 to D12, wherein the stop information can be erased based on the fact that the specific operation is performed when the winning is won.

According to the above configuration, when the player changes his / her mind after stopping the second specific pattern combination and digesting the second advantageous state in which the specific notification is restricted, the specific notification is made in the second advantageous state after the next time. Can be executed. In this case, it is not possible to accept the specific operation at any time after the digestion of the second advantageous state in which the above-mentioned specific notification is restricted, and it is possible to accept the specific operation when the second transition result is won. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event such as unintentionally performing a specific operation.

Feature D14. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
Each orbit is performed so that a normal gaming operation of starting the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stopping the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated is performed. Drive control means for controlling the body (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
Based on the fact that the winning result by the lottery means is the transition result (for example, strong cherry duplication 1), and the transition symbol combination (“red 7” symbol alignment) corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. Then, an advantageous transition means (a function of executing a process of shifting to the restricted target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous advantageous state (restricted non-target bonus) for the player).
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result including the transition result and a predetermined specific result (strong cherry) is set.
In the advantageous state, the specific notification executing means (function for executing the BB medium addition process and the BB medium addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing the specific notification (additional notification effect, pseudo-addition notification effect) and
In the case where the duplicated result is won, the specific notification execution means is used based on either that the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result is stopped or that the specific pattern combination is not stopped. A limiting means that can limit the execution of the specific notification (a function of executing the winning result correspondence process for the BB winning game by the main control device 101) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, it is premised that the specific notification can be executed in the advantageous state of transition when the pattern combination for transition is stopped in the transition result winning, and the specific notification in the advantageous state is performed by the stop result at the time of winning the duplicate result. Execution can be restricted. More specifically, the duplicate result is a result including the migration result and the specific result, and the specific notification is performed while the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result is stopped or the specific pattern combination is not stopped. Is restricted. In other words, in the former, the specific notification is restricted based on the specific result winning, and in the latter, the specific result is missed or the transition result winning game is shifted to an advantageous state (the pattern combination for transition is stopped). Specific notification is restricted based on this. In this way, if the effect in the advantageous state is different depending on the stop result in the transition result winning game, it is advantageous in addition to the playability in the winning game that the transition result winning (advantageous state winning) is detected. The playability of determining the content of the effect during the state by the stop operation is added, and it becomes possible to greatly improve the interest in the winning game.

Feature D15. The advantage for the player is common between the case where the execution of the specific notification is restricted and the case where the execution of the specific notification is not restricted.
In the drive control means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the stop operation means is operated at a specific timing at which the specific pattern combination can be stopped, the specific pattern combination is operated. On the other hand, if the operation is performed at a timing different from the specific timing, the specific pattern combination cannot be stopped.
The limiting means can limit the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification executing means based on the case where the duplicate result is won and the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result is stopped. The gaming machine according to the feature D14.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the advantages are common regardless of whether or not there is a restriction on specific notification, if a specific result that may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation can be won. , Execution of specific notification is restricted. It is considered that a player who is skilled in a game does not like a mere production in which the advantage does not change, but the above configuration makes a player who can stop and operate so as not to cause a dropout. It is a configuration that identifies as a player who is present and does not perform specific notification as a mere production. By doing so, it is possible to set the effects according to the needs of various players.

The configurations shown in the features D1 to D13 may be individually applied to the features D14 or D15, or the configurations shown in the features D1 to D13 may be applied in combination.

Feature D16. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
Each orbit is performed so that a normal gaming operation of starting the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stopping the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated is performed. Drive control means for controlling the body (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The winning result by the lottery means is a transition result (for example, special lip A duplication 1), and the transition symbol combination (“red 7” symbol alignment) corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. Based on this, an advantageous transition means (a function of executing a process of shifting to a restricted target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous advantageous state (restricted non-target bonus) for the player.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
In the advantageous state, the specific notification executing means (function for executing the BB medium addition process and the BB medium addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing the specific notification (additional notification effect, pseudo-addition notification effect) and
A function to execute a processing for dealing with a winning result for a BB winning game by the main control device 101, which can limit the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification executing means based on the stop result when the transition result is won. )When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, it is premised that the specific notification can be executed in the advantageous state of transition when the transition result is won and the pattern combination for transition is stopped. Execution can be restricted. In this way, if the effect in the advantageous state is different depending on the stop result in the transition result winning game, it is advantageous in addition to the playability in the winning game that the transition result winning (advantageous state winning) is detected. The playability of determining the content of the effect during the state by the stop operation is added, and it becomes possible to greatly improve the interest in the winning game.

The configurations shown by the features D1 to D15 may be applied individually to the features D16, or the configurations shown by the features D1 to D15 may be applied in combination.

Feature D17. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
Each orbit is performed so that a normal gaming operation of starting the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stopping the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated is performed. Drive control means for controlling the body (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
The winning result by the lottery means is a transition result (for example, special lip A duplication 1), and the transition symbol combination (“red 7” symbol alignment) corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. Based on this, an advantageous transition means (a function of executing a process of shifting to a restricted target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous advantageous state (restricted non-target bonus) for the player.
In a winning game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result winning, when the first specific pattern combination stops at the effective position, the first specific control (control not to execute the pseudo addition notification effect) in the advantageous state. ) Is a first specific control execution means (a function of executing processing when a freeze limit flag is set by the main control device 101), and a gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is premised that the game shifts to an advantageous state when the transition result is won and the pattern combination for transition is stopped, and the first specific control is used as the control during the advantageous state depending on the stop result in the transition result winning game. Will be done. In this way, if the control during the advantageous state can be different depending on the stop result in the transition result winning game, it is advantageous in addition to the playability in the winning game of detecting the transition result winning (advantageous state winning). The playability of determining the control content (effect content) during the state by the stop operation is added, and it becomes possible to greatly improve the interest in the winning game.

Feature D18. In the winning game, when a second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination stops at the effective position, a second specific control (pseudo addition) different from the first specific control is performed in the advantageous state. The second specific control execution means (a function of executing a process for pseudo-additional notification effect by the main control device 101) capable of executing a notification effect) is provided. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is premised that the game shifts to an advantageous state when the transition result is won and the pattern combination for transition is stopped, and the control in the advantageous state is the first specific control depending on the stop result in the transition result winning game. It will be different from the second specific control. In this way, if the control during the advantageous state is different depending on the stop result in the transition result winning game, it is advantageous in addition to the playability in the winning game that the transition result winning (advantageous state winning) is detected. The playability of determining the control content (effect content) during the state by the stop operation is added, and it becomes possible to greatly improve the interest in the winning game.

Feature D19. A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a first pseudo-effect processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific notification (pseudo-freeze effect) by a predetermined notification means in the advantageous state is provided.
The first specific control execution means limits the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means as the first specific control.
The gaming machine according to feature D18, wherein the second specific control execution means allows the specific notification execution means to execute the specific notification as the second specific control.

According to the above configuration, the execution of the specific notification during the advantageous state is permitted or restricted depending on the stop result in the transition result winning game. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the specific notification is executed by the player's own stop operation. More specifically, in the winning game, the player who does not want to see the specific notification stops the first specific pattern combination, the player who wants to see the specific notification stops the second specific pattern combination, and so on. There is room for the player to intervene in the notification content during the advantageous state in the game, and the playability of the winning game can be improved.

Feature D20. When the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution means, a special control (freeze effect) that limits the progress of a predetermined game operation can be executed.
The gaming machine according to feature D19, wherein when the execution of the specific notification is restricted by the first specific control executing means, the execution of the special control is also restricted.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is a notification accompanied by a special control that limits the progress of a predetermined game operation, and the player recognizes the specific notification by restricting the game operation as in the so-called freeze effect. At the same time, the degree of attention of the specific notification is increased. On the other hand, even with such a special control having a high effect of production, it is considered that it may be rather troublesome for a player who wants to prioritize smooth progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who wants to prioritize the progress of the game by limiting the execution of the specific notification by the stop result and not performing the special control at the time of the limitation.

Feature D21. There is a change in the advantage for the player between the case where the first specific control is executed by the first specific control execution means and the case where the second specific control is executed by the second specific control execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D18 to D20, which is set so as not to occur.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to expect an effect of differentiating the control in the advantageous state depending on the stop result in the winning game within a range that does not cause a change in the advantage.

In particular, in a configuration such as feature D20 in which the progress of a predetermined game motion can be restricted, the selection of a player who wants to prioritize the progress of the game (selecting the limitation of specific notification) is made more purely regardless of the advantage. It will be possible to do it.

Feature D22. In the winning game, when the stop operation means is operated in a specific mode in which the first specific symbol combination can be stopped, the drive control means can stop the first specific symbol combination. On the other hand, according to any one of the features D18 to D21, the peripheral body is controlled so that the second specific pattern combination is stopped when the operation is performed in a mode different from the specific mode. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in a specific mode in the transition result winning game, the first specific pattern combination is stopped and the first specific control is executed, while the operation is performed in the specific mode. If not, the second specific pattern combination is stopped instead of the first specific pattern combination, and the second specific control is executed. In this way, by making the control in the advantageous state different depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, it becomes possible for the gaming machine side to grasp the specific control selected by the player himself / herself as the operation mode.

Feature D23. In the winning game, when the stop operation means is operated in a specific mode in which the first specific symbol combination can be stopped, the drive control means can stop the first specific symbol combination. On the other hand, the gaming machine according to any one of features D18 to D22, wherein each orbiting body is controlled so that the second specific pattern combination is stopped when the operation is not performed in the specific mode. ..

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in a specific mode in the transition result winning game, the first specific pattern combination is stopped and the first specific control is executed, while the operation is performed in the specific mode. If not, the second specific pattern combination is stopped instead of the first specific pattern combination, and the second specific control is executed. In this way, by making the control in the advantageous state different depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, it becomes possible for the gaming machine side to grasp the specific control selected by the player himself / herself as the operation mode.

In particular, in the above configuration, since either the first specific pattern combination or the second specific pattern combination is stopped, even if the specific mode fails when trying to execute the first specific control, it is missed. Can be made with confidence.

Feature D24. In the specific orbiter (left reel 32L) of each of the orbiting bodies, the number of arrangements of the patterns corresponding to the first specific pattern combination is smaller than the number of arrangements of the patterns corresponding to the second specific pattern combination. The gaming machine according to the feature D22 or the feature D23.

According to the above configuration, when trying to stop the first specific pattern combination instead of the second specific pattern combination, stop aiming at the first side pattern, which is smaller in number than the second side, in the specific orbiting body. It is necessary to operate (operate in a specific mode). That is, stopping the first specific pattern combination in a specific mode is a more difficult operation than stopping the second specific pattern combination. By doing so, the second specific control is basically executed, and the first specific control is executed only when the difficult operation is intentionally performed. By doing so, for example, in a configuration in which a predetermined effect is performed in the second specific control, it is possible to avoid an event that the prepared effect is not easily executed, and an effect of arousing the aspiration of the player's operation technique. Can also be expected.

Feature D25. The first pattern corresponding to the first specific pattern combination and the second pattern corresponding to the second specific pattern combination are the predetermined above in the specific orbiting body on the upstream side of the orbit with respect to the first pattern. The gaming machine according to feature D24, wherein the second pattern is located, and the other second pattern is arranged so as to be located on the downstream side of the circumference with respect to the first pattern.

According to the above configuration, if the timing of the stop operation for the specific orbiting body is the timing until the predetermined second symbol on the upstream side reaches the effective position, the second symbol is stopped. Then, after the predetermined second symbol has passed the effective position, the first symbol is stopped at the timing until the first symbol reaches the effective position, and the first symbol has passed the effective position. If it is later, the other second pattern on the downstream side stops at the effective position. That is, if the first symbol is to be stopped, it is limited to the timing between the time when the predetermined second symbol passes through the effective position and the time when the first symbol reaches the effective position. By doing so, it is possible to set the priority order of pulling in the first pattern and the second pattern while making it possible to stop both the first pattern and the second pattern.

Feature D26. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated at the first timing, the corresponding pattern combination is stopped, the corresponding privilege is given by the privilege giving means, and the stop operation means is given. If the operation is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the corresponding pattern combination does not stop and the corresponding privilege is not given by the privilege giving means. ) Is provided,
The first specific pattern combination is characterized in that corresponding patterns are arranged on each orbiting body so that it cannot be stopped when operated at the first timing. Features D22 to D25 The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the stop operation is mainly performed at the first timing in the normal time so that the privilege at the time of winning the operation response result can be fully enjoyed, and based on such a premise. , The first specific pattern combination does not stop when the stop operation is performed at the first timing. That is, if the first specific control is to be executed, it is necessary to perform a stop operation at a timing different from the normal time, and it is possible to make it difficult for an event in which the first specific control is executed to occur unintentionally.

Feature D27. In the winning game, a storage means (a function of executing a process of setting a freeze restriction flag by the main control device 101) that can store stop information that the first specific pattern combination has stopped is provided.
The first specific control execution means has a configuration capable of executing the first specific control based on the stop information.
One of the features D17 to D26, wherein the storage means can retain the stop information even after the advantageous state based on the transition result winning that triggered the storage of the stop information ends. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, since the stop information in which the first specific pattern combination is stopped is retained even after the advantageous state, it is advantageous even if the first specific pattern combination is not stopped at the time of winning the next transition result. The first specific control is executed during the state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the operability without forcing the first specific pattern combination to be stopped each time.

Feature D28. In the winning game, a storage means (a function of executing a process of setting a freeze restriction flag by the main control device 101) that can store stop information that the first specific pattern combination has stopped is provided.
The first specific control execution means has a configuration capable of executing the first specific control based on the stop information.
Erasing means that can erase the stop information stored by the storage means before the transition to the advantageous state based on the specific operation by the player (process for dealing with the winning result for the BB winning game by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of the features D17 to D27, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to eliminate the fact that the first specific control is unintentionally executed when the first specific pattern combination is accidentally stopped.

Feature D29. The gaming machine according to feature D28, wherein the operation of stopping the first specific pattern combination is more difficult to operate than the specific operation.

According to the above configuration, even if a player who has unintentionally stopped the first specific pattern combination tries to execute the second specific control instead of the first specific control, it is difficult to do so. It can be suppressed.

The specific configuration of the above configuration is as follows, for example.

"In the drive control means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the stop operation means is operated at a specific timing at which the first specific pattern combination can be stopped, the first While the specific pattern combination can be stopped, each orbiter is controlled so that the second specific pattern combination is stopped when the operation is performed at a timing different from the specific timing.
The specific operation is to operate each of the stop operation means in a specific order. "

Feature D30. When the specific operation is performed before the transition to the advantageous state based on the transition result winning for the first specific pattern combination that triggered the storage of the stop information, the erasing means shifts to the advantageous state. The gaming machine according to feature D28 or feature D29, wherein the stop information can be previously erased.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific pattern combination is accidentally stopped, if the specific operation is performed before the transition to the advantageous state based on the transition result winning of the transition result in which the first specific pattern combination is stopped, the corresponding operation is performed. It is possible to execute the second specific control instead of the first specific control in the advantageous state. As a result, the number of situations in which the first specific control is unintentionally executed is reduced.

Feature D31. The erasing means is said to be after the advantageous state based on the transition result winning for the first specific pattern combination that has triggered the storage of the stop information is completed, and when the transition result is won. The gaming machine according to any one of features D28 to D30, wherein the stop information can be erased based on the specific operation being performed.

According to the above configuration, when the player changes his / her mind after stopping the first specific pattern combination and digesting the advantageous state in which the first specific control is executed, the second specific control is performed in the advantageous state from the next time onward. Can be executed. In this case, it is not possible to accept the specific operation at any time after the advantageous state in which the first specific control is executed is exhausted, but it is possible to accept the specific operation when the transition result is won. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of events such as unintentional operation.

Feature D32. As the migration result, the first migration result (for example, special lip A duplication 1) and the second migration result (for example, special lip AB duplication 1) are set.
The advantageous transition means is
The winning result by the lottery means is the first transition result, and the game state is played based on the fact that the symbol combination (“red 7” symbol alignment) corresponding to the first transition result is stopped at the effective position. The first advantageous transition means (function to execute the process of shifting to the restricted non-target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) to shift to the first advantageous state (restricted non-target bonus) that is advantageous for the person.
The second lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result, and the gaming state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the pattern combination corresponding to the second transition result is stopped at the effective position. The second advantageous transition means (function to execute the process of shifting to the restricted target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101) to shift to the advantageous state (restricted target bonus), and
Equipped with
The first transition result is a result including at least the first specific result (special lip A).
The second transition result is a result including at least the first specific result and a second specific result (special lip B) different from the first specific result.
The privilege giving means grants a privilege corresponding to the first specific result based on the stop of the second specific pattern combination at the effective position, and the first specific pattern combination is stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of features D18 to D31, which is characterized in that a privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given based on the above.

According to the above configuration, it is premised that the first transition result or the second transition result shifts to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state, and the second specification corresponding to the first specific result included in both transition results. When the pattern combination of is stopped, the second specific control is executed in any advantageous state, and when the first specific pattern combination corresponding to the second specific result included only in the second transition result is stopped, the first specific control is executed. Will be executed. In this way, since the control during the second advantageous state differs depending on the stop result at the time of winning the second transition result, it is possible to switch whether to determine whether the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is possible depending on the stop result. It becomes. By doing so, whether or not the above advantageous state can be determined is determined by the player's own stop operation, and in a configuration provided with a plurality of advantageous states, it is a pleasure to determine the type of the advantageous state. Or, you can enjoy the joy of not discriminating.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set.
Based on the establishment of the predetermined termination condition, the low advantage transition means for shifting the high advantage state to the low advantage state (the normal termination condition is satisfied in the second process of displaying the section by the main controller 101). Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on),
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of high-advantageous states (ZG number of remaining games in advantageous section) and
An increasing means (a function of executing a game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, the increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed can be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). Means (a function that performs processing for executing the additional notification effect by the main control device 101) and
A second increase notification execution means (a function for performing a process for executing an advance notification effect by the main control device 101) capable of executing an increase notification by a predetermined notification means in a situation where the specific condition is not satisfied. ,
After the increase notification is executed by the second increase notification execution means, when the specific condition is satisfied, the limiting means (step by the main control device 101) for limiting the execution of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the processes of S5101 to S5105).

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and in the high advantage state, the remaining number of high advantage states is increased when a specific condition is satisfied. Since it has a so-called addition function and an increase notification is performed in response to an increase in the remaining number, the expectation that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. Moreover, in the above configuration, the increase notification may be performed even if the specific condition is not satisfied, and even in the situation where the specific condition is not satisfied or the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied, it is in a highly advantageous state. The degree of attention is increasing. In addition, when the increase notification is performed when the specific condition is not satisfied, the increase notification when the specific condition is satisfied after that can be restricted. That is, it can be said that the above configuration is a configuration in which the increase notification is executed before the increase processing and then the increase notification portion executed before the increase processing is supplemented. By doing so, it is possible to generate an increase notification at a free timing while suppressing the difference from the actual remaining number from becoming too large.

The above-mentioned "low advantage transition means" may be expressed as follows.

The high advantageous state is referred to as "a low advantageous transition means for shifting to the low advantageous state when the high advantageous state ends" or "based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the high advantageous state". A low-advantage transition means to shift to a low-advantage state. "

Feature E2. It is provided with an increase amount grasping means (a function of executing a process of grasping the pre-emptive counter MG by the main control device 101) for grasping the increase amount of the remaining number corresponding to the increase notification executed by the second increase notification execution means.
The limiting means is described in feature E1 characterized in that the execution of the increase notification corresponding to the increase processing executed based on the establishment of the specific condition is limited by the increase grasped by the increase grasping means. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the execution of the increase notification corresponding to the increase processing executed thereafter is restricted by the increase in the remaining number in the increase notification executed when the specific condition is not satisfied. Therefore, even if the increase notification is performed when the specific condition is not satisfied, not all the increase notification corresponding to the subsequent increase processing is restricted, and the effect of the increase notification to be performed when the specific condition is actually satisfied is achieved. While expecting, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention in situations where specific conditions are difficult to be satisfied.

Feature E3. As the specific condition, at least the first specific condition (addition based on a so-called rare role such as a strong watermelon) and the second specific condition (addition based on a so-called normal role such as a push order bell) are set.
The limiting means is described in the case where the first specific condition is satisfied and the case where the second specific condition is satisfied as the specific condition after the increase notification is executed by the second increase notification execution means. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the limit rate for executing the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means is different.

According to the above configuration, after the increase notification is performed when the specific condition is not satisfied, the increase notification is executed by the first increase notification execution means depending on whether the first specific condition is satisfied or the second specific condition is satisfied. Whether or not is restricted (easiness of restriction) is different. For example, if the first specific condition is more likely to be restricted, it is difficult to execute the increase notification when the first specific condition is satisfied after the increase notification is performed when the specific condition is not satisfied, and when the second specific condition is satisfied. The increase notification is easier to execute than that. In this way, if the degree to which the increase notification is restricted differs depending on the type of specific condition, it becomes difficult to realize that the increase notification is restricted as compared with the case where the increase notification is restricted uniformly. This makes it difficult to determine that the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is executed when the specific condition is not satisfied, and it is possible to suitably expect the effect of the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means. Become.

Feature E4. The first specific condition is less likely to be satisfied than the second specific condition.
In the limiting means, after the increase notification is executed by the second increase notification execution means, the case where the first specific condition is satisfied as the specific condition is higher than the case where the second specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein it is easy to limit the execution of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means.

According to the above configuration, if the specific condition that is more likely to be satisfied is satisfied after the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means, the execution of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means is restricted. It is considered that the more difficult the specific condition is to be satisfied, the greater the expectation is placed on the increase in the remaining number at the time of establishment. It is thought that it will be sent. In other words, if the execution of the increase notification is restricted when a specific condition that is difficult to be satisfied is satisfied, the player who expects the increase notification will be greatly disappointed, and the execution probability of the increase notification when the restriction is not performed. In relation to this, it may give a great sense of discomfort. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when a specific condition that is difficult to be satisfied is satisfied, it is difficult to be restricted, and the increase notification of the increase process based on the specific condition on the side that is easy to be satisfied is easily restricted. It is possible to make up for the increased notification amount well while making it difficult to realize that is restricted.

Feature E5. The second increase notification execution means satisfies the specific condition based on the establishment of one special condition among a plurality of predetermined special conditions (advanced notification effect of various numbers of games). It is possible to execute increase notification in no situation,
The restriction rate of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means in the restriction means is common regardless of the type of the special condition that triggered the execution of the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E4.

According to the above configuration, the type of the trigger for executing the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means does not affect the subsequent limit rate of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means. By doing so, not only the processing configuration for limiting the increase notification is simplified, but also the impression that the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is based on the establishment of a specific condition is strengthened. Can be done. That is, if the subsequent limit rate is different depending on the execution trigger of the previous increase notification, the limit rate affects the execution rate of the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means and the increase number notified by the increase notification. It will have an effect, and it may be significantly different from the parameter of the increase notification when a specific condition is satisfied. In that respect, as in the above configuration, the second increase notification execution means is configured to execute the increase notification without considering the subsequent limit rate, and is close to the parameter of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means. It is possible to perform an increase notification with the same parameters, and it is possible to make it more difficult to realize that a specific condition is not satisfied.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the limiting rate of the increase notification by the limiting means is different depending on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means.

In order to reduce the difference between the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means and the actual remaining number, it is preferable that the earlier increase notification portion is compensated earlier. On the other hand, if the remaining number is large, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be satisfied after that, and a chance to compensate for the previous increase notification is likely to occur. Further, if the remaining number is small, it is unlikely that a specific condition will be satisfied after that, and the chance of making up for the above is unlikely to occur. Based on such a premise, if the limit rate is different according to the remaining number as in the above configuration, for example, it is forcibly increased even though the remaining number is large because the compensation is made earlier. It is difficult to limit the notification, and it is possible to compensate for the increased notification while not giving a sense of discomfort.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to feature E6, wherein the smaller the remaining number grasped by the grasping means, the easier it is for the limiting means to limit the increase notification.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature E6, when the remaining number is small, the increase is positively compensated for, and the difference in the number of notifications when the high advantageous state ends is reduced. Is possible.

Feature E8. The display corresponding to the remaining number in the high advantageous state, and the remaining number display reflecting the increase in the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means and the second increase notification execution means is displayed by the predetermined notification means. Executable remaining number display execution means (function to execute processing related to the display remaining number counter HG by the main controller 101),
Based on the fact that the remaining number display displayed by the remaining number display executing means becomes a predetermined predetermined number (1), a difference capable of executing notification regarding the difference from the remaining number grasped by the grasping means. Notification execution means (function to execute post-addition notification processing by the main control device 101) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7.

The remaining number display by the remaining number display execution means is not only the increase notification for the amount actually performed by the increase notification execution means by the first increase notification execution means, but also the increase by the second increase notification execution means performed without the increase processing. Since the increase in the notification is reflected, it is difficult to distinguish between the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means and the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means from the remaining number display. However, since the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means has not actually been increased, the display may differ from the remaining number grasped by the actual grasping means. Therefore, in the above configuration, when the remaining number display becomes a predetermined predetermined number, the notification regarding the difference can be performed, so that the high advantageous state can be terminated after eliminating the above difference. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity such as termination even though there is a remainder in the remaining number display.

Feature E9. When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, the increase notification (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed is notified by a predetermined notification means in a game after the game in which the increase processing is performed. (Auxiliary display unit 65) is provided with a third increase notification execution means (a function of performing processing for executing a post-addition notification effect by the main control device 101) that can be executed.
The remaining number display execution means can also reflect the increase in the increase notification by the third increase notification execution means.
The gaming machine according to feature E8, wherein the difference notification executing means can execute an increase notification by the third increase notification execution means as a notification regarding a difference from the remaining number grasped by the grasp means. ..

According to the above configuration, when the remaining number display becomes a predetermined number, the notification regarding the difference from the remaining number grasped by the grasping means is the notification of the amount for which the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means is not compensated. Not only that, the notification of the unexecuted portion of the increase notification by the third increase notification execution means may be performed. That is, as the notification regarding the above difference, not only the notification that the remaining number display is larger than the actual remaining number (for example, the notification that the remaining number display is subtracted) but also the remaining number display is smaller than the actual remaining number. Notification (for example, notification for increasing the remaining number display) can also be performed. Therefore, the difference notification can be not only a disappointing notification but also a happy notification for the player, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the difference notification.

Feature E10. When the difference notification executing means executes the notification regarding the difference regarding the increase notification executed by the second increase notification execution means, the special privilege granting means (which can give the player a special privilege). The gaming machine according to feature E9, which comprises a function of executing a process of setting a special effect command by the main control device 101).

The correction notification that reduces the actual remaining number is not preferable for the player, but in the above configuration, the correction notification on the second increase notification execution means side, that is, the actual notification, is used as the correction notification. If the notification is made so that the remaining number of is low, a special privilege will be given. Therefore, it is possible to follow the disappointment when subtracted.

Feature E11. The gaming machine according to any one of features E8 to E10, wherein the predetermined number is a number corresponding to an increase in the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means.

According to the above configuration, even if the increase in the increase notification is not completely compensated, the high advantage state can be terminated after correcting the remaining number display by the notification regarding the difference. Moreover, by doing the above, the player is prepared to be notified for correction (notification regarding the difference) when the remaining number is displayed corresponding to the increase number of the increase notification performed earlier. It becomes possible to do so, and the feeling of disappointment is lessened than when a notification for correction is suddenly given.

Feature E12. The difference notification execution means is
When the remaining number display displayed by the remaining number display executing means becomes the first predetermined number corresponding to the increase of the increased notification by the second increasing notification executing means, the remaining number is grasped by the grasping means. When the remaining number display displayed by the remaining number display executing means becomes the second predetermined number, which is smaller than the first predetermined number, the notification regarding the difference between the two can be executed, and the remaining number display is grasped by the grasping means. It is possible to perform notification regarding the difference from the remaining number.
When the notification regarding the difference of the increase notification executed by the second increase notification execution means is executed by the second predetermined number, the special privilege granting means (which can give the player a special privilege). The gaming machine according to any one of features E8 to E11, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a process of setting a special effect command by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, if the increase in the increase notification is not completely compensated, the notification for correction (notification regarding the difference) is made by the first predetermined number, and if the compensation is made even a little, the first predetermined number is used. 2 Notification for correction is given at a predetermined number. By doing so, it is possible to more preferably avoid the occurrence of an event in which the high advantage state ends while the difference exists with respect to the display of the remaining number.

Moreover, regardless of whether the number is the first predetermined number or the second predetermined number, the notification for correction that reduces the actual remaining number is not preferable for the player, but in the above configuration, the first predetermined number is used. 2 If a predetermined number of notifications for correction are given, special benefits will be given. Therefore, when the notification for correction is not made in the first predetermined number, it is desired that the notification for correction is made in the second predetermined number, and the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is made. A new playability is created by using the notification for correction caused by.

Feature E13. A restricted state (restricted target bonus) is set in which the establishment of the specific condition is restricted.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, wherein the second increase notification execution means can execute increase notification in the restricted state.

According to the above configuration, even in the restricted state in which the establishment of the specific condition is restricted, the increase notification can be executed to give the impression as if the specific condition can be satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest in such a restricted state.

Feature E14. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values of the plurality of stages is set. It is equipped with a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
The feature is that the transition rate to the restricted state is different between the case where the first set value is set by the setting means and the case where the second set value different from the first set value is set. The gaming machine according to the feature E13.

Since the transition rate differs depending on the set value in the restricted state, if it is clearly understood that the establishment of a specific condition is restricted, the set value may be discriminated. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, since the increase notification is executed even if the establishment of the specific condition is restricted, it is difficult to grasp the restricted state and it is difficult to determine the set value. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine or another gaming machine due to the early determination of the set value.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature E group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature E group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc., and is provided with a throwing device that takes in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device that pays out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32 ... Reel as an orbiter, 41 ... Start lever as a start operation means, 42 to 44 ... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64 ... Speakers constituting an auxiliary production unit, 65 ... Auxiliary display unit constituting the auxiliary effect unit, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 ... A CPU that constitutes various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means.

The present invention
Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the design of each orbital body, and
A starting operation means in which the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started when the orbiting body is operated, and
A stop operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means for starting the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stopping the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated.
A lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the privilege giving means capable of giving the privilege corresponding to the predetermined result and the privilege giving means.
A means for shifting to the special state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a situation where the right to shift the gaming state to a special state advantageous to the player has been acquired.
A setting means in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values in the plurality of stages is set.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
A normal state and a specific state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
A means capable of terminating the specific state when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, and
A means capable of grasping the remaining number of the specific state and
A means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied.
When the increase processing is performed, the first means capable of executing the increase notification that the increase processing has been performed by a predetermined notification means, and
A means capable of grasping an unexecuted portion in which the specific condition is satisfied but the increase processing is not executed, or the increase processing is performed but the increase notification is not executed.
A second means capable of executing an increase notification for the unexecuted portion by a predetermined notification means when a predetermined event occurs in the predetermined special state.
Increase notification of unexecuted portion when the predetermined event occurs in the predetermined special state transitioned in the second situation than when the predetermined event occurs in the predetermined special state transitioned in the first situation. And the means by which it can be difficult or impossible to execute,
It is characterized by having.

Claims (1)

Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each orbital body, and
A starting operation means in which the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started when the orbiting body is operated, and
A stop operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means for starting the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stopping the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated.
A lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the privilege giving means capable of giving the privilege corresponding to the predetermined result and the privilege giving means.
A means for shifting to the special state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a situation where the right to shift the gaming state to a special state advantageous to the player has been acquired.
A setting means in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a setting value of one of the setting values in the plurality of stages is set.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
A normal state and a specific state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
A means capable of terminating the specific state when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, and
A means capable of grasping the remaining number of the specific state and
A means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images